Agenda packet — Roseville City Council, April 16, 2025 (part 4 of 27)

Project Area
City of Roseville RMA
City of Roseville, Placer County, California
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!!
!
!
!
!
!
!!
!
!
!
!!
!
!
!!
!
!
!
!!!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
! !
!
Matchline - See Page 9
Matchline - See Page 15
Matchline - See Page 12
Matchline - See Page 14 Matchline - See Page 10
¨¦§80
Main St
Junction Blvd
Vineyard Rd
Atlantic St
Douglas Blvd
Church St
Foothills Blvd
All American City Blvd
Baseline Rd
Vernon St
Base Line Rd
Washington Blvd
King Rd
Taylor St
Royer St
Atkinson St
Foothill Blvd Foothills Blvd
Elm St Porter Dr
Shasta St
Elefa St
Grove St
Vernon St
Acton Way
Oak St
East Dr
Circuit Dr
Lawton Ave
Pleasant St
Brady Ln
Fig St
Folsom Rd
Sierra Blvd
Alta Vista Ave
Chilton Dr
Atkinson St
Zola Ave
Lincoln St
Americana Dr
Sawtell Rd
Park Dr
Hickory St
Badovinac Dr
Cedar St
Kingswood Dr
Antrim Dr
Union St
Manzanita Ave
Country Club Dr
Rand Way Tahoe Ave
Berry St
Duranta St
Birch St
Vallejo Ave
Ivy St
Central Ave
Bonita St
Grider Dr
Lafayette Dr
Revere Dr
Ash St
Shearer St
Carol Ln
Hanisch Dr
Longview Dr
Haman Way
Campo St
Donner Ave
Pilgrims Dr
Grape St
Lorimer Way
Nevada Ave
Evelyn Ave
Thurton Dr
Kaseberg Dr
Derek Pl
Encinal Ave
Wake Field Dr
Estates Dr
Eva Ln
B St
S Lincoln St
Alta Ave
High St
Evergreen Dr
Jesse Ave
Hovey Way Opportunity Dr
Ridgerun Dr
Roseville St
Arbor Dr
Brookwood Rd
Dietrich Dr
Mariposa St
Earl Ave
Placer St
Riesling Dr
Pinion Dr
Copper Way
Deerfield Cir
Pullen St
Marshall Ave
Milnes Ave
Dunford Way
Corporation Yard Rd
Foxhollow Way
Parry St
W Duranta St
Treese Way
Lomitas Ave
Willow Ave
Fremont Ave
Wailea Way
Maciel Ave
Alnwick Dr
Oakborough Ave
Clinton Ave
Mcrae Way
Dorchester Dr
Orwell Dr
Niles Ave
William Way
Cordwell Cir
Herbert St
Misty Ln
Treasure Ln
Keehner Ave
Linda Dr
Bonny Knoll Rd
Aldridge Ln
Barbara Way
Hidalgo Cir
Everett Way
Puebla Way
Lunardi Way
Sutter Ave
Kennedy Dr
Walton Way
Hancock Dr
Carpenter Way Brentwood Rd
Young Way
Crete Way
Tahoe Way
Alola St
Trevor Way
Old Mill Cir
Franklin St
Barjo Aly
Brittain St
Harrison Dr
Hemphill Way
Independence Way
Arbor Ct
Lowdan Ct
Champagne Cir
Las Flores Ave
Coronado Ave
Lilly Cross Dr
Cardigan Ct
Hill Ave
Florene Ct
Ross Ct
Mcanally Dr
Doyle St
Oak Vista Dr
Winfield Ct
Liberty Ct
Kaseberg Cir
Troon Ct
Bernice Ave
Justin Ct
Hickory St
I 0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000
Feet
V:\2252_Roseville_RMA_ConsultingServices\F3_ProjectArea.mxd Source: ESRI DigitalGlobe; Dokken Engineering 9/22/2016; Created By:scotts City Boundary
Amoruso Ranch Specific Plan Area
Jurisdictional Creek Channel
! Outfall Location
Jurisdictional Habitat
Jurisdictional Detention Basins
Non-Jurisdictional Detention Basin
Potential Restoration Projects
FIGURE 3

Page 13 of 18 ends

Page 14 of 18 ends

Project Area
City of Roseville RMA
City of Roseville, Placer County, California
!
! !
!
!
!
!
!
!!
!
!
!!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
! !
!
!
! !
!!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!!
!! !
! !
!
!
!
!
!
!
! ! ! !
!
!
!
!! !
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!!
! !
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
! ! !
!
Matchline - See Page 13
Matchline - See Page 16 Matchline - See Page 14
¨¦§80
¨¦§80
Cirby Way
Sunrise Ave
Vernon St
Atkinson St
Pfe Rd
Roseville Rd
Riverside Ave
6Th St
Foothills Blvd
King Rd
Darling Way
Auburn Blvd
Sunrise Blvd
Auburn Blvd
Sunrise Ave
Twin Oaks Ave
B St
5Th St
Booth Rd
C St
Whyte Ave
Orlando Ave
Vernon St
Coloma Way
Dawnridge Rd
Del Rd
E St
4Th St
Villaview Dr
Livoti Ave
Mariposa Ave
D St
Earl Ave
Clinton Ave
Fair Way
Keith Dr
Bonita St
Keehner Ave
San Simeon Dr
Linden Ave
Hillcrest Ave
Marlin Dr
Dudley Dr
Lyndhurst Ave
Irene Ave
Audrey Way
3Rd St
Kenroy Ln
Lichen Dr
Melrose Ave
Fern St
Viking Pl
Jo Anne Ln
Inglis Way
Robie Way
Hilltop Cir
Juanita Way
Salmon Dr
Lucy Ln
Mannerly Way
Langley Ave
Blue Springs Way
Colnar St
Vernon Oaks Dr
Cresthaven Dr
Bedell Ln
Crescendo Dr
Coral Dr
Portside Cir
Chance Way Newport Way
Ajay Dr
Camelia Ave
March Rd
Vine Ave
Commerce Dr
Milan Way
Reuter Ranch Rd
Palm Ave
Smith Ln
Pearl Way
Darling Way
Opportunity Dr
Machado Ln
Garcia Ave
Windermere Ave
Maple Dr
Cambria Cir
Willow Ave
Neta Ln
Eddie Dr
Beatty Way
Antelope Oaks Ct
W Whyte Ave
Yardley Way
Kris Way
Frosty Pl
Arlene Dr
Meadow Gate Dr
Jewel Way
Fairfield Ave
Donahue Way
Sunset Dr
Mayfair Dr
Subway Rd
Unity Ct
Azure Ct
Vine Way
Wayne Dr
Sun Tree Dr
La Rue Aly
Tina Way
Hanover St
Donald Way
Holly Hill Ct
Gabrielli Dr
Castleberry Cir
Regency Ave
Hernandez Ln
Lazy Oak Ln
Shadow Glen Ct
Bedell Ct
Fir Ave
Lualan Ln
Nob Hill Ct
Louis Ln
Selby Ln Evening Way
Hilltop Cir
B St
Whyte Ave
Vine Ave
I 0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000
Feet
V:\2252_Roseville_RMA_ConsultingServices\F3_ProjectArea.mxd Source: ESRI DigitalGlobe; Dokken Engineering 9/22/2016; Created By:scotts City Boundary
Amoruso Ranch Specific Plan Area
Jurisdictional Creek Channel
! Outfall Location
Jurisdictional Habitat
Jurisdictional Detention Basins
Non-Jurisdictional Detention Basin
Potential Restoration Projects
FIGURE 3

Page 15 of 18 ends

Project Area
City of Roseville RMA
City of Roseville, Placer County, California
!
!
!!!!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!!
! ! ! ! ! !
!
!
!
!
!
!!
!
!
!
!
! !
!
!
!!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!!!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
! !
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!! !
!
!!
!
!
!
! ! !
! !
!
!
Matchline - See Page 14
Matchline - See Page 17
Matchline - See Page 15
Eureka Rd
Cirby Way
Sierra College Blvd
Old Auburn Rd
S Cirby Way
Rocky Ridge Dr
E Roseville Pky
CR E3
Old Auburn Rd
E Roseville Pky
N Cirby Way
Mclaren Dr
Crestmont Ave
Twin Oaks Ave
Vista Creek Dr
Sheridan Ave
Oak Ridge Dr
Champion Oaks Dr
E Roseville Pky
Old Auburn Rd
Wellington Way
Annabelle Ave
Wringer Dr
Loretto Dr
Petite Creek Dr
Ridgecrest Way
Mallard Ln
Parkhill Dr
Hillborough Dr
Argo Dr
Stonebridge Way
Parkview Dr
Canyon Oak Dr
Blossom Hill Way
Oakview Dr
Balboa Dr
Luxor Ln
Putcie Ln
Fenton Way
Ashland Dr
Johnson Ranch Dr
Quail Cir
Lockridge Dr
E Colonial Pky
Garry Oak Dr
Quail Ln
Little Creek Dr
Sheffield Way
Lee Way
Chelsea Way
Olga Way
Hidden Hills Dr
Eaton Dr
Rampart Dr
Chris Ln
Larkin Dr
Bonnie Oak Way
Haskell Way
Ridgeview Dr
Garryanna Dr
Thistle Down Dr
Greenborough Dr
Lobata St
Maidu Dr
Swallow Way
Tilden Dr
Emerson Dr
Woodacre Way
Daggett Dr
Edgecliff Ct
Cottonwood Dr
Yefim Way
Lora Way
Village Center Dr
Knollcrest Dr
Wildwood Way
Eckerman Rd
Mother Lode Dr
Trimble Way
Eastridge Dr
Muirfield Dr
Garino Ln
Bunker Hill Dr Piedmont Way
Banbury Cir
Mckinley Dr
Hardwick Way
Barret Dr
Nelson Dr
Coloma Way
Oakwood Dr
Fairview Dr
Silkwood Way
Oakmont Dr
Dorchester Ln
Erickson Dr
Green Hill Dr
Alder Point Dr
Coast Oak Way
Hillmont Way
Polley Dr
Old Hart Ranch Rd
Cardiff Ln
Valley Forge Way
Oak Tree Dr
Weddington Dr
Daisy Ct
Van Ness Dr
Tiffany Cir
Allegretto Way
Ravine View Dr
Incline Way
Winlock Way
Presidio Way
Meadow Ln
Linda Creek Ct
New England Dr
Longden Cir
Sandmont Dr
Pine Valley Cir
Wendy Ct
Blue Jay Dr
Rolling Hills Dr
Boston Commons Pl
Clina Way
Daggett Ct
Monte Bell Ct
Charlotte Way
Emory Ln
Bridle Ct
Condor Ct
Chancellor Ave
Cabot Ct
Oriole Ct
Acacia Ct
Wrangler Ct
Norwich Ct
Graf Ct
Ridgeside Ct
Blossom Hill Ct
Lund Dr
Keswick Ct
Wade Dr
Quail Cir
Garryanna Dr
I 0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000
Feet
V:\2252_Roseville_RMA_ConsultingServices\F3_ProjectArea.mxd Source: ESRI DigitalGlobe; Dokken Engineering 9/22/2016; Created By:scotts City Boundary
Amoruso Ranch Specific Plan Area
Jurisdictional Creek Channel
! Outfall Location
Jurisdictional Habitat
Jurisdictional Detention Basins
Non-Jurisdictional Detention Basin
Potential Restoration Projects
FIGURE 3

Page 16 of 18 ends

Project Area
City of Roseville RMA
City of Roseville, Placer County, California
!
! !
!
Matchline - See Page 16
Eureka Rd
Barton Rd
Auburn Folsom Rd
E Roseville Pky
Swan Lake Dr
Oak Hill Dr
Elmhurst Dr
Hill Rd
State Rec Area Rd
Oak Leaf Way
Oak Creek Pl Buckeye Ln
Wellington Way
Lou Pl
Sierra Dr
Macduff Dr
Hadleigh Dr
Lou Ct
Ann Pl
Willey Ct
Dickens Dr
Wexford Cir
Chelshire Downs Rd
Muir Way
Purdy Ln
Prior Ridge
Troy Way
Bentwood Way
Wedgewood Dr
Seven Cedars Pl
Bronson Dr
Quail Ln
Parkford Cir
Village Center Dr
Park Rd
Sky View Ln
Fargo Ln
Wagon Way
Country Ct
Carriage Dr
Risley Pl
Bayville Ct
Riviera
Quartzite Cir
Pastor Dr
Pueblo Ct
Farschon Pl
Jay Ln
Golf Club Dr
Private Rd
Westbury Cir
Buddecke Pl
Crocker Rd
Grizzly Way
Benton Acre Rd
Golden Spur Dr
Granite Hills Dr N
Woodchase Dr
Stockhorse Ln
Lake View Dr
Saddlespur Way
Twin Schools Rd
Reservoir Dr
Rolling Greens Ter
Providence Ln
Skye Ct
Greystone Pl
Fern Leaf Dr
Bridle Path Ln
Burns Ct
Ellington Ct
Fallsbrook Ct
Mountain Dr
Palomino Ct
Granite Glen Ct
Crest Ct
Brighton Ct
Weddington Cir
Abbey Hill
School Rd
Bell Dr
Brower Ct
Macduff Ct
Edward Ct
Hopkins Ct
Park Rd
Quartzite Cir
I 0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000
Feet
V:\2252_Roseville_RMA_ConsultingServices\F3_ProjectArea.mxd Source: ESRI DigitalGlobe; Dokken Engineering 9/22/2016; Created By:scotts City Boundary
Amoruso Ranch Specific Plan Area
Jurisdictional Creek Channel
! Outfall Location
Jurisdictional Habitat
Jurisdictional Detention Basins
Non-Jurisdictional Detention Basin
Potential Restoration Projects
FIGURE 3

Page 17 of 18 ends

Project Area
City of Roseville RMA
City of Roseville, Placer County, California
!
! !
!
Matchline - See Page 4
Matchline - See Page 2
Matchline - See Page 3
Sunset Blvd W
Fiddyment Rd
S Dowd Ave
Amoruso Ave Amoruso Way
Dinky Ln
I 0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000
Feet
V:\2252_Roseville_RMA_ConsultingServices\F3_ProjectArea.mxd Source: ESRI DigitalGlobe; Dokken Engineering 9/22/2016; Created By:scotts City Boundary
Amoruso Ranch Specific Plan Area
Jurisdictional Creek Channel
! Outfall Location
Jurisdictional Habitat
Jurisdictional Detention Basins
Non-Jurisdictional Detention Basin
Potential Restoration Projects
FIGURE 3

Page 18 of 18 ends

Project Area
City of Roseville RMA
City of Roseville, Placer County, California
Notification #1600-2016-0099-R2
City of Roseville
Streambed Alteration Agreement

Page 58 of 59 ends

Exhibit B - Verification Request Form (VRF)

Page 1 of 2 ends

VERIFICATION REQUEST FORM (VRF)
City of Roseville

LAKE OR STREAMBED ALTERATION (LSA) AGREEMENT FOR

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
#1600-2016-0099-R2
Date of Request:

ORIGINAL REQUEST
REVISION NO.

SECTION 1: INFORMATION PROVIDED BY PERMITTEE (to be filled in by Permittee) Reference the LSA Agreement for processing this VRF
Contact Person:

Phone Number:

Cell Number:

Email:

Routine Work 10 Day Notice
Urgent – minimum 2 day notice (describe urgency below)
Comments:

Name of Watercourse:

Location or other identifier:

Project Start Date: Project End Date:

Authorized Maintenance Activities (see Agreement for activity descriptions):

Type of Work
Mowing
Clearing Debris / Fallen Trees
Beaver Dam Removal
Brush/Debris Pile Burning
Selective Hand Removal of Vegetation
Removal of Small Trees & Brush
Spraying herbicide
Other:

Routine Work Requiring Variance
Request to Work Outside RMA Dates
Other:

Equipment
Mower
Masticator
Dozer
Backhoe
Excavator with Blade
Tractor
Boom Truck
Hand Tools
Other:

Description of Proposed Maintenance Work:

Known environmental issues or other concerns:

Page 2 of 2 ends

SECTION 2: DEPARTMENT APPROVAL (to be filled in by Department staff) In accordance with Conditions set forth in the LSA Agreement between the California Department of Fish and Wildlife (Department) and the Department of Water Resources (Permittee) for Routine Maintenance of the Western Pacific Interceptor Canal for the purposes of maintaining channel capacity to design criteria and to facilitate site inspections, the Permittee hereby notifies the Department of its intent to perform routine maintenance work within the channel.

Department Contact
Information
Date the Department Responded to the Permittee:

Phone Number: email:

VRF# Year
Name:

Notice of concurrence
Work can begin as scheduled
Work can begin immediately
Notice of non-concurrence with comments (See Department comments below) Comments:

Project Meetings
01312-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01312 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01312

PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Requirements for conducting conferences and meetings for the purposes of addressing issues related to the Work, reviewing and coordinating progress of the Work and other matters of common interest, and includes the following:
a. Qualifications of Meeting Participants.
b. Basic Meeting Requirements.
c. Pre-construction Conference.
d. Pre-construction Safety Conference.
e. Pre-submittal Conference.
f. Web Based Construction Document Management Software Training. g. Progress Meetings.
h. Schedule Update Meetings.
i. Quality Control Meetings.
j. Pre-Installation Meetings.
k. Maintenance of Plant Operations (MOPO) Meetings.
l. Commissioning Coordination Meetings.
m. Instrumentation and Control Coordination Meetings.
n. Close-out Meeting.
o. Post Construction Meeting.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS OF MEETING PARTICIPANTS
A. Representatives of entities participating in meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of entity each represents.

1.03 BASIC MEETING REQUIREMENTS
A. Attendees:

1. Meeting leader shall require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work being discussed at the meeting.

B. Location:

1. In location convenient for most invitees.

C. Notification:

1. Meeting leader shall notify attendees of meeting, including an agenda, a minimum of 7 days prior to meeting.

D. Agenda:

1. Meeting leader shall prepare copies of the agenda for participants and distribute at the meeting.

Project Meetings
01312-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01312 (DraftFinal)

2. Minimum requirements:
a. Meeting purpose.
b. Review minutes of previous meeting.
c. Safety and security.
d. Discuss issues.
e. Action items.
f. Next meeting.

E. Meeting minutes:

1. Meeting leader shall prepare draft minutes and send to attendees for comment within 7 days.

2. Meeting leader shall incorporate comments from attendees and submit final meeting minutes to attendees within 7 days of receipt of comments.

1.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Construction manager leads the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. Upon issuance of Notice to Proceed, or earlier when mutually agreeable.

C. Required attendees:

1. Contractor’s project manager and superintendent, Owner, Engineer, representatives of utilities, major subcontractors and others involved in performance of the Work, and others necessary to the agenda.

D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. To establish working understanding between parties and to discuss Construction Schedule, Shop Drawings and other Submittals, cost breakdown of major lump sum items, processing of Submittals and applications for payment, and other subjects pertinent to execution of the Work.

2. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.

3. Distribution and discussion of list of major subcontractors and suppliers.

4. Proposed progress schedules and critical construction sequencing.

5. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.

6. Project coordination.

7. Designation of responsible personnel.

8. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions.
b. Proposal requests.
c. Submittals - separate meeting.
d. Change Orders.
e. Request for Information/Interpretations.
f. Applications for Payment.
g. Record documents.

9. Use of premises:
a. Office, construction, and storage areas.
b. Owner’s requirements.

10. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids.

Project Meetings
01312-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01312 (DraftFinal)

11. Temporary utilities.

12. Safety and first aid procedures.

13. Security procedures.

14. Housekeeping procedures.

15. Safety and security.

16. Review proposed photographer Submittal.

17. Action items.

18. Next meeting.

1.05 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING MEETING
A. Construction manager leads the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. Within 7 days of Notice to Proceed, or earlier when mutually agreeable.

C. Required attendees:

1. Contractor’s project manager, superintendent, scheduler, Owner, Engineer, and others necessary to the agenda.

D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. To establish the format and features of the Construction Schedule.

2. Schedule preparation.

3. Reporting requirements.

4. Updates and revision procedures.

5. Schedule delay analysis procedures.

6. Schedule methodology.

7. Planned sequence of operations.

8. Cost and labor loading methodology.

9. Proposed activity coding structure as specified in Section 01321 - Schedules and Reports.

10. Naming convention: Name schedule files with the year, month and day of the data date, revision identifier, and a description of the schedule. a. Example 1: 2021_07_30 rev 1 draft baseline schedule.xer. b. Example 2: 2021_09_30 rev 2 sep final update.xer.

11. Action items.

12. Next meeting.

1.06 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SAFETY CONFERENCE
A. Construction manager leads the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. Upon issuance of Notice to Proceed, or earlier when mutually agreeable.

C. Required attendees:

1. Contractor’s project manager, safety representative, and superintendent; Owner, Engineer, representatives of utilities, major subcontractors and others involved in performance of the Work, and others necessary to the agenda.

Project Meetings
01312-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01312 (DraftFinal) D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. To establish safety procedures and identify lead participants.

2. Review minutes of previous meeting.

3. Safety and first aid procedures.

4. Review of Experience Modification Rating for Contractor and each Subcontractor.

5. Security procedures.

6. Housekeeping procedures.

7. Safety and security.

8. Action items.

9. Next meeting.

1.07 PRE-SUBMITTAL CONFERENCE
A. Construction manager leads the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. Prior to producing any Submittals.

C. Required attendees:

1. Contractor’s project manager and superintendent, Owner, Engineer, representatives of utilities, major subcontractors, individual equipment manufacturers furnishing major pieces of equipment, and others involved in performance of the Work, and others necessary to the agenda.

D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. Review the entire Project, equipment, control philosophy, schedules, and Submittal requirements.
b. Awareness of requirements by major subcontractors, major suppliers, and major equipment manufacturers.
c. Format and procedures for Submittals.
d. Review of the master Submittal schedule.

2. Review equipment list.

3. Review Submittal schedule.

4. Format of Submittals.

5. Procedures and processing of Submittals.
a. Review turn-around time.

6. Discuss specific electrical and instrumentation and controls Submittal requirements.

7. Safety and security.

8. Action items.

9. Next meeting.

1.08 WEB BASED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE TRAINING A. Contractor can submit a written request to the Engineer to waive the training based on staff having sufficient familiarity with the software and its complete usage.

Construction manager will lead the meeting.

Project Meetings
01312-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01312 (DraftFinal) B. Timing:

1. Upon issuance of Notice to Proceed, or earlier when mutually agreeable.

2. Duration minimum: 2 hours.

C. Required attendees:

1. Mandatory attendance.
a. Contractor’s project manager.
b. Contractor’s field superintendent.
c. Contractor’s project engineer.

2. Other attendees:
a. Owner, Engineer, Contractor’s quality control manager, Contractor’s project scheduler and any other persons involved with preparing and transmitting documents.

D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. Train construction team on the use of the web based document management system software.

2. Safety.

3. General Items.

4. Contractor functions.

5. Owner functions.

6. Engineer functions.

7. Action items.

1.09 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Construction manager will lead the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. Hold meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly intervals.

C. Required attendees:

1. Owner, Engineer, Contractor, Contractor’s project manager, superintendent, quality control manager, project scheduler, major subcontractors and suppliers as appropriate to the agenda topics for each meeting.

2. Additional invitees:
a. Owner utility companies when the Work affects their interests, and others necessary to the agenda.

D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. Provide the status of the Work.

2. Review minutes of previous meeting.

3. Safety and security.

4. Construction schedule summary.

5. Review of 6 weeks schedule.
a. Contractor shall provide printed hard copies for each attendee.

6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.

7. Review of Submittals schedule and status of Submittals.

8. Request for information (RFI’s) status.

Project Meetings
01312-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01312 (DraftFinal)

9. MOP’s/shutdown coordination.

10. Change order management status.

11. Maintenance of quality standards (QA/QC).

12. Field observations, problems, and conflicts.

13. Commissioning.

14. Partnering recognition status (optional).

15. General items.

16. Action items.

17. Next meeting.

1.10 SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS
A. Contractor leads the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. Hold meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals.

C. Required attendees:

1. Owner, Engineer, Contractor, Contractor’s project manager, general superintendent, project scheduler, major subcontractors and suppliers as appropriate to the agenda topics for each meeting.

2. Additional invitees:
a. Owner utility companies when the Work affects their interests and others necessary to the agenda.

D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. Identify and troubleshoot scheduling issues in a collaborative environment. b. Provide further detail on Work status.

2. Review minutes of previous meeting.

3. Review Monthly Schedule, (Actual Progress and Variance). a. “Activities Started/Completed” this period.
b. “Activities Started/Completed” “Variance” Baseline vs. current. c. “Added/Deleted Activities”.
d. “Revised Activity Descriptions”.
e. Any significant Proposed Logic Changes.

4. Review milestone “Substantial Completion” Schedule:
a. “Critical” Activities - “Critical Area, Float and Vital Statistics”.

5. Review “Cumulative and Monthly Costs” graph.

6. Review “Budgeted Cost” indicating the Current Project Budgeted Cost.

7. Safety and security.

8. Action items.

9. Next meeting.

1.11 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Contractor leads the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. When specified in Technical Sections or requested by Engineer, before commencing Work of specific section.

Project Meetings
01312-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01312 (DraftFinal) C. Required attendees:

1. Owner, Engineer, Contractor, Contractor’s project manager, general superintendent, project scheduler, major subcontractors including electrical instrumentation, and suppliers as appropriate to the agenda topics for each meeting.

2. Additional invitees:
a. Owner utility companies when the Work affects their interests and others necessary to the agenda.

D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. Review conditions of installation, preparation, and installation procedures. b. Review coordination with related work.

2. Review minutes of previous meeting.

3. Safety and security.

4. Action items.

5. Next meeting.

1.12 PRE-SHUTDOWN MEETINGS
A. Contractor leads the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. Short-term and longer-term shutdowns and other tie-ins that require an Owner approved MOP require a pre-shutdown meeting at Project site at least 3 working days prior to commencing shutdown for tie-in or modification of specific plant systems.

C. Required attendees:

1. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by shutdown, including Engineer, specific work crews, Owner’s construction, operations, and maintenance staff.

D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. Review conditions of installation, preparation, and installation procedures. b. Review coordination with related work.

2. Review minutes of previous meeting.

3. Review accepted Construction Method of Procedure (MOP), as specified in Attachment A of Section 01140 - Work Restrictions, including conditions of shutdown, preparation, and installation procedures.

4. Review timelines and sequences.

5. Review responsibilities.

6. Review dry run plan and schedule, as necessary.

7. Review coordination with related work.

8. Safety and security.

9. Action items.

10. Next meeting.

Project Meetings
01312-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01312 (DraftFinal)

1.13 QUALITY CONTROL MEETINGS
A. Contractor leads the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. Hold meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly intervals.

C. Required attendees:

1. Engineer, Construction manager and staff, Contractor’s quality control manager, and staff.

D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. Update Contractor’s efforts to comply with quality requirements in the Contract Documents.

2. Review minutes of previous meeting.

3. Review of Work progress and schedule.

4. Review of out-of-compliance inspection or test results.

5. Field observations, problems, and decisions.

6. Review of offsite fabrication and delivery schedules.

7. Planned progress during succeeding work period.

8. Coordination of required inspections and tests.

9. Review 6-week schedule report with upcoming inspections and special tests.

10. Maintenance of quality and work standards.

11. Other business relating to Work.

12. Safety and security.

13. Action items.

14. Next meeting.

1.14 COMMISSIONING COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Contractor leads the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. Separate commissioning coordination meetings will be scheduled as required by the Engineer.

C. Required attendees:

1. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by process start-up and testing, including Engineer, Commissioning Coordinator, specific work crews, Owner’s operations, and maintenance staff.

D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. Coordinate commissioning activities.

2. Review minutes of previous meeting.

3. Review Commissioning schedule.

4. Review Owner Training schedule.

5. Review test plans.

6. Review accepted Construction Method of Procedure (MOP), as specified in Attachment A of Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.

Project Meetings
01312-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01312 (DraftFinal)

7. Owner makes final decision for commissioning GO or NO GO.

8. Safety and security.

9. Action items.

10. Next meeting.

1.15 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Meetings and conferences as specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.16 CLOSE-OUT MEETING
A. Construction manager leads the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. After punch list items are completed.

C. Required attendees:

1. Owner, Engineer, Contractor, Contractor’s project manager, and superintendent.

D. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. Coordinate close-out activities.

2. Review minutes of previous meeting.

3. Review punch list completion.

4. Transfer of record documents.

5. Finalize payment.

6. Safety and security.

7. Action items.

8. Next meeting.

1.17 POST CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Construction manager leads the meeting.

B. Timing:

1. About 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

C. Location:

1. Meet in Owner’s office or other mutually agreed upon place.

D. Required attendees:

1. Engineer, Contractor, appropriate manufacturers, and installers of major units of constructions, affected Subcontractors, and Owner’s operations and maintenance staff.

E. Agenda minimum requirements:

1. Meeting purpose:
a. Review Project for compliance with the Contract Documents.

2. Inspect the Work and draft list of items to be completed or corrected.

Project Meetings
01312-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01312 (DraftFinal)

3. Review service and maintenance contracts and take appropriate corrective action when necessary.

4. Complete or correct defective work and may extend correction period.

5. Safety and security.

6. Action items.

7. Next meeting.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Schedules and Reports
01321-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01321

SCHEDULES AND REPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Schedules and reports.

1.02 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Baseline schedule: A planned and approved timetable projection that illustrates the project execution strategy, key deliverables, planned activity dates and milestones.

2. Critical path: The longest sequence of dependent tasks in a project.

3. Near critical path: The longest path after the critical path.

4. Weather day: The Contractor being prevented or inhibited from performing at least 4 hours of work on the critical path due to weather conditions.

1.03 SCHEDULING FORMAT
A. Utilize critical path method (CPM) format.

B. Provide a cost and labor loaded Schedule.

C. Engineer approval of the format is required.

1.04 SCHEDULING HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
A. Scheduling software and hardware shall be located on-site.

B. Prepare computerized schedule utilizing the most current version of Oracle Primavera P6 or Asta Powerproject.

C. Contractor and Engineer must agree on the format.

1.05 SCHEDULE PREPARATION
A. Preparation and submittal of Progress Schedule represents Contractor’s intention to execute the Work within specified time and constraints.

B. All costs associated with Schedule requirements are included in the Contract Price.

C. During preparation of the preliminary Progress Schedule, the Engineer will facilitate Contractor’s efforts by answering questions regarding sequencing issues, scheduling constraints, interface points, and dependency relationships.

Schedules and Reports
01321-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal) D. Prepare Schedule utilizing precedence diagramming method (PDM).

E. Prepare Schedule utilizing activity durations in terms of working days.

1. Do not exceed a 15 working day duration on activities except concrete curing, submittal review, and equipment fabrication and deliveries.

2. Where duration of continuous work exceeds 15 working days, subdivide activities by location, stationing, or other sub-element of the Work.

3. Coordinate holidays to be observed with the Owner and incorporate them into the Schedule as non-working days.

F. Failure to include an activity required for execution of the Work does not excuse Contractor from completing the Work and portions thereof within specified times and at price specified in Contract.

1. Contract requirements are not waived by failure of Contractor to include required Schedule constraints, sequences, or milestones in Schedule.

2. Contract requirements are not waived by Owner’s acceptance of the Schedule.

In the event of conflict between accepted Schedule and Contract requirements, terms of Contract govern at all times, unless requirements are waived in writing by the Owner.

G. Reference Schedule to working days beginning with Notice to Proceed as Contract Time as Day “1”.

H. Baseline Schedule and project completion:

1. Should Contractor submit a Baseline Schedule showing project completion more than 20 working days prior to Contract completion date, Owner may issue Change Order, at no cost to Owner, revising time of performance of Work and Contract completion date to match Contractor’s Schedule completion date.

2. Adjust accordingly any Contract milestone dates.

I. Imposed dates and hidden logic are prohibited.

J. Interim milestone dates, operational constraints:

1. In event there are interim milestone dates and/or operational constraints set forth in Contract, show them on Schedule.

2. Do not use zero total float constraint or mandatory finish date on such Contract requirements.

K. Contract float is for the mutual benefit of both Owner and Contractor.

1. Changes to the Project that can be accomplished within this available period of float may be made by Owner without extending the Contract Time by utilizing float.

2. Time extensions will not be granted nor delay damages owed until Work extends beyond currently accepted Contract completion date.

3. Likewise, Contractor may utilize float to offset delays other than delays caused by the Owner.

4. Mutual use of float can continue until all available float shown by Schedule has been utilized by either Owner or Contractor, or both. At that time, extensions of the Contract Time will be granted by Owner for valid Owner-caused or third Schedules and Reports
01321-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal) party-caused delays which affect the planned completion date and which have been properly documented and demonstrated by Contractor.

5. Non-sequestering of float: Pursuant to float sharing requirements of Contract, Schedule submittals can be rejected for use of float suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing or logic, special lead or lag logic restraints, extended activity durations, or imposed dates.

L. Resource loading and leveling:

1. Input labor data on each schedule activity.

2. Manpower data consists of the man-hours estimated to perform each task, categorized by trade.

3. Provide leveled manpower requirements.
a. Availability of the resources drive activity duration.

M. Cost loading: All schedules:

1. Only on-site construction activities.

2. The sum total of all cost loaded activities equal to the current value of the Contract, including change orders, at all times.

N. Schedule logic:

1. Assembled to show order in which Contractor proposes to carry out Work, indicate restrictions of access, availability of Work areas, and availability and use of manpower, materials, and equipment.

2. Form basis for assembly of schedule logic on the following criteria:
a. Which activities must be completed before subsequent activities can be started?
b. Which activities can be performed concurrently?
c. Which activities must be started immediately following completed activities?
d. What major facility, equipment, or manpower restrictions are required for sequencing these activities?
O. Schedule windows for Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed equipment or materials:

1. Immediately after Award of Contract, obtain from Engineer anticipated delivery dates of Owner furnished equipment or materials.

2. Show these dates in the Schedule in same manner indicated by the Engineer.

1.06 SCHEDULER
A. Designate, in writing within 5 calendar days after Notice of Award, the person responsible for preparation, maintenance, updating, and revision of all schedules.

B. Scheduler shall have the authority to update Schedule on behalf of the Contractor.

C. Qualifications:

1. A minimum of 5 years verifiable experience in preparation of construction schedules for projects of similar value, size, and complexity.

2. Knowledge of critical path method (CPM) scheduling utilizing the specified software.

Schedules and Reports
01321-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal) D. Scheduler:

1. Dedicated half time to this Project.

2. Scheduler will attend all project meetings called for as specified in Section 01312 - Project Meetings.

1.07 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Preliminary and Baseline Progress Schedule.

B. Preliminary and Baseline Schedule of Values.

C. Preliminary and Baseline Schedule of Submittals.

D. On a monthly basis, updated Schedules as specified.

E. Final Schedules update as specified.

F. Revised Schedules and time impact analyses as specified.

G. Submit Schedules in the media and number of copies as follows:

1. PDF format and in other formats specified in this Section.

2. 2 sets of CPM Schedule data electronic files in a native backed-up file format.

1.08 GANTT CHART
A. Produce a clear, legible, and accurate calendar based, time scaled, and graphical network diagram.

1. Group activities related to the same physical areas of the Work. Produce the network diagram based upon the early start of all activities.

B. Include for each activity, the description, activity number, estimated duration in working days, total float, and all activity relationship lines.

C. Illustrate order and interdependence of activities and sequence in which Work is planned to be accomplished.

1. Incorporate the basic concept of the precedence diagram network method to show how the start of 1 activity is dependent upon the start or completion of preceding activities and its completion restricts the start of following activities.

D. Provide Progress Schedule showing the critical path for the Project.

E. Provide report of Near Critical Path activities for the Project, when required by the Engineer.

F. Delineate the specified Contract Times and identify the planned completion of the Work as a milestone.

1. Show the time period between the planned and Contract completion dates, if any, as an activity identified as Project float.

G. Identify system shutdown dates, system tie-in dates, specified interim completion or milestone dates and contract completion dates as milestones.

Schedules and Reports
01321-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal) H. Include, in addition to construction activities:

1. Submission dates and review periods for major equipment submittals, shoring submittals, and indicator pile program:
a. Shoring reviews: Allow 2-week review period for each shoring submittal.

2. Any activity by the Owner or the Engineer that may affect progress or required completion dates.

3. Equipment and long-lead material deliveries over 8 weeks.

4. Approvals required by regulatory agencies or other third parties.

I. Produce electronic network diagram on 22-inch by 34-inch sheets with grid coordinate system on the border of all sheets utilizing alpha and numeric designations.

J. Identify the execution of the following:

1. Mobilization.

2. All required Submittals and Submittal review times showing 30 calendar day duration for such activities and equal amount of time for resubmittal reviews.

3. Equipment and materials procurement/fabrication/delivery.

4. Excavation.

5. Shoring design and submission of detailed shoring submittals. Identify submission as a milestone.

6. Shoring review, shoring materials procurement, shoring installation, and shoring removal.

7. Backfill and compaction.

8. Grading, subbase, base, paving, and curb and gutters.

9. Fencing and landscaping.

10. Concrete, including installation of forms and reinforcement, placement of concrete, curing, stripping, finishing, and patching.

11. Masonry.

12. Metal fastenings, framing, structures, and fabrications.

13. Wood structures, finish carpentry, architectural woodwork, and plastic fabrications.

14. Waterproofing and dampproofing, insulation, roofing and flashing, and sealants.

15. Doors and windows, including hardware and glazing.

16. Finishes including coating and painting, flooring, ceiling, and wall covering.

17. Process equipment, including identification of ordering lead-time, factory testing, and installation.

18. Pumps and drives, including identification of ordering lead time, factory testing, and installation.

19. Conveying equipment including hoists and cranes, conveyor systems, and materials handling equipment, including identification of ordering lead-time and installation.

20. Other mechanical equipment including fans and heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment.

21. Trenching, pipe laying, and trench backfill and compaction.

22. Piping, fittings, and appurtenances, including identification of ordering and fabrication lead time, layout, installation and testing.

23. Valves, gates, and operators, including identification of order lead-time, installation, and testing.

24. Plumbing specialties.

Schedules and Reports
01321-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal)

25. Electric transmission, service, and distribution equipment, including identification of ordering lead-time, and factory testing.

26. Other electrical work including lighting, heating and cooling, and special systems, including identification of ordering lead-time.

27. Instrumentation and controls, including identification of ordering lead-time.

28. Preliminary testing of equipment, instrumentation, and controls.

29. Commissioning phase:
a. Source Testing.
b. Owner Training.
c. Installation Verification.
d. Functional Testing.
e. Start-up Phase.
f. Start-up Period.

30. Instrumentation and Controls Performance Testing.

31. Substantial completion.

32. Punch list work.

33. Demobilization.

1.09 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE
A. Procedure:

1. Submit proposed Preliminary Schedule within 14 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.

2. Meet with Engineer within 7 calendar days after receipt of Preliminary Schedule to review and make necessary adjustments.

3. Submit revised Preliminary Schedule within 5 calendar days after meeting.

4. Update Preliminary Schedule monthly until the Baseline Schedule is accepted.

B. Format:

1. Simplified Gannt chart.

C. Activities:

1. Define activities to be completed in the first 90 calendar days of Work.

2. Actualize activities performed during the first 90 days into the first monthly Schedule update.

1.10 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Preliminary Schedule of Values as specified in Volume 2 of 4 of the Contract – Schedule of Values.

B. Procedure:

1. Submit proposed Preliminary Schedule of Values within 14 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.

2. Meet with Engineer within 7 calendar days after receipt of Preliminary Schedule of Values to review and make necessary adjustments.

3. Submit revised Preliminary Schedule of Values within 5 calendar days after meeting.

Schedules and Reports
01321-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal)

1.11 WORK WITHIN THE FIRST 90 DAYS
A. Proceed with Work after Preliminary Schedule and Preliminary Schedule of Values have been accepted by Owner.

B. Submittal and acceptance of Preliminary Schedule and Preliminary Schedule of Values is condition precedent to making of progress payments as specified in Schedule of Values, Volume 2 of 4 - Applications for Payment and payments for mobilization costs otherwise provided for in the Contract.

1.12 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Submittals shall include Submittals required in the Contract Documents but not limited to test plans, training plans, test procedures, operation and maintenance manuals, Shop Drawings, samples, record documents, and specifically required certificates, warranties, and service agreements.

B. Preliminary Schedule of Submittals:

1. Due date: After Preliminary Schedule has been submitted and accepted by the Owner.

2. Format:
a. Include Submittals anticipated in the first 90 calendar days after award of Contract using early start dates.
b. Indicate week and month anticipated for submittal to Engineer. c. Indicate “Priority” Submittals where review time can impact Contractor’s schedule.
1) “Priority” indication will not alter review times specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
2) Engineer will endeavor to provide early review of “Priority” Submittals where possible.

3. Submittal of Preliminary Schedule of Submittals shall be a condition precedent to Owner making progress payments during the first 90 calendar days after award of Contract.

C. Final Schedule of Submittals:

1. Due date: 30 days after Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by Owner.

2. Format:
a. Include Submittals using early start dates.
b. Include all Submittals, including those required in the Preliminary Schedule of Submittals.
c. Indicate week and month anticipated for submittal to Engineer. d. Indicate “Priority” submittals where review time can impact Contractor’s schedule.
1) “Priority” indication will not alter review times specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
2) Engineer will endeavor to provide early review of “Priority” Submittals where possible.

3. Submittal of final Schedule of Submittals shall be a condition precedent to Owner making progress payments after the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.

Schedules and Reports
01321-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal) D. Provide updated Schedule of Submittals with updated schedules if Schedule revisions change listing and timing of Submittals.

1.13 BASELINE PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND BASELINE SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Due date: No more than 45 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.

B. Format:

1. Progress Schedule: Show sequence and interdependence of all activities required for complete performance of all Work, beginning with date of Notice to Proceed and concluding with date of final completion of Contract.

2. Schedule of Values: As specified in Volume 2 of 4 of the Contract – Schedule of Values.

C. Acceptance of the Baseline Progress Schedule and Baseline Schedule of Values by the Owner is a condition precedent to making payments as specified in Volume 2 of 4 Contract - Applications for Payment after the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.

1.14 SUMMARY SCHEDULE
A. Due date: At weekly progress meetings and after each Schedule update or Schedule revision.

B. Format:

1. Consolidate groups of activities associated with Major Items of Work shown on Baseline Schedule.

2. Intended to give an overall indication of the Project Schedule without a large amount of detail.

1.15 COST FLOW SUMMARY
A. Due date: After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by the Owner, submit on a monthly basis as specified in Volume 2 of 4 Contract - Applications for Payment.

B. Format:

1. Tabular and graphic report showing anticipated earnings each month of the Contract period.

2. Base tabulation on the summation of the cost-loaded activities each month.

3. Show planned amounts.

4. Show actual earned amounts and anticipated remaining earnings.

5. Spreadsheet format of all schedule activities showing cost and percentage completion during the current month for which payment is sought.

1.16 PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND UPDATED SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Due date: Submit on a monthly basis as specified in Volume 2 of 4 of the Contract - Applications for Payment.

B. Format: As specified in Volume 2 of 4 of the Contract – Schedule of Values.

Schedules and Reports
01321-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal)

1.17 WEEKLY SCHEDULE
A. Due date: At every weekly progress meeting.

B. Format:

1. Contractor and Engineer must agree on the format.

2. 6-week Schedule showing the activities completed during the previous week and the Contractor’s schedule of activities for following 5 weeks.

3. Use the logic and conform to the status of the current Progress Schedule when producing a weekly Schedule in CPM schedule or a bar chart format. a. In the event that the weekly Schedule no longer conforms to the current Schedule, Contractor may be required to revise the Schedule as specified in this Section.

4. Activity designations used in the weekly Schedule must be consistent with those used in the Baseline Schedule and the monthly Schedule updates.

1.18 LABOR HISTOGRAM
A. Due date:

1. With progress payments after Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by Owner.

B. Format:

1. Labor histogram depicting total craft manpower and craft manpower for Contractor’s own labor forces and those of each subcontractor.

2. Submit in electronic format.

1.19 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
A. Due date: With any progress payment after Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by Owner if it includes payment for equipment.

B. Format:

1. Tabular report listing each major piece of construction equipment to be used in performing the Work.

2. Include major equipment for Contractor and each subcontractor.

3. Submit electronically in Excel format with 1 paper copy.

C. Progress payments after the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed will not be made until equipment schedule is provided.

1.20 COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE
A. Commissioning activities and milestones, as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning, shall be an integral part of the overall Progress Schedule.

1. Commissioning activities and milestones shall be extracted from the Progress Schedule to provide a separate Commissioning schedule that is submitted each time the Progress Schedule is submitted.

B. Proposed Commissioning Schedule:

1. Schedule requirements: As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

Schedules and Reports
01321-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal)

2. Submittal due date: Within 180 days after Notice to Proceed.

3. Engineer response due within 20 calendar days of receipt.

4. Contractor responsible for updating schedule and resubmitting within 10 calendar days of receipt of Engineer and Owner comments.

C. Construction Schedule can include the Commissioning Schedule after Engineer acceptance of the Proposed Commissioning Schedule.

1. Capable of extracting a stand-alone Commissioning Schedule.

2. Capable of extracting a stand-alone Owner Training Schedule.

D. Monthly update requirements:

1. Highlight percentages of completion, actual start and finish dates, and remaining durations, as applicable.

2. Include activities not previously included in the previously accepted detail work plan Commissioning Schedule.

3. Change Order required for any change to contractual dates.

4. Reviews of these Submittals by Engineer will not be construed to constitute acceptance within the time frames, durations, or sequence of work for each added activity.

1.21 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING MEETING
A. As specified in Section 01312 - Project Meetings.

1.22 REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF SCHEDULES
A. Engineer will review preliminary Schedules, Schedule updates, Schedule revisions, and time impact analyses to ascertain compliance with specified project constraints, compliance with milestone dates, durations and sequence, accurate inter-relationships, and completeness.

B. Engineer and Owner will issue written comments following completion of review of baseline Schedules within 21 calendar days after receipt.

C. Written comments on review of Schedule updates and Schedule revisions and time impact analyses will be returned to Contractor within 14 calendar days after receipt by Engineer.

D. Revise and resubmit Schedules in accordance with Engineer’s comments within 7 calendar days after receipt of such comments or request joint meeting to resolve objections.

E. If the Engineer requests a meeting, the Contractor and all major subcontractors shall participate.

1. Revise and resubmit Schedule within 7 calendar days after meeting.

F. Use accepted Schedules for planning, organizing, and directing the Work and for reporting progress.

Schedules and Reports
01321-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal) G. Engineer’s Submittal review response:

1. When Schedules reflects the Owner’s and Contractor’s agreement of project approach and sequence, Schedules will be accepted by the Owner.

2. Engineer’s Submittal review response for Schedule Submittals will be “Receipt Acknowledged - Filed for Record”.

3. Acceptance of the Schedules by the Owner is for general conformance with the Contract Documents and for the Owner’s planning information and does not relieve the Contractor of sole responsibility for planning, coordinating, and executing the Work within the Contract completion dates. a. Omissions and errors in the accepted Schedules shall not excuse performance less than that required by the Contract Documents. b. Acceptance by the Owner in no way constitutes an evaluation or validation of the Contractor’s plan, sequence or means, methods, and techniques of construction.

1.23 SCHEDULE UPDATES
A. Any update:

1. Prepare update using most recent accepted version of Schedule including:
a. Actual start dates of activities that have been started. b. Actual finish dates of activities that have been completed. c. Percentage of completion of activities that have been started but not finished.
d. Actual dates on which milestones were achieved.
e. Update activities by inputting percent complete figures with actual dates. f. Use retained logic in preparing Schedule updates.
g. When necessary, input remaining durations for activities whose finish dates cannot be calculated accurately with a percent complete figure only. h. Revisions to the Schedule may be included that have been previously approved as specified.

B. Monthly updates:

1. Submit written narrative report in conjunction with each Schedule update, including descriptions of the following:
a. Activities added to or deleted from the Schedule are to adhere to cost and other resource loading requirements.
1) Identify added activities in manner distinctly different from original activity designations.
b. Changes in sequence or estimated duration of activities. c. Current or anticipated problems and delays affecting progress, impact of these problems and delays and measures taken to mitigate impact. d. Assumptions made and activities affected by incorporating change order work into the Schedule.
e. Include a response in writing to each of the Engineer’s comments or questions from the previous month’s schedule review and number responses consistent with the Engineer’s numbering.

2. Submit updated Schedule and materials specified under Submittal of Progress Schedules 5 calendar days before the monthly schedule update meeting.

3. Since monthly Schedule update is the application for progress payment required as specified in Volume 2 of 4 Contract, submittal and acceptance of Schedules and Reports
01321-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal) the monthly Schedule update is a condition precedent to the making of any progress payments.

C. Weekly progress meeting:

1. Update the Schedule prior to weekly progress meeting. a. Identify overall progress of each major item of work in the summary schedule.
b. If there are significant changes to the Schedule, submit a written report at the weekly progress meeting.

2. Should monthly Schedule update show project completion earlier than current Contract completion date, show early completion time as schedule activity, identified as “Project Float”.

3. Should monthly Schedule update show Project completion later than current Contract completion date, prepare and submit a Schedule revision.

1.24 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES
A. Submit revised Schedules within 5 days:

1. When delay in completion of any activity or group of activities indicates an overrun of the Contract Time or milestone dates by 20 working days or 5 percent of the remaining duration, whichever is less.

2. When delays in Submittals, deliveries, or work stoppages are encountered making necessary the replanning or rescheduling of activities.

3. When the Schedule does not represent the actual progress of activities.

4. When any change to the sequence of activities, the completion date for major portions of the Work, or when changes occur which affect the critical path.

5. When Contract modification necessitates Schedule revision, submit schedule analysis of Change Order work with cost proposal.

B. Create a separate Submittal for Schedule revisions.

1. Comply with Schedule updates as specified in this Section.

2. Do not submit with Schedule updates.

C. Schedule revisions will not be reflected in the Schedule until after the revision is accepted by the Owner.

1. This includes Schedule revisions submitted for the purpose of mitigating a Contractor-caused project delay (Recovery Schedule).

1.25 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT TIME OR PRICE
A. Contract Time will be adjusted only for causes specified in Contract Documents.

B. If the Contractor believes that the Owner has impacted its work such that the Project completion date will be delayed, the Contractor must submit proof, in the form of a time impact analysis demonstrating the delay to the critical path.

C. Time impact analysis:

1. Use the accepted Schedule update that is current relative to the time frame of the delay event (change order, third party delay, or other Owner-caused delay). Represent the delay event in the Schedule by:
a. Inserting new activities associated with the delay event into the Schedule.

Schedules and Reports
01321-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal) b. Revising activity logic.
c. Revising activity durations.

2. If the Progress Schedule’s critical path and completion date are impacted as a result of adding this delay event to the Progress Schedule, a time extension equal to the magnitude of the impact may be warranted.

3. The time impact analysis Submittal must include the following information:
a. A fragment of the portion of the Schedule affected by the delay event. b. A narrative explanation of the delay issue and how it impacted the Schedule.
c. A schedule file used to perform the time impact analysis.

D. When a delay to the Project as a whole can be avoided by revising preferential sequencing or logic and the Contractor chooses not to implement the revisions, the Contractor will be entitled to a time extension and no compensation for extended overhead.

E. Indicate clearly that the Contractor has used, in full, all project float available for the Work involved in the request, including any float that may exist between the Contractor’s planned completion date and the Contract completion date.

1. Utilize the latest version of the Schedule update accepted at the time of the alleged delay, and all other relevant information, to determine the adjustment of the Contract Time.

F. Adjustment of the Contract Times will be granted only when the Contract float has been fully utilized and only when the revised date of completion of the Work has been pushed beyond the Contract completion date.

1. Adjustment of the Contract Times will be made only for the number of days that the planned completion of the work has been extended.

G. Actual delays in activities which do not affect the Critical Path Work or which do not move the Contractor’s planned completion date beyond the Contract completion date will not be the basis for an adjustment to the Contract Time.

H. If completion of the project occurs within the specified Contract Time, the Contractor is not entitled to job-site or home office overhead beyond the Contractor’s originally planned occupancy of the site.

I. Notify Engineer of a request for Contract Time adjustment.

1. Submit request as specified in the Contract Documents.

2. In cases where the Contractor does not submit a request for Contract Time adjustment for a specific change order, delay, or Contractor request within the specified period of time, then it is mutually agreed that the particular change order, delay, or Contractor request has no time impact on the Contract completion date and no time extension is required.

J. Engineer will, within 30 calendar days after receipt of a Contract Time adjustment, request any supporting evidence, review the facts, and advise the Contractor in writing.

1. Include the new Progress Schedule data, if accepted by the Owner, in the next monthly Schedule update.

Schedules and Reports
01321-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal)

2. When the Owner has not yet made a final determination as to the adjustment of the Contract Time, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment to be reflected in the Progress Schedule, reflect that amount of time adjustment in the Progress Schedule as the Engineer may accept as appropriate for such interim purpose.

3. It is understood and agreed that any such interim acceptance by the Engineer shall not be binding and shall be made only for the purpose of continuing to schedule the Work, until such time as a final determination as to any adjustment of the Contract Time acceptable to the Engineer has been made.

4. Revise the Progress Schedule prepared thereafter in accordance with the final decision.

1.26 WEATHER DAY ALLOWANCE
A. Allowance:

1. Include as a separate identifiable activity on the critical path, an activity labeled “Weather Day Allowance”.

B. Actual Weather Day:

1. Insert a weather delay activity in the critical path to reflect actual weather day occurrences when weather days are experienced and accepted by the Engineer.

2. Reduce duration of Weather Day Allowance activity as weather delays are experienced and inserted into the Schedule. Remaining weather days in the Weather Day Allowance at completion of the Project is considered float.

3. Provide a written notice to the Engineer of the occurrence of a weather day within 2 days after the onset of such weather and describe in reasonable detail the type of weather encountered and the Work interfered with or interrupted. a. A Schedule update will not suffice as a written notice. b. Engineer will determine if the Weather Day constitutes a use of a portion of the Weather Day Allowance.
c. After use of all the Weather Day Allowance, the Engineer will determine if the Contractor is entitled to an extension of the Contract Time due to weather conditions.

1.27 FINAL SCHEDULE
A. The final Schedule update becomes the As-Built Schedule.

1. The As-Built Schedule reflects the exact manner in which the project was constructed by reflecting actual start and completion dates for all activities accomplished on the project.

2. Contractor’s Project Manager and scheduler sign and certify the As-Built Schedule as being an accurate record of the way the project was actually constructed.

B. Retainage will not be released until final Schedule update is provided.

Schedules and Reports
01321-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01321 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Web Based Construction Document Management
01322-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01322 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01322

WEB BASED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Requirements for web-based construction document management.

B. The project team will use and maintain a web-based database as the primary means of communication related to the Project’s correspondence, submittals, requests for information (RFIs), advisory notices, and non-compliance issues.

Correspondence from the Contractor shall be sent to the Construction Manager via the PROCORE System.

C. The Construction Manager and Contractor shall utilize PROCORE's system for electronic submittal of all data and documents (unless specified otherwise by the Construction Manager) throughout the duration of the Contract. PROCORE is a web-based electronic media site that is hosted by PROCORE LLC utilizing their PROCORE web solution. PROCORE will be made available to all Contractor’s project personnel. The joint use of this system is to facilitate electronic exchange of information, automation of key processes, and overall management of the Contract.

PROCORE shall be the primary means of project information submission and management. When required by the Construction Manager, paper documents will also be required. In the event of discrepancy between the electronic version and paper documents, the paper documents will govern. PROCORE is a registered trademark of PROCORE LLC:

1. Joint use of this system is to facilitate electronic exchange of information, automation of key processes, and overall management of Contract Documentation.

2. Web based construction management software shall be the primary means of project information submission and management.

1.02 USER ACCESS LIMITATIONS
A. The Construction Manager will control the Contractor's access to PROCORE by allowing access and assigning user profiles to accepted Contractor personnel.

User profiles will define levels of access into the system; determine assigned function based authorizations (determines what can be seen) and user privileges (determines what they can do).

1.03 JOINT OWNERSHIP OF DATA
A. Data entered in a collaborative mode (entered with the intent to share as determined by permissions and workflows within the web-based construction management software system) by Engineer and Contractor will be jointly owned.

Web Based Construction Document Management
01322-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01322 (DraftFinal)

1.04 AUTOMATED SYSTEM NOTIFICATION AND AUDIT LOG TRACKING A. Review comments made (or lack thereof) by the Construction Manager and Design Consultant on Contractor-submitted documentation shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. The Contractor is responsible for managing, tracking, and documenting the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Construction Manager’s acceptance via automated system notifications or audit logs extends only to the face value of the submitted documentation and does not constitute validation of the Contractor’s submitted information.

1.05 COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall use computer hardware and software that meets the requirements of the web-based construction management software system as recommended by the web-based construction management software to access and utilize the web-based construction management software.

B. As recommendations are modified by the web-based construction management software, Contractor will upgrade their system(s) to meet or exceed the recommendations.

1. Upgrading of Contractor’s computer systems will not be justification for a cost or time modification to the Contract.

C. Ensure that connectivity to the web-based construction management software system is accomplished through DSL, cable, T-1, or wireless communications systems.

1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
A. The Contractor shall be Responsible for the validity of their information placed in PROCORE and for the abilities of their personnel.

B. Entry of information exchanged and transferred between the Contractor and its subcontractors and suppliers on the web-based construction management software shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Accepted users shall be knowledgeable in the use of computers, including Internet browsers, email programs, CAD drawing applications, and Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) document distribution program.

D. Adobe PDF documents will be created through electronic conversion rather than optically scanned whenever possible. The Contractor is responsible for the training of their personnel in the use of PROCORE (outside what is provided by the Construction Manager) and the other programs indicated above as needed.

Web Based Construction Document Management
01322-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01322 (DraftFinal)

1.07 USER ACCESS ADMINISTRATION
A. Provide a list of Contractor's key PROCORE personnel for the Construction Manager's acceptance. The Construction Manager is responsible for adding and removing users from the system. The Construction Manager reserves the right to perform a security check on all potential users.

1.08 CONNECTIVITY PROBLEMS
A. PROCORE is a web-based environment and therefore subject to the inherent speed and connectivity problems of the Internet. The Contractor is responsible for its own connectivity to the Internet. PROCORE response time is dependent on the Contractor's equipment, including processor speed, Internet access speed, etc. and current traffic on the Internet. The Owner and Construction Manager will not be liable for any delays associated from the usage of PROCORE including, but not limited to slow response time, down time periods, connectivity problems, or loss of information. The Contractor will ensure that its connectivity to the PROCORE system (whether at the home office or job site) is accomplished through some form of high-speed communications with 128 kb/s as the minimum bandwidth requirements for using the system. It is recommended a faster connection be used when uploading pictures and files into the system. Under no circumstances shall the usage of PROCORE be grounds for a time extension or cost adjustment to the Contract. If there are problems that persist with the PROCORE site for more than 24 consecutive hours that prevent the electronic submission of data by the Contractor, the Contractor may submit documents in paper form to the Construction Manager until such time that the Construction Manager notifies the Contractor that the PROCORE site is operable and available for use. Construction Manager shall likewise send documents to Contractor in paper form during such disruption of the PROCORE system.

1.09 TRAINING
A. The Construction Manager has arranged for the following training to be provided to the Contractor. The Construction Manager will provide a one-hour training class to the Contractor within 10 days of NTP at a time mutually agreeable to Contractor and Construction Manager. Thereafter the Construction Manager will provide up to one hour of additional training via telephone during the project per month of the project life.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. In order to process correspondence, submittals, and RFIs, the Contractor must provide and have in place for its own use the required basic components outlined below.

1. Hardware:
a. A computer with internet access and sufficient capabilities to perform all project duties; a scanner at least large enough to scan 11-inch by 17-inch sheets with sufficient resolution to maintain clarity and legibility of the Web Based Construction Document Management
01322-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01322 (DraftFinal) document at its native size; and a color printer of sufficient size and capacity to accept incoming correspondence as described in this section.

2. Software:
a. Adobe Acrobat 9 or higher; Microsoft’s Internet Explorer v7 or higher; Microsoft Office 2010 or higher, including but not limited to Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel.
b. PROCORE currently supports Mozilla's Firefox v3.5 and newer, Apple's Safari v4 and newer, Google Chrome, and Microsoft's Internet Explorer v7 and v8 web browsers for accessing the application. Certain functions may not be available when using any program other than the newest version of Microsoft’s Internet Explorer.

3. Facilities:
a. The Contractor shall make its own arrangements to provide high-speed (minimum speed: download 1Mbps/upload 256Kbps) internet connection for its own use as soon as practicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUMMARY
A. Items to be uploaded to PROCORE by the Construction Manager include but are not limited to: RFI responses, Submittal comments, Clarification letters, Design Clarifications, Field Orders, et al. These items will be emailed via PROCORE as attachments in PDF file format via PROCORE. These attachments may include files that need to be viewed and/or printed in color. Formal letters, stop notices, Field Orders, Progress Payment Requests, and Contract Change Orders will always include a wet- signed hard copy.

B. Items to be uploaded to PROCORE by the Constructor include but are not limited to: RFI, Submittals, Request for Clarification letters, Request for Design Clarification letters, et al. These items will be emailed via PROCORE as attachments in PDF file format via PROCORE. These attachments may include files that need to be viewed and/or printed in color. Contractor shall provide wet-signed hard copies of documents required by Contract Documents, as well as any documents requested by the Construction Manager, including but not limited to: Formal letters, Progress Payment Requests, and Contract Change Orders, et al.

3.02 PROCURE UTILIZATION
A. All project related correspondence (RFIs, submittals, etc.) originated by the Contractor or Subcontractor, Supplier, et al. shall be directed to the Construction Manager, unless otherwise indicated in the Specifications.

3.03 WEB-BASED CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE UTILIZATION A. Web-based construction management software shall be utilized in connection with all document and information management required by these Contract Documents.

Web Based Construction Document Management
01322-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01322 (DraftFinal)

3.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The use of the electronic communication does not waive the requirement for the provision of hard copies of all formal correspondence and submittals. The hard copies of all documents must match the electronic copies of all correspondence and submittals.

B. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. The provisions of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures shall apply both to electronic copies and hard copies of submittals.

C. In addition to above, PROCORE shall be utilized in connection with submittal preparation and information management required by but not limited to Sections:

1. Section 01321 - Schedules and Reports.

2. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

D. PROCORE will be utilized by all other Sections not listed above and as required by the Construction Manager.

E. If a submittal package has multiple items that are not directly related, each item shall be considered a separate submittal and shall be sent separately. For example, “Concrete Mix Design,” and “Concrete Curing Compound” shall be submitted as separate items to the Construction Manager.

3.05 TERMINATION IN USE
A. The Owner may request a termination of the use of PROCORE for the electronic submission of data, and alternatively the use of paper documents submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents by providing notification in writing with 10 days’ notice that it intends to discontinue use of PROCORE.

3.06 ADOBE PDF
A. All information, comments, questions, and statements shall be scanned and/or converted to the PDF file format and attached to the email via PROCORE. Items to be sent via email via PROCORE include but are not limited to large-format plan sheets (22-inch by 34-inch or larger), small-format plan sheets, pages within tabbed binders, RFIs, transmittal sheets, et al. The PDF attachments supplied to the Construction Manager shall be in a sufficient resolution to be fully legible at its native size.

B. All separate files within a given piece of correspondence shall be combined into a single PDF document (e.g., an RFI that contains a text file and two photo files shall be combined into a single PDF document prior to delivery to the Construction Manager).

Web Based Construction Document Management
01322-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01322 (DraftFinal)

3.07 LABELING FORMAT
A. The subject line of each email via PROCORE, and the file name of any attached files, shall be in accordance with Section 01330-1.3.A.2 for submittals and as directed by Construction Manager other correspondence (RFIs, Letters, Transmittals, Proposed Change Orders, et al.).

B. Label shall include the type of correspondence (i.e., RFI, etc.), a unique number, sequentially assigned for the given piece of correspondence. The Contractor will indicate the subject at the end of the numbering scheme with a description (key words) of the item. Each piece of correspondence shall be sent in a separate email via PROCORE.

3.08 ORIGINAL DOCUMENTS
A. Where possible, the Contractor will obtain the electronic document from its original source to maintain the integrity, legibility, and searchability of the document.

3.09 ORGANIZATION
A. The information included in the attachments shall be organized in a logical and thoughtful manner. Where the information originated in a tabbed format (a binder, for example), the scanned and/or converted PDF file shall be electronically bookmarked accordingly using the “bookmark” function of Adobe Acrobat 9 Std.

3.10 PRINTING
A. Except where otherwise indicated, the Contractor will receive no hard copies of the above outlined correspondence. The Contractor will be required to print for its use, in color if necessary, any record copies, field copies, sub-Contractor copies, etc., if such copies are desired.

3.11 PROJECT FORMS
A. The Contractor may use its own correspondence forms to be attached to correspondence emails via PROCORE as long as the Contractor’s forms comply with this and all submittal sections.

END OF SECTION
Submittal Procedures
01330-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01330 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01330

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Requirements and procedures for Submittals to confirm compliance with Contract Documents.

1.02 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
A. Contractor is responsible to determine and verify field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data, and check and coordinate each item with other applicable approved Shop Drawings and Contract Document requirements.

B. Provide Submittals:

1. That are specified or reasonably required for construction, operation, and maintenance of the Work.

2. That demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents.

C. Where multiple Submittals are required, provide a separate Submittal for each Specification section.

1. In order to expedite construction, the Contractor may make more than one Submittal per Specification section, but a single Submittal may not cover more than one Specification section:
a. The only exception to this requirement is when one Specification section covers the requirements for a component of equipment specified in another section.
b. For example, circuit breakers are a component of switchgear. The switchgear Submittal must also contain data for the associated circuit breakers, even though they are covered in a different Specification section.

D. Prepare Submittals in the English language. Do not include information in other languages.

E. Present measurements in customary American units (feet, inches, pounds, etc.).

F. Must be clear and legible, and of sufficient size for presentation of information.

G. Page size, other than drawings:

1. Minimum: 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches.

2. Maximum: 11 inches by 17 inches.

Submittal Procedures
01330-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01330 (DraftFinal) H. Drawing sheet size:

1. Maximum: 22 inches by 34 inches.
a. Minimum plan scale: 1/8 inch equals 1 foot-0 inches. b. Minimum font size: 1/8-inch.

2. 11-inch by 17-inch sheet:
a. Minimum plan scale: 1/8 inch equals 1 foot-0 inches. b. Minimum font size: 1/8-inch.

I. Show dimensions, construction details, wiring diagrams, controls, manufacturers, catalog numbers, and all other pertinent details.

J. Provide Submittal information from only one manufacturer for a specified product.

Submittals with multiple manufacturers for one product will be rejected without review.

1.03 SUBMITTAL ORGANIZATION
A. Organize Submittals in exactly the same order as the items are referenced, listed, and/or organized in the Specification section.

B. For Submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas under the same Specification section, the Submittal for the individual devices must list the area where the device is used.

C. Bookmarks:

1. Bookmarks shall match the table of contents.

2. Bookmark each section (tab) and heading.

3. Drawings: Bookmark at a minimum, each discipline, area designation, or appropriate division.

4. At file opening, display all levels of bookmarks as expanded.

D. Where applicable (i.e., except for Drawings, figures, etc.), Submittal content shall be electronically searchable utilizing the PDF file as submitted.

E. Thumbnails optimized for fast web viewing.

F. Sequentially number pages within the tabbed sections:

1. Submittals that are not fully indexed and tabbed with sequentially numbered pages, or are otherwise unacceptable, will be returned without review.

G. Attachments:

1. Include with each Submittal a copy of the relevant Specification section. a. Indicate in the left margin, next to each pertinent paragraph, either compliance with a check (√) or deviation with a consecutive number (1, 2, 3).
b. Provide a list of all numbered deviations with a clear explanation and reason for the deviation.

2. Include with each Submittal a copy of the relevant Drawing, including relevant addendum updates.
a. Indicate either compliance with a check (√) or deviation with a consecutive number (1, 2, 3).

Submittal Procedures
01330-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01330 (DraftFinal) b. Provide a list of all numbered deviations with a clear explanation and reason for the deviation.
c. Provide field dimensions and relationship to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials.

H. Contractor: Prepare Submittal information in sufficient detail to show compliance with specified requirements.

1. Determine and verify quantities, field dimensions, product dimensions, specified design and performance criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data.

2. Coordinate Submittal with other Submittals and with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. Check, verify, and revise Submittals as necessary to bring them into conformance with Contract Documents and actual field conditions.

I. Contractor: Prepare “Or Equal” Submittal information.

1. Provide standard Submittal requirements.
a. In addition, provide in sufficient detail to show reason for variance from specified product and impacts.

2. Provide reason the specified product is not being provided.

3. Explain the benefits to the Owner for accepting the “Or Equal”.

4. Itemized comparison of the proposed “Or Equal” with product specified, including a list of significant variations:
a. Design features.
b. Design dimensions.
c. Installation requirements.
d. Operations and maintenance requirements.
e. Availability of maintenance services and sources of replacement materials.

5. Reference projects where the product has been successfully used:
a. Name and address of project.
b. Year of installation.
c. Year placed in operation.
d. Name of product installed.
e. Point of contact: Name and phone number.

6. Define impacts:
a. Impacts to other contracts.
b. Impacts to other work or products.

7. Contractor represents the following:
a. Contractor bears the burden of proof of the equivalency of the proposed “Or Equal”.
b. Proposed “Or Equal” is equal or superior to the specified product. c. Contractor will provide the warranties or bonds that would be provided on the specified product on the proposed “Or Equal”, unless the Owner requires a Special Warranty.
d. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted “Or Equal” into the Work and will be responsible for the costs to make changes as required to the Work.
e. Contractor waives rights to claim additional costs caused by proposed “Or Equal” which may subsequently become apparent.

Submittal Procedures
01330-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01330 (DraftFinal) J. Contractor: Prepare substitution Submittal information.

1. Provide standard Submittal requirements.
a. In addition, provide in sufficient detail to show reason for variance from specified product and impacts.

2. Provide reason the specified product is not being provided.

3. Explain the benefits to the Owner for accepting the substitution.

4. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified, including a list of significant variations:
a. Design features.
b. Design dimensions.
c. Installation requirements.
d. Operations and maintenance requirements.
e. Availability of maintenance services and sources of replacement materials.

6. Define impacts:
a. Impacts to Contract Price.
1) Required license fees or royalties.
2) Do not include costs under separate contracts.
3) Do not include Engineer’s costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents.
b. Impacts to Contract Time.
c. Impacts to Contract Scope.
d. Impacts to other contracts.
e. Impacts to other work or products.

7. Contractor represents the following:
a. Contractor shall pay associated costs for the Engineer to evaluate the substitution.
b. Contractor bears the burden of proof of the equivalency of the proposed substitution.
c. Proposed substitution does not change the design intent and will have equal performance to the specified product.
d. Proposed substitution is equal or superior to the specified product. e. Contractor will provide the warranties or bonds that would be provided on the specified product on the proposed substitution, unless the Owner requires a Special Warranty.
f. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work and will be responsible for the costs to make changes as required to the Work.
g. Contractor waives rights to claim additional costs caused by proposed substitution which may subsequently become apparent.

Submittal Procedures
01330-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01330 (DraftFinal)

1.04 SUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBERING
A. Number each Submittal using the format defined in the table below:

Spec Section Number Dash
Initial
Submittal -
Sequential
Number
Decimal
Point
Subsequent
Submittal
Revisions
Sequential
Number
Example 1
Description Cast-In-Place Concrete
8th initial
Submittal
03300 - 0008
Example 2
Description Cast-In-Place Concrete
8th initial
Submittal
First revision to
the 8th initial
Submittal
03300 - 0008 . 1

1.05 SUBMITTALS IN ELECTRONIC MEDIA FORMAT
A. General: Provide all information in PC-compatible format using Windows® operating system as utilized by the Owner and Engineer.

B. Text: Provide text documents and manufacturer’s literature in Portable Document Format (PDF).

C. Graphics: Provide graphic Submittals (Drawings, diagrams, figures, etc.) utilizing Portable Document Format (PDF).

D. Submit in the format provided in Attachment A - Contractor Submittal Transmittal Form.

1.06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
A. Engineer: Review Submittal and provide response:

1. Review description:
a. Engineer will be entitled to rely upon the accuracy or completeness of designs, calculations, or certifications made by licensed professionals accompanying a particular Submittal whether or not a stamp or seal is required by Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. b. Engineer’s review of Submittals shall not release the Contractor from the Contractor’s responsibility for performance of requirements of Contract Documents. Neither shall the Engineer’s review release the Contractor from fulfilling purpose of installation nor from the Contractor’s liability to replace defective Work.
c. Engineer’s review of Shop Drawings, samples, or test procedures will be only for conformance with design concepts and for compliance with information given in Contract Documents.
d. Engineer’s review does not extend to:
1) Accuracy of dimensions, quantities, or performance of equipment and systems designed by the Contractor.

Submittal Procedures
01330-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01330 (DraftFinal) 2) Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, except when specified, indicated on the Drawings, or required by Contract Documents.
3) Safety precautions or programs related to safety which shall remain the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
e. Engineer can Approve or Not Approve any exception at their sole discretion.

2. Review timeframe:
a. Except as may be provided in technical Specifications, a Submittal will be returned within 10 calendar days.
b. When a Submittal cannot be returned within the specified period, Engineer will, within a reasonable time after receipt of the Submittal, give notice of the date by which that Submittal will be returned. c. Engineer’s acceptance of progress schedule containing Submittal review times less than those specified or agreed to in writing by the Engineer will not constitute Engineer’s acceptance of review times.
d. Critical Submittals:
1) Contractor will notify Engineer in writing that timely review of a Submittal is critical to the progress of Work.

3. Schedule delays:
a. No adjustment of Contract Times or Contract Price will be allowed due to Engineer’s review of Submittals unless all of the following criteria are met:
1) Engineer has failed to review and return first submission within the agreed upon time frame.
2) Contractor demonstrates that delay in progress of Work is directly attributable to the Engineer’s failure to return Submittal within time indicated and accepted by the Engineer.

4. Review response will be returned to the Contractor with one of the following dispositions:
a. Approved:
1) No Exceptions:
a) There are no notations or comments on the Submittal and the Contractor may release the equipment for production.
2) Make Corrections Noted - See Comments:
a) Contractor may proceed with the Work, however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. b) Resubmittal not required.
3) Make Corrections Noted - Confirm:
a) Contractor may proceed with the Work, however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. b) Submit confirmation specifically addressing each notation or comment to the Engineer within 15 calendar days of the date of the Engineer’s transmittal requiring the confirmation.
b. Not Approved:
1) Correct and Resubmit:
a) Contractor may not proceed with the Work described in the Submittal.
b) Contractor assumes responsibility for proceeding without approval.

Submittal Procedures
01330-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01330 (DraftFinal) c) Resubmittal of complete Submittal package is required within 30 calendar days of the date of the Engineer’s Submittal review response.
2) Rejected - See Remarks:
a) Contractor may not proceed with the Work described in the Submittal.
b) Submittal does not meet the intent of the Contract Documents.

Resubmittal of complete Submittal package is required with materials, equipment, methods, etc., that meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.
c. Receipt Acknowledged:
1) Filed for Record:
a) This is used in acknowledging receipt of informational Submittals that address means and methods of construction such as
schedules and work plans, conformance test reports, health and safety plans, etc.
2) With Comments - Resubmit:
a) This is used in acknowledging receipt of informational Submittals that address means and methods of construction such as
schedules and work plans, conformance test reports, health and safety plans, etc. Feedback regarding missing information, conflicting information, or other information that makes it incomplete can be made with comments.

B. Contractor: Prepare resubmittal, if applicable:

1. Clearly identify each correction or change made. Provide page references to the changed information within the resubmittal.

2. Include a response in writing to each of the Engineer’s comments or questions for Submittal packages that are resubmitted in the order that the comments or questions were presented from the first and subsequent Submittals and numbered consistent with the Engineer’s numbering.
a. Acceptable responses to the Engineer’s comments are listed below:
1) “Incorporated” - Engineer’s comment or change is accepted and appropriate changes are made.
2) “Response” - Engineer’s comment not incorporated. Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is not made. Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or change requested by the Engineer.
b. Reviews and resubmittals:
1) Contractor shall provide resubmittals which include responses to all Submittal review comments separately and at a level of detail commensurate with each comment.
2) Contractor responses shall indicate how the Contractor resolved the issue pertaining to each review comment.
a) Responses such as “acknowledged” or “noted” are not
acceptable.
3) Resubmittals which do not comply with this requirement may be rejected and returned without review.
4) Contractor shall be allowed no extensions of any kind to any part of their contract due to the rejection of non-compliant Submittals.

Submittal Procedures
01330-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01330 (DraftFinal) 5) Submittal review comments not addressed by the Contractor in resubmittals shall continue to apply whether restated or not in subsequent reviews until adequately addressed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the reviewing and approving authority. c. Any resubmittal that does not contain responses to the Engineer’s previous comments shall be returned for revision and resubmittal. No further review by the Engineer will be performed until a response for previous comments has been received.

3. Resubmittal timeframe:
a. Contractor shall provide resubmittal within 15 days. b. When a resubmittal cannot be returned within the specified period, Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing.

4. Review costs:
a. Costs incurred by the Owner as a result of additional reviews of a particular Submittal after the second time it has been reviewed shall be borne by the Contractor.
b. Reimbursement to the Owner will be made by deducting such costs from the Contractor’s subsequent progress payments.

1.07 PRODUCT DATA
A. Edit Submittals so that the Submittal specifically applies to only the product furnished.

B. Neatly cross out all extraneous text, options, models, etc., that do not apply to the product being furnished so that the information remaining is only applicable to the product being furnished.

1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Contractor to field verify elevation, coordinates, and pipe material for pipe tie-in to pipeline or structure prior to the preparation of Shop Drawings.

B. Indicate project-designated equipment tag numbers for Submittal of devices, equipment, and assemblies.

1.09 SAMPLES
A. Details:

1. Submit labeled samples.

2. Samples will not be returned.

3. Provide number of sample Submittals as below:
a. Total: 2 minimum.
1) Owner: 1.
2) Engineer: 1.
3) Contractor: None.

Submittal Procedures
01330-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01330 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Submittal Procedures
01330-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01330 (DraftFinal)

ATTACHMENT A - CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM

Submittal Procedures
01330-Attachment A-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01330 (DraftFinal)

CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM
Owner: Click here to enter text. Date: MM/DD/YYYY
Contractor: Click here to enter text. Project No.: XXXXX.XX Project Name: Click here to enter text. Submittal Number: 000 Submittal Title: Click here to enter text.

To: Click here to enter text.

From: Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text.

Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text.

Specification No. and Subject of Submittal/Equipment Supplier Spec ##: Spec ##. Subject: Click here to enter text.

Authored By: Click here to enter text. Date Submitted: XX/XX/XXXX Submittal Certification
Check Either (A) or (B):
(A) We have verified that the equipment or material contained in this Submittal meets all the requirements specified in the project manual or shown on the Contract Drawings with no exceptions.
(B) We have verified that the equipment or material contained in this Submittal meets all the requirements specified in the project manual or shown on the Contract Drawings, except for the deviations listed.

Certification Statement: By this Submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data, and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable approved Shop Drawings and all Contract requirements.

General Contractor’s Reviewer’s Signature:

Printed Name:

PM/CM Office Use
Date Received GC to PM/CM:

Date Received PM/CM to Reviewer:

Date Received Reviewer to PM/CM:

Date Sent PM/CM to GC:

Photographic and Videographic Documentation
01340-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01340 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01340

PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Requirements for photographs and videos.

B. The purpose of the photographs and videos is to document the condition of the facilities prior to the Contractor beginning work at the Project site, the progress of the Work, and the Project site after Substantial Completion of the Work.

C. The scope of the photographic and videographic documentation shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor but shall be acceptable to the Engineer.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Photographer qualifications.

B. Pre-construction photographs and videos: Submit prior to beginning work at the Project site or prior to the Preconstruction Conference specified in Section 01312 - Project Meetings, whichever occurs earlier.

C. Construction photographs and videos: Submit with each application for payment.

D. Post-construction photographs and videos: Submit with project closeout documents as specified in Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures.

1.03 PHOTOGRAPHER
A. Photographer qualified and equipped to photograph either interior or exterior exposures, with lenses ranging from wide angle to telephoto.

B. Submit example work of previous photographs and video recording meeting the requirements of this Section.

1. Provide to Engineer no later than the pre-construction conference.

2. Provide photographs used for site examination.

3. Provide video of site examination.

4. Provide samples that used same camera and lighting equipment proposed for the Work.

5. Engineer will review work examples to determine if the quality of the images is acceptable.

6. Contractor is responsible for modifications to equipment and/or inspection procedures to achieve report material of acceptable quality.

7. Do not commence Work prior to approval of the material by the Engineer.

8. Once accepted, the standard report material shall serve as a standard for the remaining work.

Photographic and Videographic Documentation
01340-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01340 (DraftFinal)

1.04 KEY PLAN
A. Submit key plan of Project site with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph.

B. Include the same label information as the corresponding set of photographs.

1.05 PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Provide prints of each photograph for each area of Work.

B. Provide a digital copy of each photograph for each area of Work.

1. Monthly: Indexed digital flash drive.

2. Project record documents:
a. Catalog and index prints in chronological sequence.
b. Include typed table of contents.

1.06 PRE-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEOS
A. Provide photographs and video of the condition entire site including each area of Work prior to the start of Work.

1. Areas to be photographed and videoed shall include the site of the Work and all existing facilities, either on or adjoining the Project site, including the interior of existing structures that could be damaged as a result of the Contractor’s Work.

2. Include general condition, structures, vegetation, staging, storing, working, parking areas and excavation areas.

1.07 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEOS
A. Provide photographs and videos of construction in each area of Work throughout progress of Work including a key plan designating where each photograph was taken.

B. Take site and interior photographs and videos from differing directions of building demolition, pre-excavation, footing excavation, soil testing, utility crossings, installation of bypass piping, excavation of access pits, installation of lining system in pipes, rehabilitation of manholes, building modifications, utilities, electrical and instrumentation modifications, and other applicable activities indicating relative progress of the work.

C. Take photos a maximum of 7 calendar days prior to Submittal.

1.08 POST-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEOS
A. Provide photographs of the entire site including each area of Work at the completion of Work.

1. Include general condition, structures, vegetation, staging, storing, working, parking areas and excavation areas.

2. Take photos and video from same points in same direction as pre-construction examination.

B. Submittal of photos and videos is a condition of final payment.

Photographic and Videographic Documentation
01340-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01340 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MEDIA
A. Paper media:

1. Commercial grade, glossy surface, acid-free photographic paper.

2. Submit 3 prints of each photographic view within 7 days of taking photographs.

3. Format:
a. Ground photos: Color, matte finish, 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch size, mounted on soft card stock.
b. Aerial photos: Color, matte finish, 11-inch by 17-inch size, mounted on soft card stock.
c. Mount each print in a separate, archival type, non-glare, 3-hole punched protector.

4. Identification: On photograph, provide the following information:
a. Name of project.
b. Date stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph. c. Description of vantage point, indicating location and direction by compass point.

5. Provide a suitably sized 3-ring binder for each set of prints. a. Furnish binders in sufficient quantities to hold entire set of prints taken for the duration of the Contract.
b. Label binder spine and front with project name.

B. Digital media:

1. Flash drive compatible with current Microsoft Windows.

2. Provide photos as individual, indexed JPG files with the following characteristics:
a. Compression shall be set to preserve quality over file size. b. Highest resolution JPG images shall be submitted. Resizing to a smaller size when high resolution JPGs are available shall not be permitted. c. JPG image resolution shall be 5 megapixels at 2,400 by 1,800 or higher. d. Images shall have rectangular, clean images. Artistic borders, beveling, drop shadows, etc., are not permitted.

3. Identification: On photograph, provide the following information:
a. Name of project.
b. Date stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph. c. Description of vantage point, indicating location and direction by compass point.

C. Videos:

1. Video quality shall be 720p HD or greater in MPG, AVCHD, AVI, or MP4 format.

2. Digital color video format.

3. Provide audio portion of the composite video sufficiently free from electrical interference and background noise to provide complete intelligibility of oral report.

4. Identification: On each copy provide a label with the following information:
a. Name of project.
b. Date video was recorded.

5. Submit 1 copy of each video within 7 days of recording.

Photographic and Videographic Documentation
01340-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01340 (DraftFinal)

6. Display continuous running time.

7. At start of each video recording, record weather conditions from local newspaper or television and the actual temperature reading at Project site.

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Delegated Design Procedures
01357-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01357 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01357

DELEGATED DESIGN PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Delegated Design procedures.

1.02 GENERAL
A. Refer to the Contract RFP in Volume 2 for additional delegated design requirements.

B. Delegated Design - Professional design services assigned to the Contractor by express delegation in the Contract Documents. Work is “Delegated Design” where the Technical Sections require the Contractor to provide professional design services and to submit signed and sealed documents from a registered Professional Engineer.

C. Contractor’s Professional Engineer - The design professional retained by the Contractor to perform Delegated Design.

D. Owner may require Contractor to provide professional design services for a portion of the Work by express delegation in the Contract Documents.

1. Requirements of Delegated Design component as specified in the Technical Section and as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Such delegation will specify the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy, and the Submittals that the Contractor must furnish to the Engineer with respect to the Delegated Design.

E. Contractor shall cause such Delegated Design services to be provided pursuant to the professional standard of care by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on Drawings, calculations, Specifications, certifications, and Submittals prepared by such design professional.

1. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of performance or design criteria specified by the Owner or Engineer.

2. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations.

3. Such design professional shall issue certifications of design required by Laws and Regulations.

4. If a Shop Drawing or other Submittal related to the Owner-delegated design is prepared by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or others for submittal to the Engineer, then such Shop Drawing or other Submittal shall bear the written approval of Contractor’s design professional when submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer.

Delegated Design Procedures
01357-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01357 (DraftFinal) F. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by the design professionals retained or employed by Contractor under Delegated Design, subject to the professional standard of care and the performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents.

G. Engineer’s review, approval, and other determinations regarding design drawings, calculations, Specifications, certifications, and other Submittals furnished by Contractor pursuant to a Delegated Design will be only for the following limited purposes:

1. Confirming that Submittal is in conformance with the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents.

1.03 CONTRACTOR’S PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER
A. Contractor or Subcontractor shall retain a licensed Professional Engineer to perform Delegated Design.

B. Qualifications:

1. Holding a current license to perform the specified design in the same jurisdiction as the Project site.

2. Experienced in designing similar systems of similar complexity.

C. Insurance:

1. Provide Contractor’s Professional Engineer’s Professional Liability Insurance as specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.

D. Responsibilities:

1. Review and design in accordance with system performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents.
a. Prepare written requests for clarifications or interpretations of performance or design criteria for submittal to the Engineer by the Contractor.

2. Sign and seal design reports, calculations, design drawings and specifications, and other design Submittals for the Delegated Design Work.

3. Review and submit written approval of Submittals related to the Delegated Design Work.

4. Design modifications to the Delegated Design Work as required.

5. Visit the Site, as required, to verify that installation of the Delegated Design Work is in conformance with the Delegated Design Drawings and Specifications.

6. Submit through Contractor to Engineer written, signed, and sealed certification that the installed Delegated Design Work complies with Contractor’s Professional Engineer’s design.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to the start of Delegated Design:

1. Contractor’s Professional Engineer’s qualifications:
a. Experience for the Delegated Design.
b. Evidence of Professional Engineering license.

2. Contractor’s Professional Engineer Professional Liability Insurance certificate.

Delegated Design Procedures
01357-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01357 (DraftFinal) B. Delegated Design:

1. Product data:
a. Details related to the Delegated Design as specified in Technical Sections to completely describe the system.

2. Design documents with signature and seal from the Contractor’s Professional Engineer.
a. Design documents include but are not limited to Drawings, calculations, Specifications, inspection reports, and certifications.

3. Lists and schedules:
a. Prepare and submit lists or schedules of items where Delegated Design is required by the Contract Documents.
b. Group items by location in the Work.
1) When “Area Numbers” are indicated on the Contract Drawings, group lists in accordance with those “areas.”
2) For work without area numbers, group using logical divisions acceptable to the Engineer.
3) Group items within each “area” as follows:
a) Systems.
b) Components.
c) Supports.
d) Anchorage.
e) Bracing.

C. Construction services:

1. Contractor’s Professional Engineer’s comments on Submittals.

2. Other construction documents, as required.

1.05 ENGINEER RESPONSE TO DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Engineer response will be either of the following:

1. Approved. Make Corrections Noted - See Comments:
a. Contractor may proceed with the Work; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product.
b. Review was for the limited purpose of determining that the document was stamped by a Professional Engineer and that such design is generally consistent with and will not negatively affect the design concept presented in the Contract Documents.

2. Rejected - See Remarks:
a. Contractor may not proceed with the Work described in the Submittal. b. Submittal does not meet the intent of the Contract Documents. c. Resubmittal of complete Submittal package is required with materials, equipment, methods, etc., that meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Regulatory Requirements
01410-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01410 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01410

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Regulatory authorities and codes.

1.02 AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ)
A. Also referred to as the permitting agency.

B. Building Department: City of Roseville.

C. Fire Department: City of Roseville.

1.03 APPLICABLE CODES
A. Products in contact with drinking water:

1. Materials in contact with drinking waters: In accordance with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
a. Certification by an independent ANSI accredited third party, including, but not limited to, NSF International, as being lead free.

2. Materials in contact with drinking waters: In accordance with California Health and Safety Code, Section 116875.

B. California Code of Regulations (CCR), California Building Standards Code, CCR Title 24:

1. Building code:
a. California Building Code (CBC), Title 24, Part 2 – 2019.

2. Electrical code:
a. California Electrical Code (CEC), Title 24, Part 3 – 2019.

3. Mechanical code:
a. California Mechanical Code (CMC), Title 24, Part 4 – 2019.

4. Plumbing code:
a. California Plumbing Code (CPC), Title 24, Part 5 – 2019.

5. Energy code:
a. California Energy Code (CEC), Title 24, Part 6 – 2019.

6. Historical building code:
a. California Historical Building Code (CHBC), Title 24, Part 8 – 2019.

7. Fire code:
a. California Fire Code (CFC), Title 24, Part 9 – 2019.

8. Existing building code:
a. California Existing Building Code (CEBC), Title 24, Part 10 – 2019.

9. Green building standards code:
a. California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen), Title 24, Part 11 – 2019.

Regulatory Requirements
01410-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01410 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Quality Control
01450-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01450 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01450

QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Quality control and control of installation.

2. Tolerances.

3. References.

4. Mock-up requirements.

5. Authority and duties of Owner’s representative or inspector.

6. Sampling and testing.

7. Testing and inspection services.

8. Contractor’s responsibilities.

1.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.

H. When specified, products will be tested and inspected either at point of origin or at Work site:

1. Notify Engineer in writing well in advance of when products will be ready for testing and inspection at point of origin.

2. Do not construe that satisfactory tests and inspections at point of origin is final acceptance of products. Satisfactory tests or inspections at point of origin do not preclude retesting or re-inspection at Work site.

I. Do not ship products which require testing and inspection at point of origin prior to testing and inspection.

Quality Control
01450-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01450 (DraftFinal)

1.03 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When Manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. E329 - Standard for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing or Special Inspection.

B. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

1.05 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where specific date is established by code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.

D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding.

1.06 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS
A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this Section and identified in respective product specification sections.

B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

C. Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for remaining Work.

D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Engineer and is specified in product specification sections to be removed; remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Engineer.

1.07 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE OR INSPECTOR A. Owner’s Project Representative employed or retained by Owner is authorized to inspect the Work.

Quality Control
01450-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01450 (DraftFinal) B. Inspections may extend to entire or part of the Work and to preparation, fabrication, and manufacture of products for the Work.

C. Deficiencies or defects in the Work which have been observed will be called to Contractor’s attention.

D. Inspector will not:

1. Alter or waive provisions of Contract Documents.

2. Inspect Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures for construction.

3. Accept portions of the Work, issue instructions contrary to intent of Contract Documents, or act as foreman for Contractor. Supervise, control, or direct Contractor’s safety precautions or programs; or inspect for safety conditions on Work site, or of persons thereon, whether Contractor’s employees or others.

E. Inspector will:

1. Conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to assist Engineer in determining when the Work is, in general, proceeding in accordance with Contract Documents.

2. Report to Engineer whenever Inspector believes that Work is faulty, defective, does not conform to Contract Documents, or has been damaged; or whenever there is defective material or equipment; or whenever Inspector believes the Work should be uncovered for observation or requires special procedures.

1.08 SAMPLING AND TESTING
A. General:

1. Prior to delivery and incorporation in the Work, submit listing of sources of materials, when specified in sections where materials are specified.

2. When specified in sections where products are specified:
a. Submit sufficient quantities of representative samples of character and quality required of materials to be used in the Work for testing or examination.
b. Test materials in accordance with standards of national technical organizations.

B. Sampling:

1. Furnish specimens of materials when requested.

2. Do not use materials which are required to be tested until testing indicates satisfactory compliance with specified requirements.

3. Specimens of materials will be taken for testing whenever necessary to determine quality of material.

4. Assist Engineer in preparation of test specimens at site of work, such as soil samples and concrete test cylinders.

1.09 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
A. Contractor will employ and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform Contractor quality control testing as required in the technical specifications for various work and materials.

Quality Control
01450-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01450 (DraftFinal) B. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of an “Owner’s independent testing firm” certified to perform testing and inspection as required in the technical specifications for various work and materials or stipulated in Section 01455 - Regulatory Quality Assurance to confirm Contractor’s compliance with Contract Documents.

C. The Owner’s independent testing firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by Owner and requested by the Engineer.

D. The qualifications of laboratory that will perform the testing, contracted by the Owner or by the Contractor, shall be as follows:

1. Has authorization to operate in the state where the project is located.

2. Meets “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification,” published by American Council of Independent Laboratories.

3. Meets requirements of ASTM E329.

4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time specialist on staff to review services.

5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to NIST or accepted values of natural physical constants.

6. Will submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of NIST during most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by inspection.

E. Testing, inspections, and source quality control may occur on or off project site.

Perform off-site testing inspections and source quality control as required by Engineer or Owner.

F. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner’s independent testing firm, furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested.

1. Notify Engineer and Owner’s independent testing firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing.

2. Make arrangements with Owner’s independent testing firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor’s use.

G. Limitations of authority of testing Laboratory: Owner’s independent testing firm or Laboratory is not authorized to:

1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor.

4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.

H. Testing and employment of an Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

I. Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by same Owner’s independent testing firm on instructions by Engineer. Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract Sum/Price.

Quality Control
01450-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01450 (DraftFinal) J. The Owner’s independent testing firm responsibilities will include:

1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of services.

3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.

4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

5. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products.

6. Perform additional tests required by Engineer.

7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings when requested.

K. Owner’s independent testing firm shall do the following:

1. Test reports shall include at least the following information:
a. Date issued.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name of inspector.
d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in Project.
g. Type of inspection or test.
h. Date of test.
i. Certified test results stamped and signed by a registered Engineer in the state where the project is located.
j. Summary of conformance with Contract Documents.
k. When requested by Engineer, the Owner’s independent testing firm will provide interpretation of test results.

1.10 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory personnel and provide access to construction and manufacturing operations.

B. Secure and deliver to Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.

C. Provide to Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory and Engineer preliminary mix design proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by testing laboratory.

D. Submit product test reports electronically.

E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:

1. To provide access to construction to be tested.

2. To obtain and handle samples at Work site or at source of product to be tested.

3. To facilitate inspections and tests.

4. For storage and curing of test samples.

Quality Control
01450-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01450 (DraftFinal) F. Notify Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory 48 hours in advance of when observations, inspections and testing is needed for laboratory to schedule and perform in accordance with their notice of response time.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01455

REGULATORY QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Project regulatory requirements for quality assurance that includes Special Inspections, Special Certification, and Structural Observation.

B. Special Certification and Special Inspections in this Section are in addition to the requirements specified in Section 01450 - Quality Control, and in the individual Sections.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

2. 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.

3. 530.1 - Specification for Masonry Structures.

B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1. 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

D. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

2. D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.

E. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. A706 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

2. C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.

3. C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.

4. C1611 - Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating Concrete.

F. Building Code:

1. As specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.

G. The Masonry Society (TMS):

1. 402 - Building Code for Masonry Structures.

2. 602 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal)

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Special Certification: Certification for designated seismic systems that demonstrates compliance with performance requirements.

2. Special Inspection: Inspection of the materials, installation, fabrication, erection, or placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with approved construction documents and referenced standards.

3. Special Inspection, Continuous: The full-time observation of work requiring Special Inspection by an approved special inspector who is present in the area where the work is being performed.

4. Special Inspection, Periodic: The part-time, or intermittent observation of work requiring Special Inspection by an approved special inspector who is present in the area where the work is being performed and at the completion of the work.

5. Structural Observation: The visual observation of the structural system by a registered design professional for general conformance to the approved construction documents at significant construction stages and at completion of the structural system.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Special Certifications for designated seismic systems.

B. Schedule and coordinate the submittal of Special Inspection reports and test results prepared by others.

1.05 APPROVED FABRICATORS
A. Structural steel fabricators shall be approved as required herein. Shops shall be those listed by ICBO/ICC, AISC, COLA, or other nationally-recognized agencies.

Approved fabricator certificates and shop inspection test results shall be submitted for approval as part of the shop drawing submittal process per CBC Section 1704.2.5.2.

1.06 SPECIAL INSPECTION
A. Owner will employ 1 or more special inspectors who will provide Special Inspections during construction.

B. Special inspector(s) shall be qualified for inspection of the particular type of materials or operations requiring Special Inspection.

C. Testing laboratory: Testing that is required to satisfy the requirements of Special Inspection will be performed by the Owner’s testing laboratory as specified in Section 01450 - Quality Control.

D. Duties of special inspector:

1. General: Required duties of the special inspector(s) shall be as described in the Building Code.

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal)

2. Reporting: Special inspector(s) shall provide reports of each inspection to the Contractor. Contractor shall distribute copies of inspection reports to the Owner.
a. Reports shall, at a minimum, include the following items:
1) Date and time of inspection, and name(s) of individual(s) performing the inspection.
2) Structures and areas of the structure where work or testing was observed.
3) Discrepancies between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the work or testing observed.
4) Other areas of deficiency in the Work.

E. Special Inspections shall not be construed as fulfilling the requirements for Structural Observation.

F. Owner or special inspector are responsible to select materials for Special Inspection.

1. Contractor shall not select materials for Special Inspection.

1.07 SPECIAL CERTIFICATION
A. Provide equipment that meets the special certification requirements of the Building Code.

B. Designated seismic systems shall be subject to the testing and qualification requirements of the regulatory Building Code, and shall require Special Certification as set forth in ASCE 7:

1. Mechanical equipment that is assigned an importance factor of 1.50 as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

2. All electrical equipment.

C. Special certification requirements for designated seismic systems:

1. Submittals shall include certification that the equipment is seismically qualified.

Certifications are subject to review and acceptance by Owner.

2. Certifications may be at least one of the following in accordance with ASCE 7:
a. Analysis.
b. Testing.
c. Experience data.

1.08 STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION
A. Owner will employ 1 or more registered design professionals to provide Structural Observation(s) during construction.

1. Registered design professional will be a civil or structural engineer currently licensed as such in the state where the project is located and regularly engaged in structural design equivalent to or similar to that indicated on the Drawings.

B. Structural Observations shall not be construed as fulfilling the requirements for Special Inspections.

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. Owner will provide Special Inspection of the following types of work as described in the Building Code wherever such work occurs, unless otherwise specified.

1. Attachment A - Concrete - Special Inspection Schedule.

2. Attachment B - Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical Components - Special Inspection Schedule.

3. Attachment C - Masonry Special Inspection Schedule - “Level C".

4. Attachment D - Soils - Special Inspection Schedule.

5. Attachment E - Structural Steel Welding - Special Inspection Schedule.

3.02 SPECIAL CERTIFICATION
A. Special inspector shall examine the designated seismic system(s) and determine whether the designated system components, including anchorage, are consistent with the evidence of compliance submitted for Special Certification.

3.03 STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION
A. The following work requires Structural Observation in accordance with the Building Code.

1. All structures in all areas:
a. Foundations.
b. Elevated slabs.

3.04 SCHEDULE
A. Contractor shall allow time necessary for Special Inspections and Structural Observation specified in this Section.

B. Sufficient notice shall be given so that the Special Inspections and Structural Observations can be performed. Contractor shall Allow time for individuals performing special inspection and structural observation to travel to the site.

3.05 PROCEDURE
A. Special inspector will immediately notify the Engineer of any corrections required and follow notification with appropriate documentation.

B. Contractor shall not proceed until the work is satisfactory to the Engineer.

END OF SECTION
Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal)

ATTACHMENT A - CONCRETE - SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment A-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal)

CONCRETE - SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE
(Includes: Cast-in-place, precast, prestressed, precast-prestressed, and shotcrete.) Verification and Inspection
Reference
Standard
Frequency of
Inspection(1)
(During Task Listed)
Continuous Periodic

1. Inspect reinforcement, including prestressing
tendons, and verify placement.

ACI 318
Building Code 

2. Reinforcing bar welding:
a. Verify weldability of reinforcing bars other
than ASTM A706;
AWS D1.4
ACI 318 
b. Inspect single-pass fillet welds, maximum
5/16 inch; and
AWS D1.4
ACI 318 
c. Inspect all other welds. AWS D1.4
ACI 318 

3. Inspect anchors cast in concrete. ACI 318 

4. Inspect anchors post-installed in hardened
concrete members:
a. Adhesive anchors installed in horizontally
or upwardly inclined orientations to resist
sustained tension loads.

ACI 318 
b. Mechanical anchors and adhesive anchors
not defined in 4.a. ACI 318 

5. Verify use of required design mix. ACI 318
Building Code 

6. Prior to concrete placement, fabricate
specimens for strength tests, perform slump
and air content tests, and determine the
temperature of the concrete.

ASTM C172
ASTM C31
ACI 318
Building Code


7. Inspect concrete and shotcrete placement for
proper application techniques.

ACI 318
Building Code 

8. Verify maintenance of specified curing
temperature and techniques.

ACI 318
Building Code 

9. Inspect prestressed concrete for:
a. Application of prestressing forces; and ACI 318 
b. Grouting of bonded prestressing tendons. ACI 318 

10. Inspect erection of precast concrete members. ACI 318 

11. Verify in-situ concrete strength, prior to
stressing of tendons in post-tensioned concrete
and prior to removal of shores and forms from
beams and structural slabs.

ACI 318 
Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment A-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal) Verification and Inspection
Reference
Standard
Frequency of
Inspection(1)
(During Task Listed)
Continuous Periodic

12. Inspect formwork for shape, location and
dimensions of the concrete member being
formed.

ACI 318 
Notes:
(1) “” represents a required inspection activity for the project where it occurs.

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment B 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal)

ATTACHMENT B - ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS -

SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment B-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal)

ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS -

SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE
Verification and Inspection
Reference
Standard
2022 CBC
Frequency of
Inspection(1)
(During Task Listed)
Continuous Periodic

1. Architectural components:
a. Cladding - exterior, weighing more than 5 psf:

Erection and fastening. Building Code 
b. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS): Building Code c. Non-bearing walls - exterior: Erection and
fastening. Building Code 
d. Non-bearing walls - interior, weighing more
than 15 psf. Building Code 
e. Veneer, exterior and interior, weighing more
than 5 psf: Erection and fastening. Building Code 
f. Access floors: Erection and anchorage. Building Code  g. Suspended ceiling system: Bracing. 
h. Storage racks - 8 feet or greater in height:

Anchorage. Building Code 
i. Skylight: Verification of safety compliance and
labeling and installation. Building Code 

2. Plumbing, mechanical, and electrical components:
a. Anchorage of electrical equipment for
emergency and standby power systems. Building Code 
b. Anchorage of other electrical and mechanical
equipment over 400 lb. on floors or roofs. Building Code  c. Installation and anchorage of pipelines
carrying hazardous chemicals and their
associated mechanical units.

Building Code 
d. Installation and anchorage of pipelines greater
than 8 inches in diameter. 
e. Installation and anchorage of ductwork
designed to carry hazardous materials. Building Code 
f. Installation and anchorage of ductwork greater
than 6 sf in cross section. 
g. Installation and anchorage of vibration
isolation systems where Contract Documents
require nominal clearance of 1/4 inch or less
between the equipment support frame and its
support/restraint.

Building Code 
Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment B-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal) Verification and Inspection
Reference
Standard
2022 CBC
Frequency of
Inspection(1)
(During Task Listed)
Continuous Periodic
h. Installation of mechanical and electrical
equipment, including duct work, piping
systems and their structural supports, where
automatic fire sprinkler systems are installed.

Building Code 

3. Fire-resistance elements:
a. Sprayed fire-resistant coatings: Building Code
b. Mastic and intumescent coatings: Building Code
c. Fire-resistant penetrations and joint systems: Building Code

4. Smoke control systems; Building Code
Notes:
(1) “” represents a required inspection activity for the project where it occurs.

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment C 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT C- MASONRY SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE - “LEVEL C”

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment C-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal) MASONRY SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE - “LEVEL C”

MINIMUM TESTS
Verification of Slump flow and Visual Stability Index (VSI) as delivered to the project site as determined by ASTM C1611 for self-consolidating grout.

Verification of proportions of materials in premixed or pre-blended mortar and grout as delivered to the project site.

Verification of f’m in accordance with Specification Section 04220 - Concrete Unit Masonry prior to construction.

MINIMUM SPECIAL INSPECTION - LEVEL C
Verification and Inspection
Reference
Standard
Frequency of
Inspection(1)
(During Task Listed)
Continuous Periodic

1. Verify compliance with the approved
submittals. TMS 602/ACI 530.1 

2. As masonry construction begins, verify that the
following are in compliance:
a. Proportions of site-prepared mortar. TMS 602/ACI 530.1  b. Placement of masonry units and
construction of mortar joints. TMS 602/ACI 530.1 
c. Placement of reinforcement, connectors,
and anchors.

TMS 602/ACI 530.1
TMS 402/ACI 530 
a. Reinforcing bar couplers and terminators. ICC-ES Evaluation Report 

3. Prior to grouting, verify that the following are in
compliance:
a. Placement of masonry units and
construction of mortar joints. TMS 602/ACI 530.1 
b. Grout space. TMS 602/ACI 530.1 
c. Grade, type, and size of reinforcement and
anchor bolts.

TMS 602/ACI 530.1
TMS 402/ACI 530 
d. Placement of reinforcement, connectors,
and anchors.

TMS 602/ACI 530.1
TMS 402/ACI 530 

4. Verify during construction:
a. Size and location of structural elements: TMS 602/ACI 530.1  b. Type, size, and location of anchors,
including details of anchorage of masonry
to structural members, frames, or other
construction.

TMS 402/ACI 530 
c. Welding of reinforcement. TMS 402/ACI 530 
Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment C-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal)

MINIMUM SPECIAL INSPECTION - LEVEL C
Verification and Inspection
Reference
Standard
Frequency of
Inspection(1)
(During Task Listed)
Continuous Periodic
d. Preparation, construction, and protection of
masonry during cold weather (temperature
below 40 degrees F) or hot weather
(temperature above 90 degrees F).

TMS 602/ACI 530.1 

5. Observe preparation of grout specimens,
mortar specimens, and/or prisms. TMS 602/ACI 530.1 
Notes:
(1) “” represents a required inspection activity for the project where it occurs.

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment D 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal)

ATTACHMENT D - SOILS - SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment D-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal)

SOILS - SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE
Verification and Inspection
Reference
Standard
2022 CBC
Frequency of
Inspection(1)
(During Task Listed)
Continuous Periodic

1. Verify materials below shallow foundations are
adequate to achieve the design bearing
capacity.

Building Code 

2. Verify excavations are extended to proper
depth and have reached proper material.

Building Code 

3. Perform classification and testing of fill and
backfill materials.

Building Code 

4. Verify use of proper materials, densities, and
lift thicknesses during placement and
compaction of fill and backfill.

Building Code 

5. Prior to placement of fill, observe subgrade and
verify that site has been prepared properly.

Building Code 
Notes:
(1) “” represents a required inspection activity for the project where it occurs.

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment E 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal)

ATTACHMENT E - STRUCTURAL STEEL WELDING - SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment E-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal)

STRUCTURAL STEEL WELDING - SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE
Verification and Inspection
Reference
Standard
Frequency of
Inspection(1)
(During Task Listed)
Continuous Periodic
Inspection Tasks Prior to Welding AISC 360

1. Welding procedure specifications (WPSs)
available. 

2. Manufacturer certifications for welding
consumables available. 

3. Material identification (type/grade). 

4. Welder identification system. 

5. Fit-up groove welds (including joint geometry):
• Joint preparation.
• Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face,
bevel).
• Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces).
• Tacking (tack weld quality and location).
• Backing type and fit (if applicable).


6. Configuration and finish of access holes. 

7. Fit-up of fillet welds:
• Dimensions (alignment, gaps at root).
• Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces).
• Tacking (tack weld quality and location).


8. Check welding equipment. 
Inspection Tasks During Welding AISC 360

9. Use of qualified welders. 

10. Control and handling of welding consumables:
• Packaging.
• Exposure control.


11. No welding over cracked tack welds. 

12. Environmental conditions:
• Wind speed within limits.
• Precipitation and temperature.


13. WPS followed:
• Settings on welding equipment.
• Travel speed.
• Selected welding materials.
• Shielding gas type/flow rate.
• Preheat applied.
• Interpass temperature maintained (min/max).
• Proper position (F, V, H, OH).

Regulatory Quality Assurance
01455-Attachment E-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01455 (DraftFinal) Verification and Inspection
Reference
Standard
Frequency of
Inspection(1)
(During Task Listed)
Continuous Periodic

14. Welding techniques:
• Interpass and final cleaning.
• Each pass within profile limitations.
• Each pass meets quality requirements.

Inspection Tasks After Welding AISC 360

15. Welds cleaned. 

16. Size, length, and location of welds. 

17. Welds meet visual acceptance criteria:
• Crack prohibition.
• Weld/base-metal fusion.
• Crater cross section.
• Weld profiles.
• Weld size.
• Undercut.
• Porosity.


18. Arc strikes. 

19. k-area. 

20. Backing removed and weld tabs removed
(if required). 

21. Repair activities. 

22. Document acceptance or rejection of welded joint
or member. 
Notes:
(1) “” represents a required inspection activity for the project where it occurs.

Temporary Facilities and Controls
01500-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01500 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01500

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Furnishing, maintaining, and removing construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary utilities, construction aids, barriers and enclosures, security, access roads, temporary controls, project sign, field offices and sheds, and removal after construction.

1.02 REFERENCE
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

1.04 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Temporary electrical power:

1. Arrange with local utility to provide adequate temporary electrical service.

2. Provide and maintain adequate jobsite power distribution facilities conforming to applicable Laws and Regulations.

3. Provide, maintain, and pay for electric power for performance of the Work.

B. Temporary electrical lighting:

1. In work areas, provide temporary lighting sufficient to maintain lighting levels during working hours not less than lighting levels required by OSHA and state agency which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.

2. When available, permanent lighting facilities may be used in lieu of temporary facilities:
a. Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, replace bulbs, lamps, or tubes used by Contractor for lighting.

C. Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating:

1. Heat and ventilate work areas to protect the Work from damage by freezing, high temperatures, weather, and to provide safe environment for workers.

2. Permanent heating system may be utilized when sufficiently completed to allow safe operation.

D. Temporary water:

1. Pay for and construct facilities necessary to furnish potable water for human consumption and non-potable water for use during construction.

Temporary Facilities and Controls
01500-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01500 (DraftFinal)

2. Remove temporary piping and connections and restore affected portions of the facility to original condition before Substantial Completion.

3. Pay for water used for construction prior to Substantial Completion.

E. Temporary sanitary facilities:

1. Provide suitable and adequate sanitary facilities that are in compliance with applicable Laws and Regulations.

2. Existing facility use is not allowed.

3. At completion of the Work, remove sanitary facilities and leave site in neat and sanitary condition.

F. Temporary fire protection:

1. Provide sufficient number of fire extinguishers of type and capacity required to protect the Work and ancillary facilities.

G. First aid: Post first aid facilities and information posters conforming to requirements of OSHA and other applicable Laws and Regulations in readily accessible locations.

H. Utilities in existing facilities: As specified in Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.

I. Temporary piping for interim recharge:

1. Submit layout drawings showing proposed routing of piping, including proposed pipe support and pipe restraint locations.

2. Submit product data for piping, fittings, appurtenances, restraints, supports, and other components of the temporary piping system.

3. Submit information at least 28 days prior to when each temporary piping system is scheduled to be installed and allow 14 days for review and comment.

1.05 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide railings, kick plates, enclosures, safety devices, and controls required by Laws and Regulations and as required for adequate protection of life and property.

B. Use construction hoists, elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary facilities of ample size and capacity to adequately support and move loads.

C. Design temporary supports with adequate safety factor to ensure adequate load bearing capability:

1. When requested, submit design calculations by professional registered engineer prior to application of loads.

2. Submitted design calculations are for information and record purposes only.

D. Accident prevention:

1. Exercise precautions throughout construction for protection of persons and property.

2. Observe safety provisions of applicable Laws and Regulations.

3. Guard machinery and equipment and eliminate other hazards.

Temporary Facilities and Controls
01500-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01500 (DraftFinal)

4. Make reports required by authorities having jurisdiction, and permit safety inspections of the Work.

5. Before commencing construction work, take necessary action to comply with provisions for safety and accident prevention.

E. Barricades:

1. Place barriers at ends of excavations and along excavations to warn pedestrian and vehicular traffic of excavations.

2. Provide barriers with flashing lights after dark.

3. Keep barriers in place until excavations are entirely backfilled and compacted.

4. Barricade excavations to prevent persons from entering excavated areas in streets, roadways, parking lots, treatment plants, or other public or private areas.

F. Warning devices and barricades: Adequately identify and guard hazardous areas and conditions by visual warning devices and, where necessary, physical barriers:

1. Provide devices in accordance with minimum requirements of OSHA and State agency which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.

G. Hazards in public right-of-way:

1. Comply with local jurisdiction standards and requirements for right-of-way barricades and other safety devices.

2. Mark at reasonable intervals, trenches, and other continuous excavations in public right-of-way, running parallel to general flow of traffic, with traffic cones, barricades, or other suitable visual markers during daylight hours:
a. During hours of darkness, provide markers with torches, flashers, or other adequate lights.

3. At intersections or for pits and similar excavations, where traffic may reasonably be expected to approach head on, protect excavations by continuous barricades:
a. During hours of darkness, provide warning lights at close intervals.

H. Hazards in protected areas: Mark or guard excavations in areas from which public is excluded, in manner appropriate for hazard.

I. Above grade protection: On multi-level structures, provide safety protection that meets requirements of OSHA and State agency which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.

J. Protect existing structures, trees, shrubs, and other items to be preserved on Project site from injury, damage, or destruction by vehicles, equipment, worker or other agents with substantial barricades or other devices commensurate with hazards.

K. Fences:

1. Enclose site of the Work with fence adequate to protect the Work against acts of theft, violence, and vandalism.

2. When entire or part of site is to be permanently fenced, permanent fence may be built to serve for both permanent and temporary protection of the work site, provided that damaged or defaced fencing is replaced prior to Substantial Completion.

Temporary Facilities and Controls
01500-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01500 (DraftFinal)

3. Protect temporary and permanent openings and close openings in existing fences to prevent intrusion by unauthorized persons.
a. Bear responsibility for protection of plant and material on site of the Work when openings in existing fences are not closed.

4. During night hours, weekends, holidays, and other times when no work is performed at site, provide temporary closures or enlist services of security guards to protect temporary openings.

5. Fence temporary openings when openings are no longer necessary.

1.06 SECURITY
A. Make adequate provision for protection of the work area against fire, theft, and vandalism, and for protection of public against exposure to injury.

1.07 ACCESS ROADS
A. General:

1. Build and maintain access roads to and on site of the Work to provide for delivery of material and for access to existing and operating plant facilities on site.

2. Build and maintain dust free roads which are suitable for travel at 20 miles per hour.

B. Off-site access roads:

1. Build and maintain graded earth roads.

2. Build roads only in public right-of-way or easements obtained by Owner.

3. Obtain rights-of-way or easements when electing to build along other alignment.

C. On-site access roads:

1. Maintain access roads to storage areas and other areas to which frequent access is required.

2. Maintain similar roads to existing facilities on site of the Work to provide access for maintenance and operation.

3. Protect buried vulnerable utilities under temporary roads with steel plates, wood planking, or bridges.

4. Maintain on-site access roads free of mud.

5. Provide controls to prevent vehicles leaving the site from tracking mud off the site onto the public right-of-way.

1.08 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Dust control:

1. Prevent dust nuisance caused by operations, unpaved roads, excavation, backfilling, demolition, or other activities.

2. Control dust by sprinkling with water, use of dust palliatives, modification of operations, or other means acceptable to agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Noise control:

1. Comply with noise and work hours regulations by local jurisdiction.

Temporary Facilities and Controls
01500-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01500 (DraftFinal)

2. In or near inhabited areas, particularly residential, perform operations in manner to minimize noise.

3. In residential areas, take special measures to suppress noise during night hours.

C. Mud control:

1. Prevent mud nuisance caused by construction operations, unpaved roads, excavation, backfilling, demolition, or other activities.

1.09 PROJECT SIGN
A. Provide and maintain Project identification sign at each well site consisting of painted 8-foot wide by 4-foot high exterior grade plywood and minimum 10-foot long, 4 by 4 lumber posts, set in ground at least 3 feet, with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter using no more than 5 sign colors:

1. List at least the title of the Project, and names of the Owner, Engineer, Construction Manager and Contractor.

2. Identify Contractor’s, Engineer’s, and Construction Manager’s names in upper right-hand corner underneath the bid number.

B. On third and fourth lines of printing, paint appropriate dollar amounts.

C. Erect Project identification sign where directed by Engineer within 14 days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed.

D. Replace or repair the project sign if it is damaged or covered with graffiti within 2 working days of observation or notification of damage or graffiti.

1.10 CONTRACTOR FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A. Maintain on Project Site weather tight space in which to keep copies of Contract Documents, progress schedule, shop drawings, and other relevant documents.

B. Provide field office with adequate space to examine documents and provide lighting and telephone service in that space.

1.11 REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary facilities and controls before inspection for Substantial Completion or when directed.

B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities.

C. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 24 inches and grade to match surrounding conditions.

D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition.

Temporary Facilities and Controls
01500-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01500 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Traffic Control
01550-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01550 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01550

TRAFFIC CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Traffic control requirements to keep streets and traffic ways open for the passage of vehicles and pedestrians during the construction period.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Approved and signed copies of:

1. Encroachment permit.

2. Right-of-way occupancy permit.

3. Traffic control plan (TCP).

4. Notification plan.

1.03 AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ)
A. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) as specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.

B. AHJ traffic control requirements supersede the requirements of this Section.

C. Comply with AHJ traffic control requirements.

1.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Contractor is responsible for costs associated with permits, plans, implementation, and maintenance as specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.

1.05 ENCROACHMENT PERMIT
A. Obtain Encroachment Permit approved by the AHJ.

1.06 RIGHTS-OF-WAY OCCUPANCY PERMIT
A. Obtain Rights-of-Way Occupancy Permit approved by the AHJ.

1.07 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN (TCP)
A. Approval of the TCP by the AHJ shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for traffic and safety requirements.

Traffic Control
01550-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01550 (DraftFinal) B. Include labor, material, equipment, tools, and services used in the regulation of construction traffic to and from the Project Site, as well as public vehicular and pedestrian traffic within the Project limits.

C. Provide a TCP for each phase or segment of the construction meeting the requirements of the AHJ and as specified in this Section.

1. Each TCP shall be considered separately.

D. Obtain TCP approved by the AHJ.

E. TCP constraints:

1. Access to local streets and residences shall be maintained at all times, except as noted.
a. Turn lanes are not considered as travel lanes.
b. Provide 1 travel lane that is 12 feet wide in each direction at all times. c. The table below describes the traffic control restrictions.

Traffic Control Lane Closure Special Requirements
Street Name Days/Hours Minimum Lanes to Remain Open
Pleasant Grove Blvd. All times two lanes in each direction shall remain open at all times (see note 1).

Painted Desert Dr. All times one lane shall remain open at all times (see note 1).

Notes:
(1) The roadway shall be open at all times.

F. Submit approved TCP to the Engineer within 48 hours of approval by the AHJ.

Changes to the TCP:

1. If, during the execution of the Work, the Contractor determines that the traffic control is not functioning as intended, submit revised TCP to the AHJ for approval.

2. Submit revised approved TCP to the Engineer within 48 hours of completing a change.

G. Provide for the protection of the traveling public, pedestrians, and workers within the area covered by the limits of construction, at all times when the area is affected by construction facilities or activities, including the following:

1. Public traffic access.

2. Business access.

3. Private property access.
a. Warn, control, protect, and expedite vehicular and pedestrian traffic through the private property.

4. Driveway access.

5. Pedestrian access.

6. Bus stop access.
a. Provide bus stop closure schedule (BSCS) attached to the TCP. b. BSCS shall identify specific durations and times of day for proposed bus stop closures.
c. Closures are not to exceed 2 consecutive bus stops at a time or 1,000 feet at a time.

Traffic Control
01550-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01550 (DraftFinal) d. During construction, coordinate with the AHJ regarding specific dates of bus stop closures.
1) Inform the Owner of coordination details.

7. Sanitation (trash) truck access.

8. Bike access.
a. Maintain safe bike facilities through the work zone and associated traffic control layouts.
b. Provide alternative bike facilities or designated detour routes when necessitated by temporary removal of existing bike lanes.

9. Emergency vehicle access.
a. Maintain access for emergency vehicles at all times.

10. School zones and safe routes to school.
a. When a designated safe route to school is encroached upon by a construction work zone or the AHJ identifies a need for students to be assisted in the safe crossing through the work zone, provide a qualified crossing guard approved by the AHJ.
1) Crossing guard shall be present for the full duration of time that children are likely to be present, as determined by the AHJ. 2) Contractor is responsible for fees associated with the use of crossing guards.

11. Protection from excavations.

12. Limit access to work sites.

1.08 NOTIFICATION PLAN
A. Submit Notification Plan to the Engineer for approval.

B. Define who will notify, how they will notify, and when they will notify.

1. Notify affected emergency agencies, residences, and businesses within the area of current work 15 days prior to start of operations.

2. Notify the AHJ for any traffic control or work areas affecting traffic signals, public bus routes, or bus stops at a minimum of 72 hours prior to any the work.

C. Notify the Engineer 15 days prior to start of construction.

D. Notify the AHJ a minimum of 2 working days prior to the anticipated beginning of construction.

1. Emergency services, such as police and fire.

2. Other services, such as bus service, mail, and garbage collection.

E. Residential areas:

1. Notify adjacent residents as applicable at least 4 days prior to restricting driveway access or starting any work, using “door knob type” notices approved by the Engineer.
a. Describe the impending work.
b. Identify dates and stages of work.

2. Give special consideration to multi-family residential complexes and other high-density uses.

Traffic Control
01550-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01550 (DraftFinal) F. Vehicular traffic: Define placement of the following:

1. Project signs.
a. Locate as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Text message boards.
a. Locate as indicated on the Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
01562-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01562 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01562

TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Tree and plant protection.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. A300 - For Tree Care Operations - Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant Maintenance Standard Practices (Pruning).

B. American Society of Consulting Arborists (ASCA).

C. International Society of Arboriculture (ISA).

D. City of Roseville Municipal Code.

1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for tree protection, including tree pruning or tree removal, shall be paid as a lump sum basis that shall include all items specified in this Section unless payment is specified otherwise in this Section.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. As specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Tree Permit Application per City of Roseville Municipal Code, Chapter 19.66, which includes but is not limited to:

1. Arborist’s Report.

2. Site Plan Map.

3. Utility Trenching Pathway Plan.

C. Certification of a Registered Consulting Arborist (designated ASCA or ISA) to review and approve temporary protection measures for trees indicated to remain.

D. Protection Zone Exhibit indicating intended location of tree protection fencing.

E. Tree maintenance plan: Arborist recommendations for care of trees, both during construction and after work is completed.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall acquire an approved Tree Permit from the City of Roseville for any regulated activity within the protected zone of a protected tree Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
01562-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01562 (DraftFinal) where the encroachment exceeds 20 percent of the protected zone, or as required by project construction. Refer to the Attachment A - City of Roseville Municipal Code, Chapter 19.66 for details and exemptions where a Tree Permit is not needed.

B. Preserve and protect existing trees and plants to remain from foliage, branch, trunk, or root damage that could result from construction operations.

C. Prevent damage including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Trunk damage from equipment operations, material storage, or from nailing or bolting.

2. Trunk and branch damage caused by ropes or guy wires.

3. Root or soil contamination from spilled solvents, gasoline, paint, lime slurry, and other noxious materials.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Arborist qualifications: Certified by ISA.

B. Pre-construction conference: To establish schedule and procedures for tree protection.

C. Pre-construction documentation: To establish pre-construction condition of existing tree to remain that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pruning paint: Black latex, water-based paint, free of all petroleum products.

B. Tree protection fencing: As indicated on the Drawings.

1. Provide continuous fencing between posts, pulled taut prior to securing to posts, and firmly attached to the posts with a minimum of 4 wire ties.

2. Orange, plastic mesh fencing:
a. Fencing minimum height: 4 feet.
b. “t” bar posts:
1) Minimum height: 5 feet.
2) Installed 7 feet on centers or as required to maintain vertical fence.

3. Chain-link fencing:
a. Galvanized-steel fencing fabricated from minimum 2-inch opening,

0.148-inch-diameter wire chain-link fabric.
b. Fencing minimum height: 60-inches high.
c. Pipe posts:
1) Minimum outside diameter (OD) line posts: 2-3/8-inch OD. 2) Minimum outside diameter (OD) corner and pull posts: 2-7/8-inch OD. 3) Top tension wire minimum diameter: 0.177-inch diameter. 4) Bottom tension wire minimum diameter: 0.177-inch-diameter. 5) Accessories: Tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system.

Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
01562-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01562 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Refer to Attachment A - City of Roseville Municipal Code, Chapter 19.66.

B. Site preparation work and/or construction work shall not begin in any area where tree preservation measures have not been completed and approved.

C. Tree protection zone: Install temporary fencing outside the edge of the protected zone or drip line of the tree to be protected from construction damage.

1. Install fencing with a radius of the largest diameter of the tree’s drip line plus one foot, unless otherwise indicated by Consulting Arborist.

2. Protect tree and shrub root systems from damage due to noxious materials caused by runoff or spillage while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials.

3. Protect root systems from flooding, eroding, or excessive wetting.

4. Do not store construction materials, equipment, debris, or other material within the drip line of remaining trees.

5. Do not permit vehicles or foot traffic within the drip line; prevent soil compaction over root systems.

6. Designate limited areas as concrete washout areas away from root zones.

D. Install tree protection fencing around each tree to be preserved as indicated in the tree treatment schedule and on the tree protection plan.

1. Each tree to be preserved shall be protected with a tree protection fence.

Install tree protection fencing prior to site work or construction activity.

2. Place signs on the fence around each individual protected tree as specified in Attachment A - City of Roseville Municipal Code, Chapter 19.66.

3. Immediately repair damage to tree fences occurring during the progress of the work at no additional cost to Owner.

4. Workers shall be clearly instructed to exercise caution in performance of work near trees being preserved.

E. Pruning of trees:

1. Prune trees in accordance with the ANSI A300 for tree pruning. a. City shall have the first right to conduct the pruning required by the Contractor for prosecution of the Work.
b. Otherwise, pruning shall be completed by professional arborists who have received training in proper pruning techniques.

2. Make cuts sufficiently close to the parent limb or trunk without cutting into the branch collar or leaving a protruding stub, so that closure can readily start under normal conditions.
a. All lateral cuts shall be made to a lateral that is least 1/3 the diameter of the parent limb.
b. Clean cuts shall be made at all times.

Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
01562-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01562 (DraftFinal)

3. Prune trees in a manner that will not destroy or alter the natural shape and character of the tree.
a. Apply black latex paint to fresh wounds on Oak (Quercus) species immediately after each cut is made.

4. Crown cleaning prune designated trees shall include selective removal of dead, diseased, and/or broken limbs.

3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Attachment A - City of Roseville Municipal Code, Chapter 19.66.

B. Do not excavate within drip line of protected trees.

C. Within drip line of trees, hand clear to minimize damage to root systems.

3.03 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. Refer to Attachment A - City of Roseville Municipal Code, Chapter 19.66.

B. Promptly treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to written instructions of Consulting Arborist.

3.04 DISPOSAL OF FENCING MATERIALS
A. Promptly remove protective fencing upon completion of construction activities.

END OF SECTION
Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
01562-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01562 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - CITY OF ROSEVILLE MUNICIPAL CODE, CHAPTER 19.66

CHAPTER 19.66

TREE PRESERVATION
§ 19.66.010. Purpose.
(Ord. 5428 § 1, 2014)
§ 19.66.020. Definitions.

Administrative tree permit. A Tree Permit issued by the Manager that is not associated with a separate discretionary entitlement.

Arborist. An individual certified as an arborist by the International Society of Arboriculture (ISA).

Arborist, city. An arborist employed by or chosen and retained by the City to review, evaluate and prepare reports and requests to remove and/or relocate protected trees. In performing the duties and responsibilities, the City arborist may conduct field inspections independently or in the company of City employees and/or other arborists.

Arborist report. A report prepared by an arborist containing specific information on the location, condition, potential impacts of development, recommended actions and mitigation measures regarding one or more trees on an individual lot or project site.

Certification letter. A concluding statement by an arborist stating that work that was performed was observed by an arborist and complies with the conditions of the discretionary project, the arborist report, the Tree Permit and this Zoning Ordinance.

Cutting. The detaching or separating of any limb, branch or root from a tree.

Dead tree. A tree that does not contain any live tissue (i.e., green leaves or live limbs).

Deadwood. Limbs or branches that contain no green leaves or live limbs.

Deadwooding. The act of removing deadwood. (Not a regulated activity when performed by or under the direct supervision of a certified arborist.)
Developer. Any person conducting any regulated activity within the protected zone of a protected tree.

Diameter at breast height (DBH). The diameter of a tree measured at four and one-half feet above ground level on the high side of the tree. The diameter may be calculated by use of the following formula: DBH = circumference at breast height/3.142.

Dripline. The outermost edge of a tree’s canopy prior to any cutting. When depicted on a map, the A. Roseville’s native vegetation consists of valley grasslands with scattered native oaks and oak and riparian woodlands. Trees in the City enhance the natural scenic beauty, sustain longterm potential increase in property values, maintain original ecology, provide tempering of extreme temperatures, reduce soil erosion and increase the oxygen output of the area needed to combat air pollution.

B. For these reasons, the Council finds that, in order to promote the public health, safety and general welfare of the City of Roseville while at the same time recognizing individual rights to develop private property, it is necessary to enact regulations controlling the removal of and preservation of trees within the City and to reforest our urban environment.

City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.010 § 19.66.020
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19 dripline will appear as an irregular shaped circle that follows the contour of the tree’s branches as seen from overhead.

Encroachment. Any regulated activity conducted within the protected zone of a protected tree.

Grading. Any removal or deposit of soil or earth material.

Irrigation. Transfer of water to a site by artificial means.

Native oak tree. Any tree of the genus Quercus and species lobata (valley oak), douglasii (blue oak), wislizenii (interior live oak) or hybrids thereof.

Native ground surface fabric. The layer of topsoil, humus, and vegetation that comprises the native ground surface.

Preconstruction phase. The time between the approval of a discretionary project and the site planning meeting.

Protected Public tree. Any protected tree with one-half or more of its trunk or canopy on or above public land.

Protected tree. Native oak tree equal to or greater than six inches diameter at breast height (DBH) measured as a total of a single trunk or multiple trunks.

Protected zone. A circle equal to the largest radius of a protected tree’s dripline plus one foot. The radius is measured from the trunk at the base of the tree to the greatest extent of the tree’s dripline.

Regulated activities. Any activity done within the protected zone of a native oak tree, (with the exception of routine maintenance performed by or under the direct supervision of a certified arborist) which would adversely impact the health of a native oak tree, including, but not limited to, cutting, grading, irrigating and trenching.

Removal. The physical removal of a tree or substantially all of a tree.

Routine maintenance. Actions taken for the continued health of a protected tree including, but not limited to, deadwooding, mowing grass close to a tree, and application of insecticides in conformance with standards established by the International Society of Arboriculture or the National Association of Arborists.

Site planning meeting. An on-site meeting with the developer and the developer’s contractors, superintendent, and engineers; utility providers; the arborist; and City representatives to delineate City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.020 § 19.66.020
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19 special procedures, limits of work, lines of authority and special conditions or procedures not specifically covered by this chapter.

Tree permit. An authorization to conduct specific work or regulated activities within the protected zone of a protected tree.

Utility trenching pathway plan. A plan approved by the Planning Manager setting forth the location of utility trenches in the vicinity of protected trees. (Ord. 5428 § 1, 2014)
§ 19.66.030. Tree Permits.

A. Permit Required. No person shall conduct any regulated activities within the protected zone of any protected tree; or harm, destroy, kill or remove any protected tree unless authorized by a Tree Permit or as provided in subsection C.

B. Type of Permit.

1. Administrative Tree Permit. An Administrative Tree Permit is required for any regulated activity affecting one or more protected trees, when the regulated activity is not associated with a discretionary project, does not include the removal of a protected tree, and the requested encroachment does not exceed 20 percent of the protected zone of any individual protected tree.

2. Tree Permit. A Tree Permit is required for any regulated activity within the protected zone of a protected tree where the encroachment exceeds 20 percent of the protected zone, or where the regulated activity is related to a discretionary project. In addition, a Tree Permit is required for the removal of any protected tree, unless otherwise exempted by this chapter.

C. Exemptions. A Tree Permit is not required for the removal of a protected tree under the following circumstances:

1. Trees damaged by thunderstorm, windstorm, flood, earthquake, fire or other natural cause and determined by a peace officer, fire fighter, public utility official, civil defense official or City code enforcement officer, acting in his or her official capacity, to present a danger to persons or property. Upon discovery of a condition justifying removal, the officer or official making the determination shall immediately provide written notification of the condition and action taken to the Planning Manager.

2. When removal is determined to be necessary by fire department personnel actively engaged in fighting a fire.

3. When compliance would interfere with activities of a public utility necessary to comply with applicable safety regulations and/or necessary to repair or avoid the interruptions of services provided by such a utility. Unless there is an imminent threat to the public health, safety or welfare, the Planning Manager shall be notified prior to the removal by a public utility of a protected tree.

4. The Planning Manager may allow removal of a protected tree which has been certified by an arborist to be a dead tree. An arborist-certified dead tree may be removed without City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.020 § 19.66.030
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19 (Ord. 5428 § 1, 2014)
§ 19.66.040. Tree Permit application processing.
any replacement or mitigation requirements.

5. A protected tree located on property developed with a single-family or two-family dwelling which has been granted occupancy.

6. When a protected living tree presents a hazard to health and safety or structures due to its structural condition and location, the tree may be removed without any replacement or mitigation requirements. The hazardous condition of the tree must be determined by an arborist. The Planning Manager must review the arborist’s determination and consider the location of the protected tree prior to approving removal.

A. Application Filing. Applications for Tree Permits not associated with discretionary projects shall be filed with the Planning Division. Applications for Tree Permits for regulated activities associated with a discretionary project shall be included as part of the land use permit and/or subdivision application for the discretionary project. All Tree Permit applications shall use the forms provided by the Planning Division, and shall include an arborist’s report as specified by Section 19.66.050, and a site plan with information as deemed necessary by the Planning Manager. The application shall also be accompanied by any application fee required by the City Council.

B. Site Plan Map. The requirement for a site plan map may be waived by the Planning Manager if the permit is for removal of dead trees or hazardous trees. A site plan map shall include the following information:

1. Physical Characteristics. The site plan map shall accurately portray the following existing and proposed features:
a. Property lines.
b. Streets, access easements and/or public or private driveways and other paved areas. c. Existing and proposed buildings or structures, including eaves and other architectural features.
d. Setbacks of all buildings and structures from property lines. e. Parking and other paved areas.
f. Land uses on parcel (existing and proposed as applicable). g. Proposed grading and construction - including utilities, if available. h. Existing and proposed grades.
i. Location of chimney(s).

2. Tree Locations. All protected trees located on the property must be depicted on the site plan map. Additionally, the site plan map shall indicate the exact location of the base and dripline for all protected trees within the project areas. A survey of the exact City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.030 § 19.66.040
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19 location(s) of the protected tree(s) trunks both horizontally and vertically shall be conducted by a professional engineer or a licensed land surveyor. The tree number(s) shall be shown on both the site plan and grading plan. The base elevation of each protected tree shall be shown on the grading plan.

3. Protected Zone of Protected Tree(s). The exact location of the protected zone of a protected tree is crucial in order to evaluate any impacts resulting from construction.

Consequently, rough approximations will not be acceptable. In certain cases, it may be possible to physically stake the surveyed corner of building(s) or related improvements in the field in order to assess the potential impacts upon the trees.

C. Application Evaluation Criteria. The following criteria shall be used to support the finding identified in Section 19.78.060(F) for action on a Tree Permit requested to allow removal of native oak tree(s) or to encroach within the protected zone of any native oak tree(s):

1. General.
a. The proposed building’s gross floor area in relation to the “usable” size of the site and the amount of usable space on the parcel which does not require the removal of protected trees;
b. Design features in comparison with other existing or approved building developments in the same vicinity and zone which have or had protected trees on the parcel;
c. Factors that are unique to the proposed property such as topographic constraints, lot configuration and other physical limitations;
d. The overall health and structural condition of the potentially impacted protected trees;
e. The approximate age of the protected tree compared with the average life span for that species;
f. The number of healthy protected trees that a given parcel of land will support, with and without the proposed development;
g. The effect of removal on soil stability/erosion, particularly near water courses or on steep slopes;
h. Whether or not there are any alternatives that would allow for the preservation of the protected tree; and
i. Any other information the approving body finds pertinent to the decision, including, if necessary, information obtained at a public hearing.

2. For Removal.
a. Age of the protected tree with regard to whether or not removal of the protected tree would encourage healthier, more vigorous growth of younger similar trees in the area;
City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.040 § 19.66.040
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19 (Ord. 5428 § 1, 2014)
§ 19.66.050. Arborist’s report.

The arborist’s report required by Section 19.66.040 shall be prepared in accordance with this section.
b. The number of existing protected trees in the area and the effect of removal upon public health, safety and general welfare of the area;
c. The potential for the protected tree to be a public nuisance or interfere with utility service, as well as its proximity to existing structures; and d. Present and future shade potential with regard to solar heating and cooling.

3. For Encroachment. Whether or not the degree of encroachment is likely to result in the subsequent decline of the affected protected tree or create a future risk to public safety or pose a hazard to adjacent structures.

D. Discretionary Project. Any non-ministerial development project that must be approved by either the City Council, Planning Commission, or the Design Committee. Discretionary projects include, but are not limited to, Conditional Use Permits, parcel maps, rezones, Design Review Permits, subdivision maps, or variances.

E. Limitation on Approved Activities. Tree Permits shall not be issued for temporary parking or storing of vehicles, trailers, equipment, construction materials or temporary structures within the protected zone of a protected tree.

F. Permit Time Limits. An approved Tree Permit shall be valid for a period of six months from the date of issuance. An extension of time may be granted for a period not to exceed an additional six months. Tree Permits associated with discretionary projects shall be valid only as long as the approval for the discretionary project is valid.

G. Subsequent Permits. After all Tree Permit conditions have been complied with and occupancy has been granted or a notice of completion filed for a project involving a Tree Permit, the Tree Permit conditions shall be deemed satisfied. Any future work around the trees is subject to a new Tree Permit and pursuant to the criteria of Section 19.66.030.

A. Minimum Information. The arborist’s report shall include the following information:

1. Identification of each protected tree by number;

2. Botanical name of tree(s) by tree number;

3. Common name of tree(s) by tree number;

4. Location of tree(s) by tree number;

5. Diameter at breast height (DBH) by tree number;

6. Height by tree number (optional);

7. Dripline radius by tree number (measure longest radius); City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.040 § 19.66.050
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19

8. Condition by tree number; and

9. Recommendations for each protected tree by number.

B. Determination of a Tree’s Condition. The information on tree condition in the report shall be developed as follows:

1. Rating System. The condition of each tree is to be considered when determining a tree’s rating according to the following categories: excellent (it is rare that a tree qualifies in this category); good; fair to good; fair; fair to poor; or poor.

2. Factors to Be Considered. At least the following factors shall be considered in light of a tree’s life expectancy under existing and planned conditions when determining a tree’s rating:
a. The condition and environment of the tree’s root crown (also roots, if applicable). b. The condition of the trunk, including decay, injury callusing or presence of fungus sporophores.
c. The condition of the limbs, including strength of crotches, amount of deadwood, hollow areas, and whether there is excessive weight borne by the limbs. d. The condition and growth rate history of the twigs, including pest damage and diseases.
e. Leaf appearance, including abnormal size and density as well as pest and disease damage.
f. The dripline environment, including evidence of grade changes and presence of water courses or ponding.

3. Formulation of Tree Condition. Using an averaging of the above factors together with the arborist’s best judgment, the tree shall then be described using the above rating categories. It is important to rate the tree’s structural condition separately from the tree’s vigor condition if they are different. Root crown, trunk and limb ratings relate most to structure, while twigs and foliage, including growth rate, relate most to vigor. The structure of the root crown-trunk area is of primary importance and takes precedence over any other factor. This information should not be considered to be a formula but simply a guideline to help describe a tree’s condition.

C. Arborist’s Recommendations. The arborist’s recommendations shall be developed in compliance with the following:

1. Recommendations by Tree Number. Based upon the conditions and findings, recommendations should be made that logically follow the report conditions. For instance, if weak crotches are reported, cabling may be a logical recommendation to include in the report. These recommended mitigation measures should be spelled out and in some cases may even improve the tree’s condition ratings.

2. General Recommendations. Specific and general preservation measures to be taken City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.050 § 19.66.050
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19 (Ord. 5428 § 1, 2014)
§ 19.66.060. Standard policies and procedures for approved work.

Great care must be exercised when work is conducted upon or around protected trees. The purpose of this section is to define procedures necessary to protect the health of the affected protected trees. The policies and procedures described in this section apply to all encroachments into the protected zone of protected trees. All Tree Permits shall be deemed to incorporate the provisions of this chapter except as the Tree Permit may otherwise specifically provide. for each tree not being removed. The specific recommendations must consider the impacts from the activities proposed.

A. Trenching Procedure. Trenching within the protected zone of a protected tree, when permitted, may only be conducted with hand tools or as otherwise directed by an arborist, in order to avoid root injury.

B. Cutting Roots.

1. Minor roots less than one inch in diameter may be cut, but damaged roots shall be traced back and cleanly cut behind any split, cracked or damaged area.

2. Major roots over one inch in diameter may not be cut without approval of an arborist.

Depending upon the type of improvement being proposed, bridging techniques or a new site design may need to be employed to protect the root and the tree.

C. Ground Surface Fabric. If any native ground surface fabric within the protected zone must be removed for any reason, it shall be replaced within 48 hours.

D. Irrigation Systems. An independent low-flow drip irrigation system may be used for establishing drought-tolerant plants within the protected zone of a protected tree. Irrigation shall be gradually reduced and discontinued after a two-year period.

E. Plant Materials Under Oaks. Planting live material under native oak trees is generally discouraged, and it will not be permitted within six feet of the trunk of a native oak tree with a diameter at breast height (DBH) of 18 inches or less, or within 10 feet of the trunk of a native oak tree with a DBH of more than 18 inches. Only drought tolerant plants will be permitted within the protected zone of native oak trees.

F. Protective Fencing.

1. Type of Fencing. A minimum five-foot high chain link or substitute fence approved by the Manager shall be installed at the outermost edge of the protected zone of each protected tree or groups of protected trees. Exceptions to this policy may occur in cases where protected trees are located on slopes that will not be graded. However, approval must be obtained from the Planning Division to omit fences in any area of the project.

2. Fence Installation. The fences shall be installed in accordance with the approved fencing plan prior to the commencement of any grading operations or such other time as determined by the review body. The developer shall call the Planning Division for an inspection of the fencing prior to grading operations.

City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.050 § 19.66.060
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19

3. Signing. Signs shall be installed on the fence in four equidistant locations around each individual protected tree. The size of each sign must be a minimum of two feet by two feet and must contain the following language:
“WARNING, THIS FENCE SHALL NOT BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED

WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ROSEVILLE PLANNING DIVISION.”
Signs placed on fencing around a grove of protected trees shall be placed at approximately 50-foot intervals.

4. Fence Maintenance. Once approval has been obtained, the fences shall remain in place throughout the entire construction period and shall not be removed, relocated, taken down, or otherwise modified in whole or in part without prior written authorization from the Planning Division.

G. Performance Guarantee. A minimum $10,000.00 deposit (or greater, if deemed necessary by the Approving Authority) shall be posted and maintained to insure the preservation of protected trees during construction. The deposit shall be posted in a form approved by the City Attorney prior to any grading, delivery of materials, or movement of heavy equipment onto the site, or issuance of any permits. Each violation of any Tree Permit condition regarding tree preservation shall result in forfeiture of a portion or the entirety of the deposit, at the discretion of the Approving Authority, provided that such determinations may be appealed as provided by Chapter 19.80.

H. Retaining Walls and Root Protection. Where a Tree Permit has been approved for construction of a retaining wall(s) within the protected zone of a protected tree, the developer will be required to provide for immediate protection of exposed roots from moisture loss during the time prior to completion of the wall. The retaining wall shall be constructed within 72 hours after completion of grading.

I. Preservation Devices. If required, preservation devices such as aeration systems, oak tree wells, drains, special foundation systems, special paving and cabling systems must be installed per approved plans and certified by the project arborist.

J. Grading.

1. Every effort should be made to avoid cut and/or fill slopes within or in the vicinity of the protected zone of any protected tree.

2. No grade changes are permitted which would cause water to drain to the area within twice the longest radius of the protected zone of any protected tree.

3. No grade changes are permitted which would result in the ground being lowered on all sides of the tree.

K. Chimney Locations. A chimney for wood burning fireplaces or stoves shall not be located within the canopy of the tree or in such a location that sparks emitted from the chimney may damage a tree.

L. Certification Letters. Certification letters are required for all regulated activities within the City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.060 § 19.66.060
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19 protected zone of protected trees, attesting that all work was conducted in accordance with the appropriate permits and the requirements of this chapter. The project arborist will be required to submit a certification letter to the Planning Division within five working days of completing any regulated activity.

M. On-Site Information. The following information must be continuously maintained on-site while any construction activity is ongoing for a project requiring a Tree Permit:

1. Arborist’s report and all modifications;

2. Tree location map with a copy of the tree fencing plan;

3. Tree Permit conditions of approval and compliance verification and inspection checklist;

4. Approved, stamped construction plans;

5. Tree preservation guidelines; and

6. Approved planting and irrigation drawings.

N. Information on Standard Policies and Procedures. The developer shall be responsible for informing all contractors, subcontractors and persons who will be performing work around protected trees, of the standard policies and procedures for working around trees and conditions of approval for the project’s Tree Permit. The developer shall provide all such information in writing.

O. Utility Trenching Pathway Plan. As a condition of the Tree Permit, the developer will be required to submit a utility trenching pathway plan for approval concurrent with approval of the project improvement or civil plans.

1. Contents. The trenching pathway plan shall depict all of the following systems: storm drains, sewers, easements, water mains, area drains, and underground utilities. The trenching pathway plan must show all lateral lines serving buildings. To be completely effective, the trenching pathway plan must include the surveyed locations of all protected trees on the project as well as an accurate plotting of the protected zone of each protected tree.

2. Standards for Plan. The trenching pathway plan should be developed considering the following general guidelines:
a. The trenching pathway plan must be developed to avoid encroaching into the protected zone of any protected tree.
b. Where it is impossible to avoid encroachment, the design must minimize the extent of such encroachment. Encroachments and mitigation measures must be addressed in a supplemental arborist’s report.

P. Final Certification of Tree Work. All of the tree preservation measures required by the conditions of the discretionary project approval, the arborist’s report and the Tree Permit, as applicable shall be completed and certified by the project arborist prior to issuance of an City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.060 § 19.66.060
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19 (Ord. 5428 § 1, 2014)
§ 19.66.070. Oak tree planting and replacement program.

The Approving Authority may condition any Tree Permit involving removal of a protected tree upon the replacement of trees in kind. The replacement requirement shall be calculated based upon an inch for an inch replacement of the DBH of the removed tree(s) where a 15-gallon tree will replace one inch DBH of the removed tree; a 24-inch box tree will replace two inches, and a 36-inch box tree will replace three inches. The replacement trees shall have a combined diameter equivalent not less than the total diameter of the tree(s) removed. A minimum of 50 percent of the replacement requirement shall be met by native oaks. Up to 50 percent may be met by nonnative species. The Approving Authority may approve a replacement program using one of the following four methods or any combination of the four methods. The preferred alternative is onsite replacement. occupancy permit.

A. Replacement Trees. Replacement trees may be planted on-site or in other areas where maintenance and irrigation are provided to ensure survival of the trees.

B. Relocation of Trees. In certain cases, the City may consider the relocation of native oak trees from one area in a project to another. Credit shall be given for relocation on the same basis as replacement. The guidelines and limitations for relocation are as follows:

1. The tree(s) being recommended for relocation must be approved by the Approving Authority whose decision will be based upon factors relating to health, type, size, time of year and proposed location.

2. The relocation of a tree shall be conditioned to require a secured five-year replacement agreement for the tree with security provided by the developer in a form satisfactory to the City Attorney. If at the end of five years the tree is deemed by an arborist to be in a substantially similar condition to that prior to the transplanting, the agreement will be terminated. If the tree dies during the five-year period, it shall be replaced as required by this section.

C. Revegetation Requirements. The Approving Authority may, instead of requiring replacement trees, require implementation of a revegetation plan. The developer shall enter into a written agreement with the City obligating the developer to comply with the requirements of the revegetation plan. A performance security or bond for 150 percent of the cost of the revegetation plan shall be required to insure that the agreement is fulfilled. The Approving Authority shall approve the proposed plan. The revegetation program shall propagate native oak trees from seed using currently accepted methods. A revegetation program shall identify the seed source of the trees to be propagated, the location of the plots, the methods to be used to ensure success of the revegetation program, an annual reporting requirement, and the criteria to be used to measure the success of the plan. A revegetation program shall not be considered complete until the trees to be propagated have reached onehalf inch in diameter or the revegetation plan demonstrates the need for alternative success criteria and achieves mitigation on an inch for inch basis as approved by the Planning Commission.

City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.060 § 19.66.070
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19 (Ord. 5428 § 1, 2014)
§ 19.66.080. Violations and enforcement.

D. In-Lieu Mitigation Fee. The Approving Authority may determine that the remedies described above are not feasible or desirable and may require instead payment of a cash contribution based upon the cost of purchasing, planting, irrigating and maintaining the required number of 15-gallon trees. The cost of purchasing, planting, irrigating and maintaining a 15-gallon oak tree shall be set by City Council resolution. The cash contribution shall be deposited into one or both of the following funds as determined by the Planning Manager:

1. Native Oak Tree Propagation Fund. This fund shall be used to propagate, purchase, plant, protect and maintain native oak trees. Uses of the fund include, but are not limited to, purchasing property to plant or protect native oak trees, propagating native oak trees from seed or container stock and maintaining existing and replacement native oak trees.

2. Non-Native Tree Fund. This fund shall be used to purchase, plant, irrigate and maintain non-native trees within Roseville. Uses of the fund include, but are not limited to, purchasing and propagating non-native trees from seed or container stock and maintaining existing and replacement non-native trees.

A. Penalty. Violation of this chapter shall be punishable as a misdemeanor or an infraction in the discretion of the City Attorney.

B. Administrative Remedies.

1. Administrative Enforcement.
a. In addition to any other penalties allowed by this Code, the Manager may issue a citation or citations upon finding that a violation of this Code and/or a violation of the conditions of approval of a permit issued pursuant to this Code has occurred.

The citation shall be issued in accordance with Chapter 2.50 (Administrative Citations) of the Roseville Municipal Code.
b. If, upon review of a report prepared by a certified arborist and/or the City arborist, the Manager determines that damage to a native oak tree or trees has resulted due to violation of this Code, the Manager shall forward the matter to the Planning Commission for determination of the appropriate remedial action and/or restitution.
c. Whenever any construction work or other regulated activity is being performed contrary to and/or in violation of the provisions of this chapter or the conditions of a Tree Permit, the Manager may issue a written notice to the responsible party to stop work on the project on which the violation has occurred or upon the property where the native oak trees are located. The notice shall state the nature of the violation and the risk to the trees. No work shall be allowed to continue and no subsequent permits shall be issued until the violation has been rectified.

2. Planning Commission Enforcement—Remediation and Restitution.

City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.070 § 19.66.080
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19 (Ord. 5428 § 1, 2014)
a. In addition to any other penalties allowed by this Code, in cases where a native oak tree or multiple native oak trees are damaged, killed, removed or damaged to the point where their long term survival cannot be assured, due to violation of this Code, the Planning Commission may require remediation and/or restitution. Any person or entity who commits, allows, causes, maintains or assists in any violation of any provision of this chapter or who damages, kills, or removes any tree in violation of this chapter, or assists another in doing so, may be required to provide remediation and/or restitution to the City.
b. The remediation amount for a damaged tree or trees shall be as determined by the Planning Commission and shall be the amount recommended by a certified arborist and/or the City arborist upon inspection of the tree(s) and development of a detailed course of remediation designed to repair the damage and ensure the long term survival of the tree(s), in order to assure the recovery of the tree(s). c. The restitution amount for a removed, killed or damaged tree or trees, where the damage is to the extent that the tree’s long term survival cannot be assured, shall be as determined by the Planning Commission and shall be calculated at triple the rate stated in Section 19.66.070(D).

3. A remediation or restitution requirement may be appealed to the City Council as provided in Chapter 19.80.

4. In addition to any other penalties allowed by this title, the Planning Commission may recommend revocation of a permit per the provisions of Chapter 19.88.

City of Roseville, CA
§ 19.66.080 § 19.66.080
Downloaded from https://ecode360.com/RO4998 on 2024-08-19

Erosion and Sediment Control
01573-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01573 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01573

EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Installation of erosion and sediment control filter fabric fences.

2. Triangular filter fabric fences.

3. Straw bale fences and brush berms used during construction and prior to final development of site.

B. Purpose of control fences is to contain pollutants from overland flow.

1. Control fences are not for use in channelized flow areas.

1.02 UNIT PRICES
A. Measure and pay for filter fabric fence by linear foot of completed and accepted filter fabric fence installed around construction site. Limits of construction site are indicated on the Drawings.

B. Measure and pay for triangular filter fabric fence by linear feet of completed and accepted triangular filter fabric fence between limits of beginning and ending of wooden stakes.

C. Measure and pay for straw bale barrier by linear feet of completed and accepted straw bale barrier.

D. Measure and pay for brush berm by linear feet of completed and accepted brush berm.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s catalog sheets and other product data on geotextile fabric.

1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3
).

2. D4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles from Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon-Arc Type Apparatus.

3. D4491- Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity.

4. D4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles.

5. D4833 - Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes, and Related Products.

Erosion and Sediment Control
01573-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01573 (DraftFinal)

6. D5665- Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Fabrics Used in Cold-Applied Roofing and Waterproofing.

7. D6459 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Rolled Erosion Control Product (RECP) Performance in Protecting Hillslopes from Rainfall-Induced Erosion.

8. D6475 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of Erosion Control Blankets.

9. D6525 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Nominal Thickness of Rolled Erosion Control Products.

10. D6567 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Light Penetration of a Rolled Erosion Control Product (RECP).

11. D6818 - Standard Test Method for Ultimate Tensile Properties of Rolled Erosion Control Products.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS
A. Product shall be manufactured in accordance to a documented Quality Control Program. At a minimum, the following procedures and documentation shall be provided:

1. Manufacturing Quality Control Program Manual.

2. First piece inspection of products produced to assure component materials and finished product tolerances are within manufacturer specifications.

3. Additional inspections for product conformance shall be conducted during the run after the first piece inspection.

4. Every roll shall be visually inspected.

5. Moisture content of straw and coconut fibers measured upon receipt.

6. At a minimum, every third roll shall be weighed to ensure conformance of manufacturer’s specifications.

7. Each individual erosion control blanket shall be inspected prior to packaging for conformance to manufacturing specifications.

1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS A. Erosion control blanket shall provide a temporary, biodegradable cover material to reduce slope and enhance vegetation. Erosion control blanket performance capabilities shall be in accordance with ASTM D6459, “Determination of Erosion Control Blanket (ECB) Performance in Protecting Hillslopes from Rainfall-Induced Erosion.”
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FILTER FABRIC
A. Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material.

B. Geotextile fabric:

1. Grab strength of 100 pounds per square inch in any principal direction in accordance with ASTM D4632.

Erosion and Sediment Control
01573-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01573 (DraftFinal)

2. Puncture strength exceeding 115 pounds per square inch in accordance with ASTM D4833.

3. Equivalent opening size between 50 and 140 for soils with more than 15 percent by weight passing No. 200 sieve and between 20 and 50 for soil with less than 15 percent by weight passing No. 200 sieve.

4. Maximum water flow rate of 40 gallons per minute per square feet in accordance with ASTM D4491.

C. Filter fabric material shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide expected usable life comparable to anticipated construction period.

1. Ultraviolet stability shall exceed 70 percent after 500 hours of exposure in accordance with ASTM D4355.

D. Manufacturers: The following or equal:

1. Mirafi, Inc.

2.02 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal:

1. American Excelsior Co., AEC Premier Straw/Coconut™ Blankets.

2. Proper Geotextile Systems.

B. Product requirements:

1. Furnished in rolls and wrapped with suitable material to protect against moisture intrusion and extended ultraviolet exposure prior to placement.

2. Consistent thickness with fibers distributed evenly over the entire area of the blanket.

3. Free of defects and voids that would interfere with proper installation or impair performance.

C. Materials:

1. Blend of 70 percent straw and 30 percent coconut fibers. a. Straw fibers shall consist of straw with 75 percent of fibers greater than 4 inches in length, and certified weed seed free.
b. Product shall be 100 percent biodegradable.
c. Blended fibers shall be evenly distributed throughout the entire area of the blanket.
d. Top and bottom of each blanket is covered with biodegradable jute netting.

2. Blanket performance requirements:
a. C factor: 0.15.
b. Shear stress: 2.0 lb/ft2
.
c. Velocity: 8.5 feet per second.
d. Functional longevity: Less than 24 months.

3. Material characteristics:
a. Width: 8.0 feet.
b. Length: 112.5 feet.
c. Area: 100.0 yard2
.
d. Weight: 50.0 pounds.
e. Mass per unit area: 0.50 lv/yd2
.
f. Net openings: 0.5 inch by 1.0 inch.
g. Minimum index values:

Erosion and Sediment Control
01573-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01573 (DraftFinal) Index Property Test Method Value
Thickness ASTM D6525 0.331 in (8.41 mm)
Light Penetration ASTM D6567 5.8 percent
Mass per Unit Area ASTM D6475 0.81 lb/yd2 (437 g/m2)
MD-Tensile Strength Max. ASTM D6818 321.6 lb/ft (4.69 kN/m) TD-Tensile Strength Max. ASTM D6818 159.6 lb/ft (2.33 kN/m) MD-Elongation ASTM D6818 4.1 percent
TD-Elongation ASTM D6818 4.8 percent
Water Absorption ASTM D5665 382 percent
D. Staples:

1. 100 percent biodegradable with a U-shaped top.

2. Minimum 4 inch biodegradable staple for cohesive soils and 6 inches for non-cohesive soils.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Provide erosion and sediment control systems at locations as indicated on the Drawings.

1. Construct in accordance with requirements as indicated on the Drawings and of type indicated as specified in this Section.

B. No clearing, grubbing or rough cutting permitted until erosion and sediment control systems are in place, other than site work specifically directed by Project Manager to allow soil testing and surveying.

C. Maintain existing erosion and sediment control systems located within Project site until acceptance of Project or until directed by Project Manager to remove and discard existing system.

D. Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of erosion and sediment control systems as specified in this Section.

1. Unless otherwise directed, maintain erosion and sediment control systems until Project area stabilization is accepted by the Authority.

2. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by Project Manager.

3. Discard removed materials off site.

E. Remove and dispose sediment deposits at designated spoil site for Project.

1. If a Project spoil site is not indicated on the Drawings, dispose of sediment off site at location not in or adjacent to stream or floodplain.

2. Assume responsibility for off-site disposal.

3. Spread sediment evenly throughout site, compacted and stabilized.

Erosion and Sediment Control
01573-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01573 (DraftFinal)

4. Prevent sediment from flushing into a stream or drainage way.

5. If sediment has been contaminated, dispose of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local rules and regulations.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, compact embankments, excavations, and trenches by mechanically blading, tamping, and rolling soil in maximum of 8-inch layers.

1. Compaction density shall be at a minimum of 90 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D698 density.

2. Make at least 1 test per 500 cubic yards of embankment.

G. Prohibit equipment and vehicles from maneuvering on areas outside of dedicated rights-of-way and easements for construction.

1. Immediately repair damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control.

H. Conduct construction operations under this Contract in conformance with erosion control practices described in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.

3.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. Provide erosion and sedimentation control systems as indicated on the Drawings.

1. Install erosion and sedimentation control systems in manner that surface runoff shall percolate through system in sheet flow fashion and allow retention and accumulation of sediment.

B. Inspect erosion and sedimentation control systems after each rainfall, daily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at minimum once each week.

1. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately.

2. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches depth 1/3 height of fence or 6 inches, whichever is less.

3.03 SITE PREPARATION FOR EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS
A. Before placing erosion control blanket, certify that the subgrade has been properly compacted, graded smooth, has no depressions, voids, soft or uncompacted areas, is free from obstructions such as tree roots, protruding stones or other foreign matter, and is seeded and fertilized according to Project specifications.

1. Contractor shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been remedied.

2. By beginning construction, Contractor signifies that the proceeding work is in conformance with this Section.

B. Fine grade the subgrade by hand dressing where necessary to remove local deviations.

C. No vehicular traffic shall be permitted directly on the erosion control blanket.

D. Slope installation.

1. Erosion control blanket shall be installed as directed by Owner’s representative in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation Guidelines, Erosion and Sediment Control
01573-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01573 (DraftFinal) Staple Pattern Guides, and CAD details. The extent of erosion control blanket shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Erosion control blanket shall be oriented in vertical strips and anchored with staples, as identified in the Staple Pattern Guide.
a. Adjacent strips shall be overlapped to allow for installation of a common row of staples that anchor through the nettings of both blankets. b. Horizontal joints between erosion control blankets shall be sufficiently overlapped with the uphill end on top for a common row of staples so that the staples anchor through the nettings of both blankets.

3. Where exposed to overland sheet flow, a trench shall be located at the uphill termination erosion control blanket shall be stapled to the bottom of the trench. a. Trench shall be backfilled and compacted.
b. Where feasible, the uphill end of the blanket shall be extended 3 feet over the crest of the slope.

3.04 FILTER FABRIC FENCE CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. Attach filter fabric to 1-inch by 2-inch wooden stakes or driven steel rods spaced a maximum of 3 feet apart and embedded minimum of 8 inches or deeper to hold fence in place.

1. If filter fabric is factory preassembled with support netting, then maximum spacing allowable is 8 feet.

2. Install anchoring stakes or rods at slight angle toward source of anticipated runoff.

3. Contractor is responsible for providing adequate fence anchoring appropriate for the varying soil and rock conditions at the well sites.

B. Trench in toe of filter fabric fence with spade or mechanical trencher so that downward face of trench is flat and perpendicular to direction of flow.

1. V-trench configuration as indicated on the Drawings may also be used.

2. Lay filter fabric along edges of trench.

3. Backfill and compact trench.

C. Filter fabric fence shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above natural ground.

D. Provide filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to length of fence to minimize use of joints.

1. When joints are necessary, splice fabric together only at support post with minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely.

3.05 TRIANGULAR FILTER FABRIC FENCE CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Attach filter fabric to fence structure fashioned from 6 gauge, 6-inch by 6-inch wire mesh, 18 inches on each side as indicated on the Drawings.

1. Fabric cover and skirt should be continuous wrapping of fabric.

2. Skirt should form continuous extension of fabric on upstream side of fence.

B. Secure triangular fabric filter fence in place using one of the following methods:

1. Toe-in skirt 6 inches with mechanically compacted material.

Erosion and Sediment Control
01573-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01573 (DraftFinal)

2. Weight down skirt with continuous layer of 3-inch to 5-inch graded rock.

3. Trench-in entire structure 4 inches.

C. If provided, anchor triangular fabric filter fence structure and skirt securely in place using 6-inch wire staples on 2-foot centers on both edges and on skirt, or staked using 18-inch by 3/8-inch diameter re-bar with tee ends.

D. Lap over fabric filter material by 6 inches to cover segment joints.

1. Fasten joints with galvanized shoat rings.

3.06 STRAW BALE FENCE CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. Bound bales with either wire, nylon or polypropylene rope tied across hay bales.

1. Do not use jute or cotton bindings.

B. Place bales in row with ends tightly abutting adjacent bales.

1. Place bales with bindings parallel to ground surface.

C. Embed bale in soil a minimum of 4 inches.

D. Securely anchor bales in place by 3/8-inch rebar stakes driven through bales a minimum of 18 inches into ground.

1. Angle first stake in each bale toward previously laid bale to force bales together.

E. Fill gaps between bales with straw to prevent water from escaping between bales.

1. Wedge carefully in order not to separate bales.

F. Replace with new straw bale fence every 2 months.

3.07 BRUSH BERM CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. Construct brush berm along contour lines by hand placing method.

1. Do not use machine placement of brush berm.

B. Use woody brush and branches having diameter less than 2 inches with 6 inches overlap.

1. Avoid incorporation of annual weeds and soil into brush berm.

C. Use minimum height of 18 inches measured from top of existing ground at upslope toe to top of berm.

1. Top width shall be 24 inches minimum and side slopes shall be 2:1 or flatter.

D. Embed brush berm into soil a minimum of 4 inches and anchor using either wire, nylon or polypropylene rope across berm with a minimum tension of 50 pounds.

1. Tie rope securely to 18-inch x 3/8-inch diameter rebar stakes driven into ground on 4-foot centers on both sides of berm.

END OF SECTION

Product Requirements
01601-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01601 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01601

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Requirements for products.

1.02 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below, are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when this Section is referenced in other Specifications, have the indicated meaning.

1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing:
a. Form used to confirm that the applicable source tests have been performed and the results conform to the Contract Documents. Form template is provided at the end of this Section.

2. Manufacturer’s instructions:
a. Stipulations, directions, and/or recommendations issued by the manufacturer of the product addressing handling, storage, installation, protection, erection, and/or application of the product.

3. Product data:
a. Information about the product, typically found in the manufacturer’s catalogs specifications or other resources, including data sheets, bulletins, and brochures.

4. Source Quality Control:
a. Testing and inspections at the location of fabrication or assembly. 1) Includes factory acceptance testing (FAT), factory testing, and Source Testing.
b. Test reports, including the following information:
1) Test description.
2) List of equipment used.
3) Name of the person conducting the test.
4) Date and time the test was conducted.
5) Ambient temperature and weather conditions.
6) Raw data collected.
7) Calculated results.
8) Clear statement if the test passed or failed the requirements stated in the Contract Documents.
9) Signature of the person responsible for the test.

5. Special tools:
a. Special wrenches, gauges, circuit setters, and other similar devices required for the proper operation or maintenance of a system that would not normally be in the Owner’s tool kit and that have been specifically made for use on a product for assembly, disassembly, repair, or maintenance.

Product Requirements
01601-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01601 (DraftFinal)

1.03 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer shall provide a permanent quality control department and laboratory facility capable of performing inspections and testing as required by the Contract Documents.

1. Material testing, inspection procedures, and manufacturing process are subject to inspection by the Engineer.

2. Notify the Engineer in writing of the manufacturing start date, not less than 14 days prior to the start, of the manufacturer of project pipe.

3. Perform manufacturer’s tests and inspections required by the referenced standards and as specified in this Section, including the following:
a. Calibration within last 12 months for equipment such as scales, measuring devices and calibration tools used in the manufacturing of pipe as required by ISO 9001.
1) Each device used in the manufacturer of pipe is required to have a tag recording date of last calibration.
2) Provide calibration certificate.
3) Devices are subject to inspection by the Engineer.

4. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

1.04 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVES
A. Qualifications of manufacturer’s representative include the following:

1. Authorized representative of the manufacturer, factory trained and experienced in the technical applications and installation of respective products with full authority by the product manufacturer to issue the certifications required of the manufacturer.

2. Competent, experienced technical representative of the product manufacturer for installation.

3. Additional qualifications may be specified in the Technical Sections.

4. No substitute representatives will be allowed until written approval by the Owner and Engineer has been obtained.

B. Completion of manufacturer on-site services: Engineer approval required.

1. Manufacturer’s representative will advise aspects of installation, including, but not limited to:
a. Handling.
b. Storing.
c. Cleaning and inspecting.
d. Coating and lining repairs.
e. Tapping.
f. General construction methods.

C. Manufacturer is responsible for determining the time required to perform the specified services.

1. No additional costs associated with performing the required services will be approved.

2. Manufacturer required to schedule services in accordance with the Contractor’s Project schedule, up to and including making multiple trips to the Project Site when there are separate milestones associated with installation of each occurrence of the manufacturer’s product.

Product Requirements
01601-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01601 (DraftFinal) D. Manufacturer’s on-site services include the following:

1. Assistance during construction.

2. Provide 1 copy of daily manufacturer’s representative’s field notes and data to the Engineer.

3. Other requirements as specified in the Contract Documents.

1.05 GENERAL TEST REQUIREMENTS
A. Testing prerequisites:

1. Prior to testing, verify equipment protective devices and safety devices have been installed, calibrated, and tested.

B. Test Plan requirements:

1. As specified in this Section and the Technical Sections.

2. Prepared by the Contractor as a result of discussions and planning emerging from regularly conducted meetings for test planning.

3. Define the following for each test:
a. Purpose of the test.
b. Identification of each item of equipment/system, including system designation, location, tag number, control loop identifier, etc. c. Description of the pass/fail criteria that will be used. d. Listing of pertinent reference documents (Contract Documents or industry standards applicable to the testing).
e. Credentials of test personnel.
f. Test equipment:
1) Product data.
2) Appropriate calibration records.
3) Drawings or photographs of test stands and/or test apparatus. g. Duration: Determine test durations with the Owner’s input. h. Detailed step-by-step test procedures.
1) Setup.
2) Level of detail shall be sufficient for any witness with a rudimentary technical aptitude to be able to follow the steps and develop confidence that the tests were being performed as planned. 3) Include all steps in the procedures.
4) Define temporary systems (pumps, piping, etc.), shutdown requirements for existing systems.
5) Furnish labor, power, tools, equipment, instruments, and services required for and incidental to completing testing activities. i. Test forms: Include, but not limited to, the following information:
1) Name of product to be tested.
2) Test date.
3) Names of persons conducting the test.
4) Names of persons witnessing the test, where applicable. 5) Test data.
6) Applicable Project requirements.
7) Check offs for each completed test or test step.
8) Place for signature of person conducting tests and for the witnessing person, as applicable.

Product Requirements
01601-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01601 (DraftFinal) C. Submit Test Plan.

1. Submit forms as specified in the Technical Sections.

2. Submit a copy of the Test Plan at least 21 days before any scheduled test date.

3. Engineer approval of Test Plan required prior to beginning testing.

D. Request proposed test dates.

1. Notify the Engineer of the scheduled tests a minimum of 15 days before the date of the test.

E. Implement approved Test Plans.

1. Demonstrate the product performance meets the requirements stated in the Contract Documents.
a. When the product fails to meet the specified requirements, perform additional, more detailed, testing to determine the cause, correct, repair, or replace the causative components and repeat the testing that revealed the deficiency.

F. Submit Test Report.

1.06 SOURCE TESTING
A. As specified in Section 01450 - Quality Control.

B. Also referred to as factory testing or factory acceptance testing (FAT).

C. Source Test Plan:

1. As specified in this Section and other Technical Sections.

2. Purpose: Test products for proper performance at point of manufacture or assembly as specified in the Technical Sections.

3. Source Testing requirements as specified in Technical Sections. a. Non-witnessed:
1) Provide completed Attachment A - Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.
b. Witnessed:
1) 2 Owner’s representatives and 2 Engineer’s representatives present during testing, unless otherwise specified.
2) Provide completed Attachment A - Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

4. Duration: Define.

5. Contractor is responsible for providing fuel, chemicals, and other consumables needed for Source Testing.

D. Contractor is responsible for witness trip costs associated with the Owner’s and Engineer’s representatives.

1. Include costs for at least the following:
a. Transportation:
1) Travel on commercial airline to and from Site, including related fees. 2) Rental car to and from airport, hotel, and test site, including related fees.

Product Requirements
01601-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01601 (DraftFinal) b. Hotel/meals:
1) Hotel costs at a facility with an American Automobile Association 4-star rating or higher equivalent for single occupancy room per person per day.
2) Meal allowance based on government per diem guidelines per location.
c. Witness labor costs:
1) The greater of $200 per hour or $1,600 per day.

2. If the Source Test is not ready when the witnesses arrive or if the Source Test fails, the witnesses will return home with the Contractor responsible for costs associated with the trip, including costs described above. a. Contractor is responsible for rescheduling the Source Test and witnesses’ costs associated with the second trip, including costs described above. b. Contractor is responsible for witnesses’ costs associated with retests, including costs described above.

1.07 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION
A. Installation Verification plan:

1. Confirm piping:
a. Has been properly installed, adjusted, and aligned.
b. Is free of any stresses imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. c. Is able to be operated as necessary for Functional Testing.

2. Field test backfill, welded joints, alignment and grade, and pipeline pressure as specified in the Technical Sections.

3. Duration: Define.

4. Coordinate Installation Verification with restrictions and requirements as specified in Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.

1.08 FUNCTIONAL TESTING
A. Functional Test Plan:

1. Purpose: Test piping system to verify conformance with the Contract Documents.

2. Duration: Define.

3. Perform testing in the presence of the Engineer.

4. Contractor is responsible for providing fuel, chemicals, and other consumables needed.

5. Coordinate Functional Testing with restrictions and requirements as specified in Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.

1.09 SHIPMENT
A. Prepare products for shipment by:

1. Tagging or marking to match the Shop Drawings or Contract Documents.

2. Including complete packing lists and bills of material with each shipment.

3. Packaging products to facilitate handling and protection against damage during transit, handling, and storage.

4. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and installation before packaging and shipment.

Product Requirements
01601-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01601 (DraftFinal) B. Transport products by methods that avoid product damage.

C. Deliver products in undamaged condition in the manufacturer’s unopened packaging.

1.10 DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Handle products in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Deliver products in undamaged condition in the manufacturer’s unopened packaging.

C. Provide construction equipment and personnel to handle products by methods in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Upon delivery, promptly inspect shipments:

1. Verify compliance with the Contract Documents, correct quantities, and undamaged condition of products.

2. Acceptance of shipment does not constitute final acceptance of products.

1.11 STORAGE
A. Immediately store and protect products until installed in the Work.

B. Store products with seals and legible labels intact.

C. Protect painted or coated surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and damage.

D. Storage of spare parts, maintenance products, special tools.

1. Immediately store in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Store spare parts, maintenance products, and special tools in an enclosed, weather-proof, and lighted facility during the construction period.

3. Protect parts subject to deterioration, such as ferrous metal items and electrical components with appropriate lubricants, desiccants, or hermetic sealing.

4. Store large items individually:
a. Weight: Greater than 50 pounds.
b. Size: Greater than 24-inches wide by 18-inches high by 36-inches long. c. Clearly labeled:
1) Equipment tag number.
2) Equipment manufacturer.
3) Subassembly component, if appropriate.

5. Store smaller items in spare parts boxes:
a. Weight: Less than 50 pounds.
b. Size: Less than 24-inches wide by 18-inches high by 36-inches long. c. Clearly labeled:
1) Equipment tag number.
2) Equipment manufacturer.
3) Subassembly component, if appropriate.

6. Spare parts and special tools box:
a. Box material: Waterproof, corrosion resistant.
b. Hinged cover with locking hasp:
1) Inventory list taped to underside of cover.

Product Requirements
01601-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01601 (DraftFinal) 2) Clearly labeled:
a) “Spare Parts and/or Special Tools”.
b) Equipment tag number.
c) Equipment manufacturer.
d) Subassembly component, if appropriate.

E. Exterior storage of fabricated products:

1. Place on aboveground supports that allow for drainage.

2. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering.

3. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation under covering.

F. Store moisture sensitive products in watertight enclosures.

G. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in well-drained area.

1. Prevent materials mixing with foreign matter.

2. Provide access for inspection.

H. When needed and approved by the Engineer, offsite storage location shall be within 10 miles of the Project Site.

1. Provide proof of insurance coverage for products stored offsite.

I. Payment will not be made for products improperly stored or stored without providing the Engineer with the manufacturer’s instructions for storage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products by the same manufacturer when units are of similar nature, unless otherwise specified.

B. Provide like parts of duplicate units that are interchangeable.

C. Provide equipment or products that have not been in service prior to delivery, except as required by tests.

D. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

1. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where specific date is established by code.

E. Provide products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products.

F. Provide products that bear approvals and labels as specified such as Factory Mutual (FM), Underwriters Laboratory (UL), or National Sanitation Foundation (NSF International) that are acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

Product Requirements
01601-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01601 (DraftFinal)

2.02 MATERIAL
A. Dissimilar metals:

1. Separate contacting surfaces with dielectric material.

2. Neoprene, bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators, washers, petrolatum tape, or other materials as specified.

3. Dielectric coatings can be used to separate dissimilar metal couples from surrounding environment if isolation of metals is not possible, with approval of the Engineer.

B. Edge grinding:

1. Sharp projections of cut or sheared edges of ferrous metals which are not to be welded shall be ground to a radius required to ensure satisfactory paint adherence and mitigate any safety hazard.

2. A surface profile will need to be re-established for coating adherence based on coating manufacturer’s profile requirements.

C. Use anti-galling compound on threads of stainless steel fasteners during factory assembly.

D. Provide anti-galling compound with stainless steel fasteners shipped for field assembly.

E. Aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry: Apply epoxy mastic as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings, coating system EPX-M-5.

2.03 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. When products are specified without named manufacturers, provide products that meet or exceed the Specifications.

B. When products are specified with names of manufacturers but no model numbers or catalog designations, provide products by one of the named manufacturers that meet or exceed specifications.

C. When products are specified with names of manufacturers and model numbers or catalog designations, provide products with model numbers or catalog designations by one of the named manufacturers.

D. When products are specified with names of manufacturers, but with brand or trade names, model numbers, or catalog designations by one manufacturer only, provide:

1. Products specified by brand or trade name, model number, or catalog designation.

2. Products by another named manufacturer proven, in accordance with requirements for an “or equal”, including the Engineer’s approval, to meet or exceed quality, appearance and performance of specified brand or trade name, model number, or catalog designation.

Product Requirements
01601-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01601 (DraftFinal) E. When products are specified with only one manufacturer followed by “or equal,” provide:

1. Products meeting or exceeding specifications by specified manufacturer.

2. Engineer deemed “or equal” evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication.

F. When products are specified by naming 2 or more manufacturers with 1 manufacturer as a “Basis of Design”:

1. Any of the named manufacturers can be submitted.

2. If the product submitted is not by the named “Basis of Design” product and requires a change in the scope (dimensions, configuration, physical properties, etc.), schedule (longer lead time), or budget, the Contractor must submit a substitution request.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Inspect equipment or products prior to installation.

B. Repaint or recoat damaged painted or coated surfaces after installation.

C. Use anti-galling compound on stainless steel threads used for field assembly.

3.02 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Provide coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage due to traffic and subsequent construction operations.

1. Remove covering when no longer needed.

2. Replace corroded, damaged, or deteriorated products before acceptance of the Project.

END OF SECTION

Product Requirements
01601-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01601 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF SOURCE TESTING

Product Requirements
01601-Attachment A-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01601 (DraftFinal) MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF SOURCE TESTING

OWNER EQPT/SYSTEM
PROJECT NAME EQPT TAG NO.

PROJECT NO. EQPT SERIAL NO.

SPECIFICATION NO.

SPECIFICATION TITLE
Comments:

I hereby certify Source Testing has been performed on the above-referenced product as defined in the Contract Documents, and the results conform to the Contract Document requirements.

Testing data is attached.

Date of Execution:

Manufacturer:

Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative Name (print):
(Authorized Signature)
If applicable, Witness Name (print):
(Witness Signature)

Field Engineering
01722-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01722 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01722

FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Field engineering to establish lines and grades for the Work.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Qualifications of the professional land surveyor or licensed civil engineer with the authority to provide land surveying in California that will be performing the field engineering.

C. Pre-Excavation Report.

1.03 PRE-EXCAVATION REPORT
A. Prior to the start of the Work, create a report confirming the verification of the following data:

1. Site elevation.

2. Existing structures, including, but not limited to, buildings, manholes (sanitary, storm, electrical, and other), drainage inlets:
a. Location coordinates.
b. Top of wall elevation and coordinates.
c. Floor elevations.
d. Invert elevations.

3. Existing utilities as specified in Section 02280 - Subsurface Utility Engineering.

4. Proposed building corners, tank, and equipment locations.

5. Verify existing electrical, instrumentation, and phone utilities.

B. Incorporate information from Pre-Excavation Report into the Record Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Basic reference line, a beginning point on basic reference line, points with referenced coordinates, and a benchmark will be provided by the Owner.

Field Engineering
01722-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01722 (DraftFinal) B. From these reference points, establish other control and reference points as required to properly lay out the Work.

C. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work, and preserve permanent reference points during construction:

1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice.

2. Replace Project control point, when lost or destroyed, in accordance with original survey control.

D. Set monuments for principal control points and protect them from being disturbed and displaced:

1. Re-establish disturbed monuments.

2. When disturbed, postpone parts of the Work that are governed by disturbed monuments until such monuments are re-established.

3.02 PROJECT SITE SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Establish minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on site referenced to data established by survey control points.

B. Record permanent benchmark locations with horizontal and vertical data on Project Record Documents.

C. Perform verifications and checking in accordance with industry standard surveying practice.

D. Maintain complete, accurate log of control points and survey.

E. Affix civil engineer’s or professional land surveyor’s signature and license number to Record Drawings to certify accuracy of information shown.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION STAKES, LINES, AND GRADES
A. Execute the Work in accordance with the lines and grades indicated.

B. Make distances and measurements on horizontal planes, except elevations and structural dimensions.

3.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Accuracy of stakes, alignments, and grades may be checked randomly by the Engineer:

1. Notice of when checking will be conducted will be given.

2. When notice of checking is given, postpone parts of the Work affected by stakes, alignments, or grades to be checked until checked.

3. Engineer’s check does not substitute or complement required field quality control procedures.

Field Engineering
01722-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01722 (DraftFinal)

3.05 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare and submit Record Documents as specified in Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures.

END OF SECTION

Work Within Public Right-of-Way
01734-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01734 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01734

WORK WITHIN PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Requirements for maintenance, support, protection, relocation, reconstruction and adjusting-to-grade, restoration, construction of temporary and new facilities, and abandonment of existing utilities affected by construction work within the public right-of-way.

1.02 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Trenching:
a. Open trench:
1) General: Includes excavation, pipe laying, backfilling, and pavement replacement.
b. Any excavated areas shall be considered as “open trench” until all pavement replacement has been made, or until all trenches outside of pavement replacement areas have been backfilled and compacted in accordance with these Contract Documents.

2. Utility:
a. For the purpose of this Section, utility means any public or private service, such as electric light and power systems; gas distribution systems; telephone, telegraph, cable television and other communication services; water distribution; storm drain and sanitary sewer services; police and fire communication systems; street lighting and traffic signs and signals; parking meters; and steam distribution systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Traffic control plan: Submit detailed traffic control plan for acceptance by jurisdictional agency.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Trenching:

1. Except where otherwise specified, indicated on the Drawings, or accepted in writing by the Engineer, the maximum length of open trench, where construction is in any stage of completion, shall not exceed the linear footage as set forth below. Descriptions under following area designations are general Work Within Public Right-of-Way
01734-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01734 (DraftFinal) in nature and may be amended in writing by the Engineer due to particular or peculiar field conditions:
a. Business district areas - maximum 100 linear feet: Store front areas. b. Commercial areas - maximum 400 linear feet: Industrial, shopping centers, churches, schools, hotels, motels, markets, gas stations, government and private office buildings, hospitals, fire and police stations, and nursing homes.
c. Residential areas - maximum 1 block or 600 linear feet, whichever is the least: Single and multi-family residences, apartments, and condominiums. d. Undeveloped areas - maximum 1,000 linear feet: Parks, golf courses, farms, undeveloped subdivided land.

2. Completely backfill trenches across streets and install temporary or permanent pavement as soon as possible after pipe laying.

B. Site conditions:

1. Use substantial steel plates with adequate trench bracing to bridge across trenches at street and alley crossings, commercial driveways, and residential driveways where trench backfill and temporary patch have not been completed during regular working hours.

2. Provide safe and convenient passage for pedestrians.

3. Maintain access to fire stations, fire hydrant, and hospitals at all times.

4. Provide traffic control devices, barricades, and signage as required by the regulating agency.

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Commissioning
01756-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01756

COMMISSIONING

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL...............................................................................................................2

1.01 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................2

1.02 DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................2

1.03 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................4

1.04 COMMISSIONING COORDINATOR (CC)..................................................................5

1.05 MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVES................................................................5

1.06 PLANNING PHASE ....................................................................................................6

1.07 TESTING AND TRAINING PHASE.............................................................................8

1.08 START-UP PHASE...................................................................................................15 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED).....................................................................................16 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) ....................................................................................16

ATTACHMENT A - COMMISSIONING FLOWCHARTS
ATTACHMENT B - MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF SOURCE TESTING ATTACHMENT C - MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION VERIFICATION ATTACHMENT D - MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF FUNCTIONAL COMPLIANCE

ATTACHMENT E - TRAINING EVALUATION FORM

ATTACHMENT F - COMMISSIONING ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES MATRIX

ATTACHMENT G - FUNCTIONAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
Commissioning
01756-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Commissioning.

1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Commissioning: The process of planning for, testing of, and start-up of systems, subsystems, equipment, components, and devices of the Work to demonstrate, through documented verification, that the Work has successfully met the Contract Documents. It includes training the Owner’s staff on operation and maintenance of the installed Work.

B. Commissioning Phases: The activities of commissioning are grouped into the phases defined in the following table.

1. Table 1 - Commissioning Phases.

TABLE 1 - COMMISSIONING PHASES
Planning Phase Testing and Training Phase Start-Up Phase Draft Test Plans Source Testing:
• Documentation
Start-Up:
• Documentation
• Owner Training
Installation Verification:
• Documentation
• Owner Training
Functional Testing:
• Documentation
• Owner Training

2. Attachment A provides Commissioning Flowcharts.

C. Component: A part of a system that does not have an electrical connection or internal electronics. Examples: Piping and pressure gauges.

D. Device: A part of a system that has electrical connections or internal electronics.

Examples: Level transmitter or pressure transmitter.

E. Electrical Energization Plan: A plan to manage how and when power is applied to electrical equipment.

F. Equipment: A factory or field assembled apparatus that performs an identifiable function. Examples: Pumps, motors, VFDs, MCCs.

G. Functional Testing: Testing performed on a completed subsystem or system to demonstrate that the system meets the specified requirements. Example systems:

Backwash system, dewatering system.

Commissioning
01756-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) H. Installation Verification: Testing to demonstrate that equipment or system and associated components or devices have been properly installed. Example equipment: Pumps, meters, and blowers with associated piping.

I. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Functional Compliance: The form completed by the manufacturer to confirm that testing of the installed equipment or system has been performed and the results conform to the specified performance. The form is provided in Attachment D provided at the end of this Section.

J. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification: The form completed by the manufacturer to confirm that the equipment or system is installed in conformance with the Contract. The form is provided in Attachment C at the end of this Section.

K. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing: The form completed by the manufacturer to confirm that the specified source tests have been performed and the results conform to the specified requirements. The form is provided in Attachment B at the end of this Section.

L. Owner Training: The Owner’s staff is trained by the Contractor, with assistance from manufacturer, to operate and maintain the completed Work. This is sometimes referred to as Vendor Specific Training.

M. Process Stream: A series of liquid or solids flow processes that are designed to improve the water quality to meet regulatory permit requirements.

N. Source Testing: Test equipment or products for performance at point of manufacture or assembly for the requirements specified in the Contract Documents.

Also referred to as factory testing and factory acceptance testing (FAT).

O. Start-Up: Operating the Work with process water to verify the Work meets the Contract Documents.

P. Start-Up Phase: The phase when Start-Up occurs.

Q. Subsystem: A grouping of equipment, components, and devices that is a part of a larger system and that perform a single definable function. Examples: Sand filters, filter backwash.

R. System: A grouping of equipment, components, and devices that perform a single definable function. If a system is a part of a larger system, it is referred to as a subsystem.

1. Examples: Flocculation and sedimentation, filtration.

S. System Testing: Testing of a completed system for an extended time period.

Examples: Headworks, filtration.

T. Water Management Plan: A plan to manage the test water used for commissioning from source to disposal. The test water may be clean water, potable water, non-potable water, or process water (e.g., raw water, plant water, sludge). The plan demonstrates how water will be produced, conveyed, treated, disposed of as directed by the plant manager, and/or recycled.

Commissioning
01756-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Commissioning:

1. Commissioning Coordinator’s qualifications.
a. Submit to Engineer no later than 30 days after Notice to Proceed. b. Describe previous similar experience on similar projects with a list of references, including phone numbers.
c. Provide names and qualifications of commissioning assistants, if applicable.

2. Schedules:
a. Commissioning Schedule containing all commissioning activities. b. Owner Training Schedule.

3. Test Plans:
a. Submit draft Test Plan outlined in the Planning Phase, unless specified otherwise.
1) Engineer approval of draft Test Plans required for successful completion of Planning Phase.
b. Submit final Test Plan a minimum of 30 calendar days prior to testing, or as directed by the City.
c. Engineer approval of final Test Plan required prior to start of testing.

4. Test Reports:
a. Submit draft Test Reports outline in the Planning Phase, unless specified otherwise.
1) Engineer approval of draft Test Reports outline required for successful completion of Planning Phase.
b. Submit final Test Report a maximum of 30 calendar days after testing.

B. Technical Sections Commissioning:

1. Manufacturer’s representative’s qualifications.
a. Submit to Engineer no later than 30 days in advance of required services. b. Representative’s name, phone, and e-mail address:
1) May use 2 representatives: 1 for field testing and 1 for Owner Training. 2) Provide resume stating instructor’s technical expertise and instructional technology skills and experience.

2. Test Plans:
a. Submit draft Test Plan outlined in the Planning Phase, unless specified otherwise.
1) Engineer approval of draft Test Plans required for successful completion of Planning Phase.
b. Submit final Test Plan a minimum of 30 calendar days prior to testing, or as directed by the City.
c. Engineer approval of final Test Plan required prior to start of testing.

3. Test Reports:
a. Submit draft Test Reports outline in the Planning Phase, unless specified otherwise.
1) Engineer approval of draft Test Reports outline required for successful completion of Planning Phase.
b. Submit final Test Report a maximum of 30 calendar days after testing.

4. Manufacturer’s representatives field notes and data.

Commissioning
01756-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

5. Owner Training:
a. Prior to the training session:
1) Training instructor qualifications.
2) Training course materials: Due 30 calendar days prior to initial training session.
a) If Owner requires, Continuing Education Units (CEUs), submit training materials to state regulatory agency in sufficient time to obtain approval for training prior to the training.
b) Drafts of training agenda, lesson plan, presentation, handouts, and list of audio-visual aids.
c) Format: 1 electronic copy in the format specified by the Owner. b. Post training session:
1) Training course materials: Due 14 calendar days after class completion.
a) Recordings.
b) Class attendance sheet.
c) Final version of training agenda, final lesson plan, presentation, handouts, and audio-visual aids.
d) Format: 1 electronic copy in the format specified by the Owner. 2) Provide materials for all sessions of the class in a single transmittal. 3) If the Owner requires training CEUs, issue training CEU certificates approved by the state regulatory agency to Owner’s staff who successfully completed the training.

1.04 COMMISSIONING COORDINATOR (CC)
A. Responsibilities include the following:

1. Full-time dedicated person with no other project responsibilities or part-time, as approved by the City.

2. Become thoroughly familiar with Contract Commissioning requirements.

3. Provide the primary interface with Engineer and Owner for Commissioning efforts.

4. Lead Commissioning efforts - all phases and tasks.

5. Coordinate training efforts.

6. Meetings:
a. CC is responsible for setting Commissioning coordination meeting dates and times, as well as preparing the agendas and meeting minutes. b. CC shall conduct Commissioning progress meetings throughout construction, to plan, scope, coordinate, and schedule future activities, resolve problems, etc.
c. Frequency: Monthly minimum. Increase frequency as needed based on complexity and quantity of Commissioning activities.

1.05 MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVES
A. Qualifications: As specified below and in the Technical Sections:

1. For Installation and Functional Testing:
a. Factory trained and experienced in the technical applications, installation, operation, and maintenance of respective equipment/system with full authority by the equipment/system manufacturer to issue the certifications required of the manufacturer.

Commissioning
01756-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

2. Training instructor qualifications:
a. Provide resume stating instructor’s technical preparation and instructional technology skills and experience.
b. If CEUs are required, the operator training instructors must comply with state regulatory.
c. Knowledgeable in the equipment/system for which they are training. d. Experienced in conducting classes.
e. Sales representatives are not qualified instructors unless they possess the detailed operating and maintenance knowledge required for proper class instruction.

3. Representatives to be approved by Owner and Engineer.

4. No substitute representatives without written approval by Owner and Engineer.

B. Duties:

1. Determine if additional time and/or trips (beyond those specified in the Technical Sections) is required to perform the specified services.

2. Coordinate services in accordance with the Contractor’s Project schedule, up to and including making multiple trips to the Project Site when there are separate milestones associated with installation of each occurrence of manufacturer’s equipment.

3. Perform on-site services as specified in the Technical Sections.

4. Provide daily copies of manufacturer’s representatives field notes and data to Contractor.

1.06 PLANNING PHASE
A. Overview of Planning Phase:

1. Define approach and timing for Commissioning.

2. Obtain Engineer approval of draft Test Plans.

B. Test Plans.

1. Define approach and timing for:
a. Testing and Training Phases.
1) Major systems, with separate plans for each system.
b. Start-Up Phase.

2. Centralized Commissioning database:
a. Provide system to manage information, as approved by the City. 1) Detailed steps.
2) Dependencies and other relationships of steps.
b. Update the database within 24 hours of task completion.

3. Source Test (Factory Acceptance Test) and Functional Test Plans:
a. As specified in this Section and other Technical Sections. b. Based on approved Shop Drawings.
c. Prepared by the Contractor.
d. Include the following items for each test:
1) Purpose of the test.
2) Identification of each item of equipment/system to be tested, including system designation, location, tag number, control loop identifier, etc.
3) Description of the pass/fail criteria that will be used.

Commissioning
01756-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) 4) Listing of pertinent reference documents (Contract and industry standards or sections applicable to the testing).
a) Credentials of test personnel.
5) Test equipment:
a) Include Product Data for the test equipment.
b) Appropriate calibration records.
(1) Drawings or photographs of test stands and/or test
apparatus.
6) Duration: Determine test durations with Owner’s input. 7) Detailed step-by-step test procedures.
a) Level of detail shall be sufficient for the witness to follow the steps.
e. Define for Functional Testing:
1) Required temporary systems (pumps, piping, etc.).
2) Shutdown requirements for existing systems.
f. Furnish labor, power, tools, equipment, instruments, and services required for and incidental to testing activities.

4. Test forms minimum requirements:
a. Name of product to be tested.
b. Test date.
c. Names of persons conducting the test.
d. Names of persons witnessing the test, where applicable. e. Test data.
f. Applicable project requirements as specified in the Technical Sections. g. Check offs for each completed test or test step.
h. Place for signature of person conducting tests and for the witnessing person, as applicable.

5. Owner responsibilities:
a. Owner will schedule staff within the constraints of their workloads. 1) Those who will participate in this test have existing full-time work assignments, and testing is an additional assigned work task, therefore, scheduling is imperative.
2) Treatment facilities are typically operated on an around-the-clock basis and are staffed in work shifts.
1) Maximum hours per day available for commissioning activities:
4, unless otherwise stated by the City.
2) Days available for commissioning activities: Monday to Thursday. 3) Scheduling coordination with the CC.

6. CC is responsible for the following:
a. Coordinate schedule with the Owner’s personnel and manufacturer’s representatives (instructors).

C. Test Reports:

1. Minimum requirements:
a. Title.
b. Abstract.
c. Equipment.
d. Procedures.
e. Results.
1) Complete disclosure of the calculation methodologies. f. Conclusions.

Commissioning
01756-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) g. Signature by an authorized party.
h. Appendices.
1) Completed test forms signed by witnesses.

2. Water Management Plan:
a. Requirements:
1) Demonstrate how water will be produced, conveyed, treated, recycled, and or disposed until testing verifies specified requirements.

3. Commissioning Schedule:
a. Content:
1) Comply with Attachment G - Functional Testing Requirements and provide activities organized by system and subsystem.
2) Include:
a) Source Testing when required.
b) Functional Testing.
c) Owner Training.
3) Comply with Attachment F - Commissioning Roles and
Responsibilities Matrix.
b. Procedures:
1) Submit Commissioning Schedule as specified in Section 01321 - Schedules and Reports.

1.07 TESTING AND TRAINING PHASE
A. Overview of Testing and Training Phase:

1. General:
a. Contractor tests the Work to verify it meets the Contract requirements. b. Contractor trains the Owner to operate and maintain the Work.

2. Contractor responsibilities:
a. Furnish labor, tools, equipment, instruments, and services required for and incidental to completing Commissioning activities in accordance with the approved Commissioning Plans.

3. Owner responsibilities:
a. Furnish labor, power, chemicals, and services required for and incidental to completing Commissioning activities in accordance with the approved Commissioning Plans.
b. Owner provided services, equipment, and/or materials to be as specified in the Scope of Work in the Contract RFP in Volume 2, Article 2.

B. Source Testing:

1. As specified in the Technical Section.

2. Source Test Plan:
a. Engineer approval of Source Test Plan required prior to testing.

3. Witnessed in person:
a. As specified in the Technical Section.

4. Virtual witness testing:
a. As specified in the Technical Sections.

5. If the Source Test is not ready on the scheduled date or if the Source Test fails:
a. Contractor is responsible for associated costs:
1) First test costs that are non-refundable, if applicable. 2) Repeat test costs:
a) Trip costs, if applicable.

Commissioning
01756-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) b) Virtual witness costs, if applicable.

6. Source Testing is complete after successful testing, submittal of test report, and Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.

7. Engineer approval of Source Testing Report is required.

C. Installation Verification:

1. Overview:
a. Verifying the installation of equipment to be in accordance with Manufacturer’s Instructions.

2. Prerequisite:
a. Engineer approval of Source Testing Report.

3. Perform checks:
a. Structural anchorage check.
b. Electrical energization check.
1) As specified in the flowchart shown in Attachment A. c. Health and safety check.

4. Submit Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification.

5. Engineer approval of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification is required.

D. Functional Testing:

1. Overview:
a. Testing the function of a system or subsystem.

2. Prerequisites:
a. Engineer approval of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification. b. Engineer approval of Functional Test Plan required prior to testing. c. Draft Operations and Maintenance Manual as specified in Section 01782 - Operations and Maintenance Manual.
d. Completed pipe, valve, and gate labeling of system or subsystem. 1) As specified in Section 15076 - Pipe Identification prior to the start of Functional Testing.

3. Witnessed.

4. Discipline checks:
a. Verify support systems function properly, such as seal water, pipes, valves, etc.
b. As specified in the individual Technical Sections.

5. Consecutive Day Test:
a. Operate the Work as specified in Attachment G - Functional Testing Requirements and as specified in the individual Technical Sections. 1) Successful completion of subsystem testing required prior to system testing.
b. Failure response time:
1) Be equipped and ready to provide emergency repairs, adjustments, and corrections to comply with the “Significant Interruption Duration” requirements as specified in Attachment G - Functional Testing Requirements.
c. Duration:
1) As specified in Attachment G - Functional Testing Requirements.

Commissioning
01756-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) 2) Restart the consecutive day test when the system performance failures exceed the “Significant Interruption Duration” time period specified in Attachment G - Functional Testing Requirements. a) Individual equipment/system failures that are corrected within the “Significant Interruption Duration” time specified in Attachment G - Functional Testing Requirements shall not require the consecutive day test to be restarted unless the failure recurs.
b) Engineer has the authority to reject the consecutive day test if individual equipment/system failures are repetitive.

6. Instrumentation and controls tests.
a. Loop Validation Tests.
b. Complete End-to-End Testing (CEET):
1) Signal are tested from the field device through the PLC program, the network, and all the way to the operator’s HMI graphic screens.

7. Restore to condition prior to testing:
a. Dewater and clean sumps.
b. Dewater process units, where required by test plan.

8. Submit Manufacturer’s Certificate of Functional Compliance.

9. Engineer approval of Manufacturer’s Certificate of Functional Compliance is required.

E. Documentation:

1. Provide records generated during Commissioning Phase of Project, including, but not limited to:
a. Training documentation.
b. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing.
c. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification. d. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Functionality Compliance. e. Daily logs of equipment/system testing identifying tests conducted and outcome.
f. Test forms and documentation.
g. Functional Testing results.
h. Logs of time spent by manufacturer’s representatives performing services on the job site.
i. Equipment lubrication records.
j. Electrical phase, voltage, and amperage measurements. k. Insulation resistance measurements.
l. Bearing temperature measurements.
m. Data sheets of control loop testing, including testing and calibration of instrumentation devices and setpoints.
n. Provide: 1 electronic copy in format specified by Owner. o. Store the data within 24 hours of the test or document creation in the project system.
p. Due date: Within 14 calendar days of Substantial Completion.

2. Engineer approval of documentation is required.

F. Owner Training:

1. Train Owner’s staff on the operation and maintenance of the equipment/system. a. Provide Owner staff with state regulatory agency approved training CEUs.

Commissioning
01756-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

2. Train on each topic of the approved Operation and Maintenance Manual. a. Include classroom instruction and field demonstration with all necessary tools and test equipment.

3. Training tailored to the skills and job classifications of the staff attending the classes (e.g., plant superintendent, treatment plant operator, maintenance technician, electrician, etc.).

4. Training outcomes:
a. Owner’s staff can safely operate, maintain, and repair the equipment/systems provided as recommended by the manufacturer.

5. Training plan:
a. CC shall meet with Engineer and Owner’s designated training coordinator to develop list of personnel to be trained and to establish expected training outcomes and objectives at least 60 calendar days prior to commissioning of equipment/system, or as specified by the City.
b. Coordinate and arrange for manufacturer’s representatives to provide both classroom-based learning and field (hands-on) training, based on training module content and stated learning objectives. c. Conduct classroom training at location designated by Owner. d. Scope and sequence:
1) Plan and schedule training in the correct sequence to provide prerequisite knowledge and skills to trainees.
a) Describe recommended procedures to check/test
equipment/system following a corrective maintenance repair. 2) If multiple classes are needed to meet the training objectives, they shall be included in the training plan.

6. Owner Training Schedule:
a. Schedule Owner’s staff training within the constraints of their workloads. 1) Those who will participate in this training have existing full-time work assignments, and training is an additional assigned work task, therefore, scheduling is imperative.
2) Owner staff work schedules regularly shift, as treatment facilities are typically operated on an around-the-clock basis.
3) Maximum training hours per week: 25.
4) Days available for training:
a) Monday to Thursday.
b. Training scheduling coordination:
1) CC is responsible for the following:
a) Coordinate schedule for training periods with the Owner’s personnel and manufacturer’s representatives (instructors). 2) Complete Owner Training no sooner than 15 calendar days prior to Functional Testing of each system.
c. Class logistics:
1) Delivery time minimum: 2 hours.
2) Delivery time maximum: 4 hours.
3) Class agenda:
a) Refreshment break: One 10-minute break.
b) Meal break: One 45-minute break, unless otherwise specified. c) Schedule refreshment breaks and meal breaks to meet the class needs and Owner work rules.

Commissioning
01756-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) 4) Schedule specific sessions:
a) Minimum of 30 days in advance to allow Owner staffing arrangements to take place.
b) At the times requested by the Owner, within the period 7 a.m. to 7 p.m. Monday through Friday.
(1) Times scheduled will be at Owner’s discretion.
c) Owner approval and confirmation required for session schedules. d) Provide minimum of 2 sessions for each class unless otherwise noted.
(1) The purpose of having multiple sessions on each class is to accommodate the attendance of as many Owner personnel
working different shifts as possible.
e) A maximum of 1 session per day for each class.
d. Number of students:
1) Estimated class size maximum: 5-10 staff.
2) Engineer will confirm the headcount 1 week prior to the class so that the instructor can provide the correct number of training aids for students.

7. Submittals:
a. Unless stated otherwise by the City, submit Training Plan Schedule 30 calendar days before the first scheduled training session, including, but not limited to, lesson plans, participant materials, instructor’s resumes, and training delivery schedules.
b. Submit training documentation, including the following:
1) Training plan:
a) Training modules.
b) Scope and sequence statement.
c) Contact information for manufacturer’s instructors. including name, phone, and e-mail address.
d) Instructor qualifications.
2) Training program schedule:
a) Format: Bar chart:
(1) Include in the Project Progress Schedule.
b) Contents:
(1) Training modules and classes.

8. Lesson plans:
a. Divide training into discrete modules appropriate for the equipment and trades.
b. State performance-based learning objectives in terms of what the trainees will be able to do at the end of the lesson.
c. Define student conditions of performance and criteria for evaluating instructional success.
d. Minimum requirements:
1) Hands-on demonstrations planned for the instructions. 2) Cross-reference training aids.
3) Planned training strategies such as whiteboard work, instructor questions, and discussion points or other planned classroom or field strategies.
4) Attach handouts cross-referenced by section or topic in the lesson plan.
5) Indicate duration of outlined training segments.

Commissioning
01756-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) e. Provide instruction lesson plans for each trade:
1) Detailed component description:
a) Identify each component function and describe in detail. b) Identify equipment’s mechanical, electrical, and electronic components and features.
c) Where applicable, group relative components into subsystems. d) Identify and describe in detail equipment safety features, permissive and controls interlocks.
2) Equipment operation:
a) Describe equipment’s operating (process) function and system theory.
b) Describe equipment’s fundamental operating principles and dynamics.
c) Identify support equipment associated with the operation of subject equipment.
d) Detail the relationship of each piece of equipment or component to the subsystems, systems, and process.
e) Cite hazards associated with the operations, exposure to chemicals associated with the component, or the waste stream handled by the component.
f) Specify appropriate safety precautions, equipment, and procedures to eliminate, reduce, or overcome hazards.
3) Define Preventative Maintenance (PM) inspection procedures required on equipment in operation, spot potential trouble symptoms (anticipate breakdowns), and forecast maintenance requirements (predictive maintenance).
a) Review preventive maintenance frequency and task analysis table.
4) Define equipment Corrective Maintenance (CM) troubleshooting:
a) Describe recommended equipment preparation requirements as they relate to specific craft problems.
b) Identify and describe the use of any special tools required for maintenance of the equipment as they relate to specific craft problems.
c) Provide component specific troubleshooting checklists as they relate to specific craft problems.
d) Describe component removal/installation and
disassembly/assembly procedures for specific craft repairs. e) Perform at least 2 hands-on demonstrations of common corrective maintenance repairs.
5) Describe recommended measuring instruments and procedures, and provide instruction on interpreting alignment measurements, as appropriate.

9. Training instruction format:
a. Training for operations personnel shall be provided separately from the maintenance personnel.
1) Training for maintenance personnel shall be further subdivided into the following 4 trade groups.
a) Mechanical maintenance.
b) Electrical maintenance.
c) Instrumentation and controls maintenance.

Commissioning
01756-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) d) Process Controls Network (PCN) maintenance.
b. Instructors shall apply adult education best practices, emphasizing learner participation and activity.
c. Lecturing should be less than 30 percent of class time. d. Training delivery may include problem solving, question/answer, hands-on instruction, practice, evaluation/feedback tools, and lecture to support training objectives.
e. Conduct hands-on instruction according to the following descriptions:
1) Present hands-on demonstrations of at least the following tasks:
a) Proper start-up, shutdown, and normal and alternative operating strategies.
b) Common corrective maintenance repairs for each group. c) Recommended procedures to check/test equipment/system following a corrective maintenance repair.
d) Preventative maintenance points.
e) Calibration, if applicable.
2) Use tools and equipment provided by manufacturer to conduct the demonstrations.
a) Submit requests for supplemental assistance and facilities with the Contractor’s proposed lesson plans.
3) Contractor remains responsible for equipment disassembly or assembly during hands-on training situations involving equipment disassembly or assembly by Owner’s personnel.
f. Training aids:
1) Instructors shall provide needed audio-visual devices such equipment (televisions, video recorder/player, computer, projectors, screens, easels, etc.), models, charts, etc., for each class. 2) Instructor to confirm with Engineer in advance of each class that the classroom will be appropriate for the types of audiovisual equipment to be employed.

10. Training sessions:
a. Provide training sessions for equipment/system as specified in the individual equipment/system section.
b. Include the following information in the agenda:
1) Instructor name.
2) Listing of subjects to be discussed.
3) Time estimated for each subject.
4) Allocation of time for Owner staff to ask questions and discuss the subject matter.
5) List of documentation to be used or provided to support training. c. Owner may request that particular subjects be emphasized, and the agenda be adjusted to accommodate these requests.
d. Digitally record audio and video of each training session. 1) Include classroom and field instruction with question and answering periods.
2) Engineer approval required for producer of video materials from one of the following options:
a) Qualified, professional video production company or individual. 3) Record in digital format and recording shall become property of the Owner with exclusive rights.
a) No video recording agreements will be entered into by the Owner.

Commissioning
01756-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) 4) Media:
a) Video quality shall be 720p HD or greater in MPG, AVCHD, AVI, or MP4 format.
b) Digital color video format.
c) Provide audio portion of the composite CD sufficiently free from electrical interference and background noise to provide complete intelligibility of oral report.
d) Identification: On each copy provide a label with the following information:
(1) Name of training.
(2) Date video was recorded.
e) Display continuous running time.
f) At start of each video recording, record training class name, date, and instructor’s name.
g) Provide audio quality that is not degraded during the recording of the field sessions due to background noise, space, distance or other factors.
5) Contractor shall provide a written release from all claims to the recorded training material produced, if required.
e. Distribute copies of the agenda to each student at the beginning of each training class.
f. Trainees will keep training materials and documentation after the session. g. Distribute Training Evaluation Form following each training session. 1) Training Evaluation Form is included in this Section. 2) Return completed Training Evaluation Forms to Owner’s designated training coordinator immediately after session is completed. 3) Revise training sessions judged “Unsatisfactory” by a majority of attendees.
a) Conduct training sessions again until a satisfactory rating is achieved.

11. Engineer approval of Owner Training is required.

1.08 START-UP PHASE
A. Overview of Start-Up Phase:

1. General:
a. Confirm reliability requirements.

B. Start-Up Period:

1. Contractor responsibilities:
a. Support Owner to operate the Work.

2. Owner responsibilities:
a. Owner to operate the Work.
b. Owner-provided services, equipment, and/or materials to be as specified in the Scope of Work in the Contract RFP in Volume 2, Article 2. c. Furnish labor, power, chemicals, tools, equipment, instruments, and services required for and incidental to completing commissioning activities in accordance with the approved Commissioning Plans.

3. Prerequisites:
a. Engineer approval of Testing and Training Phase.

4. Witnessed.

Commissioning
01756-16 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

5. Duration: 3 days per well site.

6. Engineer approval of Start-Up Period is required to achieve substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Commissioning
01756-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

ATTACHMENT A - COMMISSIONING FLOWCHARTS

Commissioning
01756-Attachment A-1 11843A10 December 2024- DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756(DraftFinal) Commissioning
01756-Attachment A-2 11843A10 December 2024- DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756(DraftFinal) Commissioning
01756-Attachment A-3 11843A10 December 2024- DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756(DraftFinal) Commissioning
01756-Attachment A-4 11843A10 December 2024- DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756(DraftFinal) Commissioning
01756-Attachment A-5 11843A10 December 2024- DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756(DraftFinal) Commissioning
01756-Attachment A-6 11843A10 December 2024- DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756(DraftFinal) Commissioning
01756-Attachment A-7 11843A10 December 2024- DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756(DraftFinal) Commissioning
01756-Attachment A-8 11843A10 December 2024- DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756(DraftFinal) Commissioning
01756-Attachment B 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT B - MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF SOURCE TESTING

Commissioning
01756-Attachment B-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF SOURCE TESTING

OWNER EQPT/SYSTEM
PROJECT NAME EQPT TAG NO.

PROJECT NO. EQPT SERIAL NO.

SPECIFICATION NO.

SPECIFICATION TITLE
Comments:

I hereby certify Source Testing has been performed on the above-referenced equipment/system as defined in the Contract, and results conform to the Contract Document requirements. Testing data is attached.

Date of Execution: , 20
Manufacturer:

Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative Name (print):
(Authorized Signature)
If applicable, Witness Name (print):
(Witness Signature)

Commissioning
01756-Attachment C 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT C - MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION VERIFICATION

Commissioning
01756-Attachment C-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION VERIFICATION

OWNER EQPT/SYSTEM
PROJECT NAME EQPT TAG NO.

PROJECT NO. EQPT SERIAL NO.

SPECIFICATION NO.

SPECIFICATION TITLE
I hereby certify the installation of the above-referenced equipment/system as defined in the Contract Documents.

NOTES:

1. Attach written certification report prepared by and signed by the electrical and/or instrumentation subcontractor.

Comments:

I, the undersigned manufacturer’s representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate this equipment/system, and (iii) authorized to make recommendations required to ensure that the equipment/system furnished by the manufacturer is complete and operational, except as may be otherwise indicated herein. I further certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate.

Date:

Manufacturer:

Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative Name (print):

By Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative:
(Authorized Signature)

Commissioning
01756-Attachment D 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT D - MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF FUNCTIONAL COMPLIANCE

Commissioning
01756-Attachment D-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal) MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF FUNCTIONAL COMPLIANCE

OWNER EQPT/SYSTEM
PROJECT NAME EQPT TAG NO.

PROJECT NO. EQPT SERIAL NO.

SPECIFICATION NO.

SPECIFICATION TITLE
I hereby certify the Functional Testing of the above-referenced equipment/system as defined in the Contract Documents.

NOTES:

1. Attach test results with collected data and test report.

2. Attach written certification report prepared by and signed by the electrical and/or instrumentation subcontractor.

Comments:

Date:

Manufacturer:

Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative Name (print):

By Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative:
(Authorized Signature)
WITNESSES:

By Owner’s Authorized Representative:
(Authorized Signature)
By Engineer’s Authorized Representative:
(Authorized Signature)

Commissioning
01756-Attachment E 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

ATTACHMENT E - TRAINING EVALUATION FORM

Commissioning
01756-Attachment E-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

TRAINING EVALUATION FORM
EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM ITEM:

VENDOR/MANUFACTURER:

DATE: NAME OF REPRESENTATIVE:

1. Was representative prepared? Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A

2. Was an overview description presented? Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A

3. Were specific details presented for
system components?
Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A

4. Were alarm and shutdown conditions
clearly presented?
Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A

5. Were step-by-step procedures for starting,
stopping, and troubleshooting presented?
Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A

6. Were routine/preventative maintenance
items clearly identified?
Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A

7. Was the lubrication schedule (if any)
discussed?
Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A

8. Was the representative able to answer
all questions?
Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A

9. Did the representative agree to research
and answer unanswered questions?
Acceptable Unacceptable or N/A

10. Comments:

11. Overall Rating Satisfactory Unsatisfactory
Note:

Sessions judged “Unsatisfactory” by a majority of attendees shall be revised and conducted again until a satisfactory rating is achieved.

Commissioning
01756-Attachment F 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

ATTACHMENT F - COMMISSIONING ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES MATRIX

Commissioning
01756-Attachment F-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

COMMISSIONING ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES MATRIX
NO. TASK OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER
Testing and Training Phase
Source Testing
Source Testing Witnessed as
specified in the
Technical
Sections.

Lead Witnessed as
specified in the
Technical
Sections.

Review
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing No Action Lead Review Installation Verification
Structural Anchorage Check Witness Lead Review
Health and Safety Check Witness Lead Review
Manufacturer Requirements Verification No Action Lead Review Contract Documents Verification No Action Lead Review
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation Verification No Action Lead Review Functional Testing
Checks Witness Lead Witness, Review
Tests Witness Lead Witness, Review
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Functional Compliance No Action Lead Witness, Review System Testing
System Testing Witness Lead Witness, Review
Start-Up Phase
Start-Up Lead Support Witness, Review
Legend:

Lead: Primarily responsible for organization, coordination, and execution of task work product or result.

Support: Assist the lead with organization, coordination, and execution of task work product or result.

Witness: Observe and document completion of task work product or result.

No Action: Limited or no involvement.

Review: Approve for compliance with Contract Documents or reject.

Commissioning
01756-Attachment G 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

ATTACHMENT G - FUNCTIONAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

Commissioning
01756-Attachment G-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01756 (DraftFinal)

FUNCTIONAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
System Subsystem
Consecutive
Day Test
Duration
(Days)
Significant
Interruption
Duration
(Hours) Test Liquid
System
Operated By
ASR Facility 4 2 Finished Water Owner
Pumps
Variable Frequency Drive(s)
Valves
A. Schedule delays:

1. Changes in the dates for Source Testing less than 30 days of the date provided in the latest approved Commissioning Schedule are considered delays.

2. Contractor is responsible for associated costs resulting from delays:
a. In person and/or virtual witnessing.
b. Travel costs and witness labor costs.

B. Repeat test costs:

1. Contractor is responsible for associated costs for repeat testing:
a. In person and/or virtual witnessing.
b. Travel costs and witness labor costs.

Disinfection
01757-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01757 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01757

DISINFECTION
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Cleaning and disinfection requirements for new and existing facilities affected by the Work.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

1. C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.

2. C652 - Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities.

3. C653 - Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants.

4. C655 - Field Dechlorination.

B. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

1. Method 524.2 Measurement of Purgeable Organic Compounds in Water by Capillary Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry.

2. Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA).

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Disinfection test plan, detailing the procedure to be utilized to disinfect the facilities, including:

1. Method and locations of disinfectant application.

2. Locations of sampling points.

3. Method of flushing and location of flushing ports (as appropriate for method of chlorination).

4. Method of dechlorination (as appropriate for method of chlorination).

5. Disposal location for chlorinated water (as appropriate for method of chlorination).

B. Disinfection reports, including the following:

1. Date issued.

2. Project name and location.

3. Treatment subcontractor’s name, address, and phone number.

4. Type and form of disinfectant used.

5. Time and date of disinfectant injection start.

6. Time and date of disinfectant injection completion.

7. Test locations.

8. Initial and 24-hour disinfectant residuals in milligrams per liter for each outlet tested.

9. Time and date of flushing start.

Disinfection
01757-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01757 (DraftFinal)

10. Time and date of flushing completion.

11. Disinfectant residual after flushing in milligrams per liter for each outlet tested.

C. Bacteriological reports, including the following:

1. Date issued.

2. Project name and location.

3. Laboratory name, certification number, address, and phone number.

4. Time and date of water sample collection.

5. Name of person collecting samples.

6. Test locations.

7. Time and date of laboratory test start.

8. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested.

9. Certification that water conforms or fails to conform to bacterial standards of the SDWA.

10. Bacteriologist’s signature and bacteriological laboratory’s evidence of certification.

D. Required permits, including, but not limited to, permit clearance.

1. Coordinate with the Owner and Engineer to obtain any necessary signatures.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Bacteriological and physical chemistry laboratory: Certified by the state in which the Project is located.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect chlorine and bacteriological samples against damage and contamination.

B. Maintain caution labels on hazardous materials.

C. Maintain storage room dry and with temperatures as uniform as possible between 60 degrees Fahrenheit and 80 degrees Fahrenheit.

1.06 PROTECTION
A. Provide necessary signs, barricades, and notices to prevent persons from accidentally consuming water or disturbing system being treated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Disinfectant: Free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet, or gas form in accordance with AWWA C653.

B. Dechlorination agent: Sulfur dioxide, sodium bisulfate, sodium sulfite, or sodium thiosulfate, in accordance with AWWA C655.

Disinfection
01757-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01757 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DISINFECTION OF WATER FACILITIES
A. Perform disinfection in accordance with AWWA C653 and as specified in this Section.

B. Complete hydrostatic/leakage tests prior to disinfection.

C. Clean newly constructed and/or modified facilities, such as pipes and channels, in accordance with AWWA C653 and the following:

1. Remove debris and material not associated with the structure or process prior to disinfection.

2. Clean wall, floor, ceiling, and attached surfaces by use of high-pressure water jet, sweeping, scrubbing, or equally effective means.

3. Remove water, paint flakes, sediment, dirt, and foreign material accumulated during cleaning.

4. Remove by flushing or other means, soil and debris from water pipes and channels in accordance with AWWA C651.

5. Protect surfaces from adverse environmental exposure between the preliminary cleaning and the disinfection stages.

D. Prior to chlorination, clean newly constructed and/or modified facilities to be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C651, C652, or C653, as applicable.

E. Provide necessary blind flanges, hoses, sample taps, or any other appurtenances that may be required to clean and disinfect the piping and wetted surfaces.

F. System treatment:

1. Start disinfection when conditions are satisfactory.

2. Perform disinfection of water lines and structures in accordance with AWWA C651, C652, and C653, and as specified in this Section.

3. Starting at the outlet closest to water source, bleed water from each outlet until water produces odor of disinfectant. Repeat process at each outlet throughout the system.

4. Test for disinfectant residual at each of the following locations and other locations in accordance with the submitted disinfection test plan:
a. Ends of piping runs.
b. Remote outlets.
c. Tanks.
d. At least 2 outlets on each building floor where directed. e. Drain lines.

5. Maintain disinfectant in system for appropriate 6-hour or 24-hour interval in accordance with AWWA C652.

6. When disinfectant residual is less than 10 milligrams per liter after 24 hours, repeat system treatment.

Disinfection
01757-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01757 (DraftFinal)

7. Stainless steel piping:
a. Modify procedures for disinfection of stainless steel piping and appurtenances as necessary to avoid causing corrosion, pitting, or attack of stainless steel materials.
1) Take steps to eliminate chlorinated water trapped in crevices and under gaskets through the following procedures:
a) Pressurize stainless steel piping systems so that gaskets and O-rings are seated before introducing chlorinated water into the system.
b) Flush to displace a minimum of 3 pipe volumes at the conclusion of the disinfection procedure.
b. Use the continuous-feed method to fill the stainless steel piping system with the minimum chlorine concentration required to provide a 10 milligrams per liter residual after 24 hours of contact time in accordance with AWWA C651.

3.02 SURFACES TO BE DISINFECTED
A. Disinfect the following:

1. Piping systems that are used to convey water, solutions, or chemicals to potable water facilities.

3.03 REPAIRS OR CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
A. Perform disinfection in accordance with AWWA C651 and as specified in this Section.

B. Clean and sterilize the interior surfaces of new piping, fittings, equipment, and appurtenances to be installed in an existing potable water system or connected to an existing system.

C. Clean and sterilize the existing pipe or facilities for a minimum distance of 3 pipe diameters back from the ends of the pipe. Plug the ends of the line when work is not being performed on the pipe.

D. Perform sterilization by swabbing each item with a concentrated chlorine solution.

1. Each piece is to be disinfected prior to being assembled for installation in the existing pipe.

2. Disinfect each piece just prior to assembly to help prevent recontamination.

3. Plug the ends of the assembly until a new item is to be added to the assembly.

4. Store disinfected materials on blocks to prevent contact with the ground.

3.04 FLUSHING
A. Remove disinfection water from the facilities as appropriate for the type of disinfectant and method used for disinfection.

B. Flush facilities with potable water containing no more disinfectant residual than the active distribution system or 1 milligram per liter, whichever is greater, as appropriate for method of chlorination.

Disinfection
01757-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01757 (DraftFinal) C. Continue flushing until water at designated flushing ports contains disinfectant residual equal to concentration specified above.

3.05 DISPOSAL OF CHLORINATED WATER
A. Dispose in accordance with AWWA C655 and as specified in this Section.

B. Dispose of chlorinated water in accordance with the submitted disinfection test plan and applicable requirements of federal, state, county, and city having jurisdiction over disposal of hazardous wastes in the location of the Project and disposal site.

C. Chlorinated water may only be disposed of in a sanitary sewer system with the written permission of the Owner. If allowed, discharge the chlorinated water at a low rate so it does not surcharge the sewer line.

3.06 BACTERIOLOGICAL TEST
A. Instruct bacteriological laboratory to collect water samples no sooner than 24 hours after start of disinfection of each facility.

B. Collect bacteriological quality samples at each of the following locations and other locations in accordance with the submitted disinfection test plan and Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater:

1. Where water enters system.

2. Inlet piping.

3. Ends of piping runs.

4. Drain lines.

5. Remote outlets.

6. Tanks.

7. At least 2 outlets on each building floor.

C. Analyze water samples in accordance with Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater.

D. When bacteriological test proves water quality to be unacceptable, repeat disinfection treatment process until water meets quality standards for disinfection.

END OF SECTION

Closeout Procedures
01770-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01770 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01770

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Contract closeout requirements.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA).

1.03 FINAL CLEANING
A. Perform final cleaning prior to inspections for Substantial Completion.

B. Employ skilled workers who are experienced in cleaning operations.

C. Use cleaning materials which are recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be cleaned.

D. Prevent scratching, discoloring, and otherwise damaging surfaces being cleaned.

E. Clean roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

F. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of site work:

1. Police yards and grounds to keep clean.

G. Remove dust, cobwebs, and traces of insects and dirt.

H. Clean grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, paint, blemishes, sealants, plaster, concrete, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed surfaces, and fixtures and equipment.

I. Remove non-permanent protection and labels.

J. Polish waxed woodwork and finish hardware.

K. Wash tile.

L. Wax and buff hard floors, as applicable.

M. Wash and polish glass, inside and outside.

N. Wash and shine mirrors.

O. Polish glossy surfaces to clear shine.

Closeout Procedures
01770-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01770 (DraftFinal) P. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

Q. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters when heating, ventilation, and air conditioning units were operated during construction.

R. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils when units were operated without filters during construction.

S. Clean light fixtures and replace burned-out or dim lamps.

T. Probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have been cleaned and are in like-new condition.

1.04 WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Arrange for and dispose of surplus materials, waste products, and debris off-site:

1. Prior to making disposal on private property, obtain written permission from the Owner of such property.

B. Do not fill ditches, washes, or drainage ways which may create drainage problems.

C. Do not create unsightly or unsanitary nuisances during disposal operations.

D. Maintain disposal site in safe condition and good appearance.

E. Complete leveling and cleanup prior to final completion of the Work.

1.05 TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR
A. Touch-up or repair finished surfaces on structures, equipment, fixtures, and installations that have been damaged prior to inspection for Substantial Completion.

B. Refinish or replace entire surfaces which cannot be touched-up or repaired satisfactorily.

1.06 FINAL CLEANING AND DISINFECTION OF SYSTEMS OF PLANT FACILITIES A. Clean channels, pipe, basins, reservoirs, and tanks before running of 7-day test, or before facility goes on stream when 7-day test is not required.

B. Wash, wherever practicable, or broom sweep channels, pipe, basins, reservoirs, and tanks.

C. Disinfect filter basins, reservoirs, clear wells, tanks, channels, and piping intended to carry potable water as follows or in accordance with AWWA Standards.

D. Provide ample sampling outlets in pipe for testing.

E. Fill pipe and other plant facilities with chlorine solution of sufficient strength to retain residual of not less than 10 parts per million at end of 24 hours.

Closeout Procedures
01770-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01770 (DraftFinal) F. When reservoirs and basins are too large to be economically disinfected by filling with chlorine solution, spray reservoirs and basins with solution containing 100 parts per million of chlorine.

G. After disinfection, rinse entire potable water system with potable water sufficient to reduce chlorine residual to not more than 0.6 parts per million throughout system before system is put into service.

1.07 FINAL CLEANING AND DISINFECTION OF SYSTEMS OF POTABLE WATER MAINS A. Clean interior of pipe and fittings.

B. When pipe contains dirt that cannot be removed by flushing, swab pipe interiors with solution containing not less than 500 parts per million of chlorine until clean.

C. Flush 12-inch diameter and smaller pipe as thoroughly as available water sources will permit.

D. Fill pipe with chlorine solution of sufficient strength to provide 10 parts per million chlorine residual at end of 24 hours.

E. Flush pipes with potable water until chlorine residual is less than 0.6 parts per million before pipes are put into service.

1.08 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS
A. Submit the following before Substantial Completion:

1. Punch list of items to be completed or corrected with the request for issuance of Substantial Completion.

2. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities.

3. Project Record Documents.

4. Approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

5. Approved Warranties and Bonds.

6. Keys and Keying Schedule.

7. Completed Contract requirements for Commissioning and process Start-Up.

B. Submit the following before final completion of the Work and at least 7 days prior to submitting Application for Final Payment:

1. Punch list items have been completed and the Engineer and Owner are satisfied that all deficiencies are corrected.

2. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens or Stop Payment Notices as outlined in Conditions of the Contract.

3. Release of claims as outlined in Conditions of the Contract.

4. Submit certification of insurance for products and completed operations, as specified in the General Conditions.

5. Final statement of accounting.

6. Submit Final (As-Built) Schedule as specified in Section 01321 - Schedules and Reports.

Closeout Procedures
01770-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01770 (DraftFinal)

1.09 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain at the Project Site, available to the Owner and Engineer, 1 copy of the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, and other Submittals in good order:

1. Mark and record field changes and detailed information contained in Submittals and Change Orders.

2. Record actual depths, horizontal and vertical location of underground pipes, duct banks, and other buried utilities. Reference dimensions to permanent surface features.

3. Identify specific details of pipe connections, location of existing buried features located during excavation, and the final locations of piping, equipment, electrical conduits, manholes, and pull boxes.

4. Identify location of spare conduits including beginning, ending, and routing through pull boxes and manholes. Record spare conductors, including number and size, within spare conduits and filled conduits.

5. Provide schedules, lists, layout drawings, and wiring diagrams.

6. Make annotations in electronic format. in accordance with the following color code:

Additions: Red
Deletions: Green
Comments Blue
Dimensions: Graphite
B. Maintain documents separate from those used for construction:

1. Label documents “RECORD DOCUMENTS.”
C. Keep documents current:

1. Record required information at the time the material and equipment is installed and before permanently concealing.

2. Engineer will review Record Documents weekly to ascertain that changes have been recorded.

D. Affix civil engineer’s or professional land surveyor’s signature and registration number to Record Drawings to certify accuracy of information shown.

E. Deliver Record Documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title, Contractor’s name and address, list of documents, and signature of the Contractor.

F. Record Documents will be reviewed monthly to determine the percent complete for the monthly pay application.

G. Updated Record Documents are a condition for the Engineer’s recommendation for progress payment.

H. Final Schedule Submittal as specified in Section 01321 - Schedules and Reports.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. As specified in Technical Specifications.

Closeout Procedures
01770-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01770 (DraftFinal)

1.11 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Obtain Certificate of Substantial Completion.

1.12 FINAL COMPLETION
A. When Contractor considers the Work is complete, submit written certification that:

1. Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Punch list items have been completed or corrected.

3. Work is ready for final inspection.

B. Engineer will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness.

C. Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective:

1. Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective Work.

2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send a second written certification to the Engineer that the Work is complete.

3. Engineer shall re-inspect the Work.

1.13 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer at least 7 days prior to final Application for Payment.

B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract amount.

1. The original Contract amount.

2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
a. Change Orders.
b. Units installed and unit prices.
c. Set-offs for uncorrected or incomplete Work.
d. Set-offs for liquidated damages.
e. Set-offs for reinspection payments.
f. Extended engineering and/or inspection services and inspection overtime. g. Excessive Shop Drawings review cost by the Engineer. h. Other adjustments.

3. Total Contract amount, as adjusted.

4. Previous payments.

5. Remaining payment due.

C. Engineer will prepare a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract amount which were not previously made by Change Orders.

1.14 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Submit the final Application for Payment reflecting the agreed upon information provided in the final statement of accounting.

Closeout Procedures
01770-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01770 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SPARE PARTS
A. Owner may request advanced delivery of spare parts, maintenance products, and special tools.

1. Deduct the delivered items from the inventory list and provide transmittal documentation.

B. Prior to Substantial Completion, arrange to deliver spare parts, maintenance products, and special tools to Owner at a location on site chosen by the Owner.

1. Provide an itemized list of spare parts and special tools that matches the identification tag attached to each item.

C. Owner and Engineer will review the inventory and the itemized list to confirm it is complete and in good condition prior to signing for acceptance, as specified in the Agreement and Contract RFP in Volumes 1 and 2.

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
01782-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01782 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01782

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Preparation and submittal of manual with requirements to operate and maintain the equipment.

1.02 PREPARATION
A. General requirements:

1. Provide dimensions in English units.

2. Assemble material, where possible, in the same order within each volume.

3. Reduce drawings and diagrams to 8 1/2 by 11-inch size, if possible unless otherwise specified.

4. Complete forms on computer, handwriting not acceptable.

5. Delete items or options not provided in the supplied equipment or system.

6. Provide package control system annotated ladder logic for PLC, if applicable.

B. Hard copy requirements:

1. Binders: 3-ring with rigid covers.
a. Break into separate binders as needed to accommodate large size.

2. Utilize numbered tab sheets to organize information.

3. Provide original and clear text on reproducible non-colored paper, 8 1/2 by 11-inch size, 24 pound paper.

4. Drawings larger than 8 1/2 by 11 inch:
a. Fold drawings separately and place in envelope bound into the manual. b. Label each drawing envelope on the outside regarding contents.

C. Electronic requirements:

1. File format:
a. Entire manual in PDF format.
1) Include text and drawing information.
2) Provide a single PDF file even if the hard copy version is broken into separate binders due to being large.
3) Create PDF from the native format of the document (Microsoft Word, graphics programs, drawing programs, etc.).
a) If material is not available in native format and only available in paper format, remove smudges, fingerprints, and other
extraneous marks before scanning to PDF format.
b) Hard copy record drawing requirements:
(1) Provide a single multipage PDF file of each set of the scanned drawings.
(2) Page 1 shall be the cover of the drawing set.

Operation and Maintenance Manuals
01782-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01782 (DraftFinal) c) At file opening, display the entire cover.
(1) Scan drawings at 200 to 300 dots per inch (DPI), black and white, Group IV Compression, unless otherwise specified. (2) Scan drawings with photos in the background at 400 dots per inch (DPI), black and white, Group IV Compression.
4) Pagination and appearance to match hard copy.
5) Searchable.
6) Scanned images are not acceptable.
7) Bookmarks:
a) Bookmarks shall match the table of contents.
b) Bookmark each section (tab) and heading.
c) Drawings: Bookmark at a minimum, each discipline, area designation, or appropriate division.
d) At file opening, display all levels of bookmarks as expanded. 8) Thumbnails optimized for fast web viewing.
b. Drawing requirements:
1) Provide additional copy of drawings in most current version of AutoCAD format.
2) Drawings shall have a white background.
3) Drawing shapes shall not degrade when closely zoomed. 4) Screening effects intended to de-emphasize detail in a drawing must be preserved.
5) Delete items or options not provided in the supplied equipment or system.

2. Media:
a. USB flash drive.
b. Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP).

3. Label media with the following information:
a. Operation and Maintenance Manual.
b. Equipment name.
c. Specification Section Number.
d. Equipment tag number.
e. Owner's name.
f. Project number and name.
g. Date.

4. If multiple submittals are made together, each submittal must have its own subdirectory that is named and numbered based on the submittal number.

1.03 CONTENTS
A. Table of Contents: General description of information provided within each tab section.

B. Complete Attachment A - Equipment Summary Form.

C. Description of system and components.

D. Description of equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

E. On-line resources.

Operation and Maintenance Manuals
01782-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01782 (DraftFinal) F. Telephone resources.

G. Approved submittals.

1. Markup with any field changes.

2. Final programming.

H. Start-up procedures: Recommendations for installation, adjustment, calibration, and troubleshooting.

I. Operating procedures:

1. Step-by-step instructions including but not limited to the following:
a. Safety precautions and applicable Safety Data Sheets. b. Guidelines.
c. Other information as needed for safe system operation and maintenance.

J. Preventative maintenance procedures:

1. Recommended steps and schedules for maintaining equipment.

2. Troubleshooting.

K. Lubrication information: Required lubricants and lubrication schedules.

L. Overhaul instructions: Directions for disassembly, inspection, repair, and reassembly of the equipment; safety precautions; and recommended tolerances, critical bolt torques, and special tools that are required.

M. Manufacturer's technical reference manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Operation and Maintenance Manuals
01782-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01782 (DraftFinal)

ATTACHMENT A - EQUIPMENT SUMMARY FORM

Operation and Maintenance Manuals
01782-Attachment A-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01782 (DraftFinal)

EQUIPMENT SUMMARY FORM

1. EQUIPMENT ITEM

2. MANUFACTURER

3. EQUIPMENT TAG NUMBER(S)

4. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT

5. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS)

6. NAMEPLATE DATA -
Horsepower
Amperage
Voltage
Service Factor (S.F.)
Speed
ENC Type
Capacity
Other

7. MANUFACTURER'S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE
Name
Address
Telephone Number

8. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS:

Maintenance
Operation Frequency
Lubricant (if
applicable) Comments
(List each operation
required. Refer to
specific information in
Manufacturer’s
Manual, if applicable)
(List required
frequency of each
maintenance
operation)
(Refer by symbol to
lubricant list as
required)
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
01782-Attachment A-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01782 (DraftFinal)

9. LUBRICANT LIST:

Reference
Symbol Conoco Phillips Exxon/Mobil BP/Amoco Other (List) (Symbols used in
Item 7 above)
(List equivalent lubricants, as distributed by each manufacturer for the specific use recommended)

10. SPARE PARTS (recommendations)

11. COMMENTS

12. GENERAL INFORMATION:

Date Accepted*:

Expected Life*:

Project Name &
Number:

Design Engineer:

13. WARRANTY:

Start Date:

Expiration Date:

Prorated:

Warranties and Bonds
01783-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01783 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01783

WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Warranty and bonds requirements.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. For each item of material or equipment furnished under the Contract:

1. Submit manufacturer’s warranty prior to fabrication and shipment of the item from the manufacturer’s facility.

2. Submit manufacturer’s special warranty when specified.

B. Provide consolidated warranties and bonds within 15 calendar days of Substantial Completion.

1. Contents:
a. Organize warranty and bond documents:
1) Include Table of Contents organized by Specification Section number and the name of the product or work item.
b. Include each required warranty and bond in proper form, with full information, certified by manufacturer as required, and properly executed by Contractor, or subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. c. Provide name, address, phone number, and point of contact of manufacturer, supplier, and installer, as applicable.

2. Hardcopy format:
a. Submit 2 copies.
b. Assemble in 3 D-side ring binders with durable cover. c. Identify each binder on the front and spine with typed or printed title “Warranties and Bonds”; Project Name or Title, and the Name Address and Telephone Number of the Contractor.

3. Electronic copy in PDF format:
a. Submit 1 copy.

1.03 OWNER’S RIGHTS
A. Owner reserves the right to reject warranties.

B. Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the project if the required warranties have not been provided.

Warranties and Bonds
01783-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01783 (DraftFinal)

1.04 RELATIONSHIP TO GENERAL WARRANTY AND CORRECTION PERIOD A. Warranties specified for materials and equipment shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, both Contractor's general warranty and the correction period requirements.

B. Disclaimers and limitations in specific materials and equipment warranties do not limit Contractor’s general warranty, nor does such affect or limit Contractor’s performance obligations under the correction period.

1.05 MANUFACTURER’S 1 YEAR WARRANTY MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS A. Written warranty issued by item’s manufacturer.

B. Project-specific information, properly executed by product manufacturer, and expressly states that its provisions are for the benefit of the Contractor.

C. Covers all costs associated with the correction of the defect, including, but not limited to, removal of defective parts, new parts, labor, and shipping.

D. Provides a timely response to correct the defect.

1. Manufacturer shall provide, in a timely fashion, temporary equipment as necessary to replace warranted items requiring repair or replacement, when warranted items are in use and are critical to the treatment process, as defined by Owner.

E. Warranty commence running on the date of substantial completion.

1. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit warranty within 10 calendar days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty period.

F. Duration of warranty: 1 year.

1.06 MANUFACTURER’S SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s special warranty is a written warranty published by the manufacturer which includes the requirements as specified in the Technical Section.

1. Project-specific information and requirements.

2. Properly executed by product manufacturer.

3. Expressly states that its provisions are for the benefit of the Contractor or Owner.

4. Manufacturer’s special warranties commence on the date that the associated item is certified by Engineer as substantially complete.

B. This equipment has been classified as critical. Provide a 2-year duration special warranty, as specified in Technical Specifications:

1. Section 11242 - Liquid Chemical Double Diaphragm Metering Pumps.

2. Section 11249 - Packaged Fluoride System.

3. Section 11313 - Vertical Turbine Pumps.

4. Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower.

Warranties and Bonds
01783-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01783 (DraftFinal)

5. Section 16265 - Reduced Harmonic Variable Frequency Drives.

6. Section 16444 - Low Voltage Motor Control Centers.

C. This equipment has been classified as critical with a minimum 5-year warranty, as specified in Technical Specifications:

1. Section 15739 - VRF Heat Pumps.

1.07 WARRANTY WORK
A. Contractor’s responsibilities:

1. Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the product, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with Contractor.

B. Replacement cost:

1. Upon determination that work covered by warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirement of the Contract Documents.
a. Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether Owner has benefited from the use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

C. Related damages and losses:

1. When correcting warranted work that has failed, remove and replace other work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work.

D. Owner’s recourse:

1. Written warranties are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitation on time in which Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

E. Reinstatement of warranty:

1. When work covered by a warranty has failed and has been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. a. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

1.08 IMPLIED WARRANTIES
A. Warranty of title and intellectual rights:

1. Except as may be otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, implied warranty of title required by Laws and Regulations is applicable to the Work and to materials and equipment incorporated therein.

2. Provisions on intellectual rights, including patent fees and royalties, are in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions.

B. Implied warranties: Duration in accordance with Laws and Regulations.

Warranties and Bonds
01783-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01783 (DraftFinal)

1.09 BONDS
A. Equipment bond and other bond requirements as specified in the Technical Sections.

B. Bonds commence running on the date of substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Design Criteria
01850-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01850 (DraftFinal) SECTION 01850

DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Design criteria for use in the selection of equipment and appurtenances specified in Technical Sections of these Specifications and indicated on the Drawings.

2. Criteria for design of systems, components and equipment fabricated off site and shipped to the Work for installation.

3. Criteria for design of anchors to connect equipment and appurtenances to supports and structures.

B. The criteria in this Section apply throughout the Work, unless additional criteria, or more restrictive criteria, are indicated.

1. Additional criteria and requirements relevant to specific locations, specific materials, and specific equipment are indicated on the Drawings, and in the Technical Sections.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1. 7-16 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures. (ASCE 7).

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):

1. ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook.

C. International Code Council (ICC):

1. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC).

2. International Plumbing Code (IPC).

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA):

1. Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, 3rd edition 2008.

Design Criteria
01850-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01850 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA - SITE INFORMATION
Table: Site Locations and Elevations
Site Name
Coordinates(1)
Site
Elevation(1)
Design
Groundwater
Elevation(1)
Latitude Longitude (feet) (feet)
Misty Wood ASR Well (Well 19) 38.7715° -121.3185° 120 to 137 95 to 100(2) Campus Oaks Well (Well 13) 38.7917° -121.3219° 128 to 131 19 to 67 Notes:
(1) Approximate, NAVD88.
(2) Perched groundwater has been observed 6 feet below the ground surface, approximately at elevation 124 in January 2023.Approximate.

2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the Project are included in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.

2.03 DESIGN CRITERIA - OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
A. Drawings and Technical Sections include additional criteria and requirements relevant to specific locations, materials, and equipment.

B. Outdoor conditions:

1. IECC: Climate Zone 3B.

2. ASHRAE site climatic data location: Sacramento McClellan, CA, USA.

3. Temperature criteria: As specified in the following Table: Design Temperatures - Outdoor Criteria in Accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook.

Table: Design Temperatures - Outdoor Criteria in Accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook
Condition Criteria
Hottest Month DB Range: 114 degrees Fahrenheit.

Winter: At or above this temperature 99.6 percent of the time:

31.7 degrees Fahrenheit dry-bulb.

Summer: At or above this temperature 0.4 percent of the time:
101.8 degrees Fahrenheit dry-bulb.

4. Rainfall intensity:
a. Reference: International Plumbing Code (IPC):
1) 1.5 inches per hour (100-year, 1-hour rainfall).

Design Criteria
01850-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01850 (DraftFinal) C. Indoor conditions:

1. HVAC:
a. As specified in Section 15936 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.

2.04 DESIGN CRITERIA - STRUCTURAL
A. General:

1. Criteria for structural design of:
a. Equipment at locations subject to seismic events.
b. Equipment exposed to outdoor environments.
c. Equipment supports and bracing, and anchorage of such items to building and non-building structures.
d. Structures provided for the Work through Delegated Design. e. Manufactured and prefabricated structures, and anchorage of such structures to foundations or other supporting elements.

2. Structural design criteria used by the Engineer of record and required by the building code to be indicated on the Drawings are included on the Contract Drawing titled “General Structural Notes.”
B. Structure risk category:

1. Develop design loads and provide detailing in accordance with the provisions of ASCE 7 and the building code specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements, based on the Structure Risk Category indicated in Table:

Project Structures - Risk Category and Seismic Design Information.

C. Seismic loads:

1. Structures - General:
a. Seismic Design Category (SDC): As indicated in the following Table:

Project Structures - Risk Category and Seismic Design Information.

Table: Project Structures - Risk Category and Seismic Design Information Description: Water Treatment Facility
Area Description
Risk
Category
Site
Class SDS SD1
Seismic
Design
Category(1)
Misty Wood ASR Well (Well 19) III D 0.43 0.32 C
Campus Oaks Well (Well 13) III D 0.43 0.32 C
Notes:
(1) Seismic Design Category for Delegated Design, and for seismic certification of electrical and mechanical equipment as required by ASCE 7.
b. Structure response modification coefficient, R:
1) In accordance with ASCE 7 and the requirements of the Technical Sections.

2. Structures - Tanks and vessels.
a. Includes: Tank structures, tank supports, and anchorage to structures or foundations.
b. Liquid storage structures (e.g., basins and tanks).
1) Include impulsive and convective (“sloshing”) effects.

Design Criteria
01850-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01850 (DraftFinal) 2) Component response modification factor - impulsive effects, Ri: In accordance with ASCE 7, Table 15.4-2.
3) Component response modification factor - convective effects, Rc = 1.0. c. Dry material storage structures (e.g., silos, hoppers):
1) Include effects of stored materials.
2) Component response modification factor - impulsive effects, Ri: In accordance with ASCE 7, Table 15.4-2.

3. Non-structural components - General:
a. Includes:
1) Mechanical and electrical equipment; anchorage of equipment to structures or supports; design of supports; and anchorage of supports to structures or foundations.
2) Distribution systems associated with mechanical and electrical equipment such as piping, ductwork, conduits, cable trays, raceways, bus ducts, and similar items; anchorage of such systems to supports and structures; and bracing or such systems.
b. Seismic design requirements for non-structural components are based on the Seismic Design Category (SDC) of the structure or facility where the equipment is installed.
c. Design components, component anchorage, and component connections to piping and utilities in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7, Table 13.2-1.
d. Component amplification factor (ap), response factor (Rp), and overstrength factor for anchorage to concrete (Ωo):
1) Mechanical and electrical components and systems: In accordance with ASCE 7, Table 13.6-1, unless otherwise indicated in the Technical Sections for these items.
2) Architectural components and systems: In accordance with ASCE 7, Table 13.6-1, unless otherwise indicated in the Technical Sections for these items.
e. Component importance factor, Ip:
1) In accordance with the following Table: Component Importance Factor for Seismic Design, Ip.
2) For items not listed in Table: Component Importance Factor for Seismic Design, Ip, designate importance factor in accordance with the provisions of ASCE 7, Chapter 13, and submit to the Engineer for review prior to developing calculations and details related to that component.

Table: Component Importance Factor for Seismic Design, Ip Structure
Seismic Design
Category Components Ip
All Electrical: Items and distribution system components specified in Division 16 - Electrical. 1.5
All
Process Control and Instrumentation Systems: Components and distribution systems specified in Division 17 - Instrumentation and Controls.

1.5 Design Criteria
01850-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01850 (DraftFinal) Table: Component Importance Factor for Seismic Design, Ip Structure
Seismic Design
Category Components Ip
All Fire protection: Components and distribution systems specified in Section 10520 - Fire Protection Specialties. 1.5
All
Conveyance and distribution systems and supports for toxic, highly toxic, hazardous, or explosive substances as specified in Divisions 6 through 15.

1.5 All Equipment and components specified in Divisions 11 through 15, except HVAC and plumbing components listed below. 1.5
All
Plumbing equipment specified in the following Sections:
15400 - Plumbing Systems
15430 - Emergency Eye/Face Wash and Shower Equipment

1.0 All HVAC equipment specified in the following Sections:
15739 - VRF Heat Pumps
15762 - Heating Units
15830 - Fans

1.0 All Other equipment not listed above. 1.0

4. Non-structural components: HVAC ductwork.
a. Component importance factor, Ip: Determine in accordance with ASCE 7, Section 15.4.1.1.
b. Seismic design category:
1) See Table: Component Importance Factor for Seismic Design, Ip (preceding).
c. SMACNA seismic hazard level.
1) Seismic hazard level for design of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning ductwork in accordance with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual:
a) SMACNA Seismic hazard level = D.

D. Wind loads:

1. Design structures and non-structural components that are exposed to wind to withstand design wind loads.
a. Reduction of wind loads based on shielding effects of surrounding structures or components is not allowed.
b. Design for wind loading is not required for non-structural components and for non-building structures located inside enclosed buildings.

2. Design parameters:
a. Basic wind speed:
1) 100 miles per hour (33 feet, 3 second gust).
b. Exposure category: C.
c. Topographic factor, Kzt: 1.0.
d. Wind pressure for design of “components and cladding”. 1) “Components and cladding” includes doors, windows, siding panels, skylights, parapets, and similar architectural elements.

Design Criteria
01850-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01850 (DraftFinal) 2) Minimum wind pressure for components and cladding, strength level:
a) Wall elements: Minimum 16 pounds per square foot, pressure or vacuum.
b) Roof elements: Minimum 16 pounds per square foot, pressure or vacuum.
c) For “allowable stress level” pressures, multiply strength level pressures by 0.625.

E. Rainfall loads:

1. Determine rainfall loads using rainfall intensity specified in this Section, and including effects of exposed surface slope, height above surface to discharge elevation, and deflection of ponded surfaces.

F. Operational loads:

1. Loads may include equipment vibration, torque, thermal effects, effects of internal contents (weight and sloshing), surge or “water hammer,” and other load conditions.

2. Design for loads indicated by the equipment manufacturer.

3. Design for loads indicated in the Technical Sections for equipment and appurtenances.

G. Serviceability considerations: ASCE 7-16:

1. Deflection, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, or specified:
a. Beam deflection as fraction of span:
1) Walkways and platforms: Total load = L/240; live load = L/360. 2) Equipment supports: L/450.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Design approach and criteria in accordance with:

1. Regulatory requirements, including but not limited to the building code specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.

2. Reference standards and project-specific design criteria listed in this Section.

3. Specific requirements for individual elements and components of the Work as specified in subsequent Technical Sections.

B. In the event of conflicts between design criteria, contact Engineer for interpretation.

C. Where Owner-Delegated Design is required by the Specifications, prepare and submit designs as specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

3.02 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Where Delegated Design is required by the Technical Sections, prepare and submit designs as specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

Design Criteria
01850-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01850 (DraftFinal) B. Calculations:

1. Where submittal of calculations is required:
a. Provide complete calculations, including sketches to illustrate the design concepts being evaluated, and details to fully describe proposed construction.

2. Requirements for seismic design calculations will be waived for the following:
a. Furniture and storage racks 6 feet in height or less. b. Moveable equipment.
c. Mechanical and electrical equipment and components located in structures designated as Seismic Design Category A or B. d. Mechanical and electrical equipment and components located in structures designated as Seismic Design Category C and where the component importance factor, Ip, is equal to 1.0.

3. Requirements for wind design calculations will be waived for the following:
a. Equipment and components located inside structures, and away from the effects of wind loads.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Describing components and manufacturer’s requirements for connections. a. Include details for connections of components to structures and supports. b. Include details for anchoring bracing to structures where required.

3.03 DESIGN - ANCHORS FOR EQUIPMENT, COMPONENTS, AND BRACING A. General:

1. Engineer’s approval of anchor designs is required before placement of construction that supports or provides bracing for anchored equipment and components.
a. Prepare anchor designs after Engineer’s approval of the products and layout, and before placement of concrete or masonry that supports them.

2. Adjust equipment pad sizes and add additional anchor confinement reinforcing to provide required strength at anchorage points between equipment and pad, and between pad and structure.

3. Supports and bracing:
a. Design and install braces and anchors to transfer forces from equipment and components to the lateral force resisting system of the surrounding structure.
b. Anchor and brace piping, ductwork, and electrical distribution components so that lateral or vertical displacement does not result in damage to or failure of essential architectural, mechanical, or electrical equipment. 1) Provide supplementary framing where required to transfer forces. 2) Detail and locate braces and anchors to minimize differential movements between components and structure.

B. Preparation:

1. Obtain manufacturer’s information:
a. Weight and dimensions of components.
b. Layout and location of anchors that connect to equipment base plates, sole plates, skids, or pads.
c. Sizes of holes for anchors that will be provided in equipment bases or support frames.

Design Criteria
01850-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01850 (DraftFinal) C. Analysis and design:

1. Perform and submit calculations to determine anchor designs at locations where equipment and equipment supports are connected to the supporting structure.
a. Indicate number, size, type, and material for anchors.

2. In determining forces at locations where equipment is anchored to structures, include effects of:
a. Equipment self-weight and operating weight.
b. Location of equipment center of mass.
c. Forces from equipment operation including, but not limited to:
1) Effects of internal contents including weight and sloshing. 2) Effects of thrust, surge, and water hammer where specified. 3) Equipment reactions and operating torque.
4) Equipment vibration.
5) Thermal effects from equipment and from distribution systems connected to the equipment (piping, ducts, and electrical). 6) Other load or displacement inducing conditions.
d. Forces on equipment from loads specified in this Section. 1) Include effects of wind, snow, and icing loads where applicable. 2) Design for load combinations indicated in ASCE 7, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
3) Seismic and wind loads: For equipment and tanks with weight that varies based on the volume of contained material, determine anchor forces to accommodate the full range of filled, partially filled, and empty conditions.

3. Determine forces and overturning moments at equipment supports and at locations where supports are anchored to structures.
a. Indicate shear force and associated axial force at each anchor.

4. Do not use friction to resist sliding resulting from seismic or wind forces. a. Resist sliding only by direct application of sliding loads to fasteners as bearing, shear, tension, or compression forces.

5. Using combined shears and axial forces at each anchor, design anchors and anchor groups for ductile failure.
a. Ductile failure: Anchor yield before failure of base material, typically concrete or masonry, at the anchor.

6. Anchor selection:
a. Provide anchors type indicated on the Drawings.
b. Where anchors are not specifically indicated on the Drawings, select in accordance with the following:
1) Anchors that resist seismic and wind forces:
a) Cast-in-place forged hex-head anchor bolt.
2) Anchors loaded in sustained tension:
a) Cast-in-place forged hex-head anchor bolt.
3) Anchors for reciprocating, vibrating, and rotating equipment:
a) Cast-in-place forged hex-head anchor bolt.
c. Do not use post-installed anchors, mechanical or adhesive, unless:
1) Post-installed anchors are indicated on the Drawings. 2) Post-installed are approved by the Engineer prior to placement of the surrounding concrete or masonry.

Design Criteria
01850-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/01850 (DraftFinal) d. Anchor diameter:
1) Select diameter so that hole in base plate is not greater than 125 percent of the nominal diameter of the anchor, nor greater than the diameter of the anchor plus 1/4 inch.

7. Determine number, size, layout, and minimum effective embedment for anchors. a. Layout includes anchor spacing and required distance(s) from anchor to edge(s) of supporting concrete or masonry.
b. Anchors in concrete: Design based on minimum specified 28-day compressive strength, f’c, as follows, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings for the Work area:
1) Concrete placed for this Work: f’c = 4,000 pounds per square inch. c. Anchors in masonry: Design based on minimum specified compressive strength, f’m, as follows, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings for the Work area:
1) Concrete masonry placed for this Work: f’m = 1,500 pounds per square inch.

8. Prepare Drawings showing construction details of anchor designs.

9. Submit design calculations and Drawings prior to placement of anchors, and of the structural elements to which they will connect.

END OF SECTION

Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork
02050-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02050 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02050

SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Material requirements for soils and aggregates.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. T 11 - Standard Method of Test for Materials Finer than 75µm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

2. T 27 - Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

3. T 89 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils.

4. T 90 - Standard Method of Test for Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.

5. T 96 - Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

6. T 104 - Standard Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.

7. TP 95 - Standard Method of Test for Surface.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. C117 - Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

2. C131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

3. C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

4. C535 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Larger-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

5. D2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate.

6. D2844 - Standard Test Method for Resistance R-Value and Expansion Pressure of Compacted Soils.

7. D4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

8. D4829 - Standard Test Method for Expansion Index of Soils.

9. D5821 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured Particles in Coarse Aggregate.

C. California State Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation (CALTRANS):

1. (Standard Specifications).

Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork
02050-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02050 (DraftFinal)

2. California Test Methods (CTM):
a. California Test 205 - Method of Test for Determining Crushed Particles. b. California Test 211 - Method of Test for Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate by Use of the Los Angeles Abrasion Testing Machine.
c. California Test 217 - Method of Test for Sand Equivalent. d. California Test 229 - Method of Test for Durability Index. e. California Test 301 - Method of Test for Determining the Resistance “R” Value of Treated and Untreated Bases, Subbases, and Basement Soils by the Stabilometer.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:

1. Material source.

2. Gradation.

3. Testing data.

B. Quality control for aggregate base course:

1. Test reports: As required by Sections of Standard Specifications.

2. Certificates of compliance: Certificates As required by Sections of Standard Specifications.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and protection: Protect from segregation and excessive moisture during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Comply with Standard Specifications storage requirements, if applicable.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Provide material having maximum particle size not exceeding 4 inches and that is free of trash, lumber, debris, leaves, grass, roots, stumps, and other organic matter.

B. Materials derived from processing demolished or removed asphalt concrete are not acceptable.

C. Comply with soil and aggregate material requirements in the Standard Specifications, unless specified otherwise.

2.02 NATIVE MATERIAL
A. Native soil-select:

1. Sound earthen material.

2. Sum of plasticity index when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318 and the percent of material by weight passing a No. 200 sieve shall not exceed 23 when tested in accordance with ASTM C136.

3. Organic content not be greater than 3 percent by volume.

Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork
02050-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02050 (DraftFinal)

4. Corrosion resistance requirements:
a. Resistivity minimum (wet aggregates): 5,000 ohm-cm.
b. pH: 5.0 to 12.0.
c. Chlorides maximum: 100 parts per million.
d. Sulfates maximum: 200 parts per million.

2.03 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
Material requirements:

1. Class 2, 3/4-inch maximum aggregate size, free from organic matter and other deleterious substances, and of such nature that aggregate can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base.

2. Aggregate base course for structures:
a. Consist of crushed or fragmented particles.
b. Coarse aggregate material retained in No. 4 sieve shall consist of material of which at least 25 percent by weight shall be crushed particles when tested in accordance with California Test 205.

3. Aggregate shall not be treated with lime, cement, or other chemical material.

4. Durability index: Not less than 35 when tested in accordance with California Test 229.

5. Aggregate grading and sand equivalent tests shall be performed to represent not more than 500 cubic yards or 1 day’s production of material, whichever is smaller.

6. Sand equivalent: Not less than 25 when tested in accordance with California Test 217.

7. Resistance (R-value): Not less than 78 when tested in accordance with California Test 301.

8. Conforms to size and grade within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136:

Sieve Sizes
(Square Openings)
Percent by Weight
Passing Sieve
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90 - 100
No. 4 35 - 60
No. 30 10 - 30
No. 200 2 - 9

2.04 GRAVEL
A. Material requirements:

1. Consists of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel; or crushed to the specified sizes and gradations; and free from organic matter, lumps or balls of clay, and other deleterious matter.

2. Crush or waste coarse material and add or waste fine material in order to meet the specified gradations.

3. Fraction of material passing No. 40 sieve: Material having plasticity index not greater than 5 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318.

Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork
02050-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02050 (DraftFinal)

4. Durability: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when tested in accordance with California Test 211.

5. Conforms to sizes and grade within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136:

Sieve Size
(Square Openings)
Percent by Weight
Passing Sieve
Type A Type B Type C
2 inch 100 -- --
1-1/2 inch 95 - 100 100 --
3/4 inch 35 - 60 55 - 85 100
3/8 inch 15 - 40 35 - 65 50 - 100
No. 4 0 - 25 20 - 35 30 - 45
No. 30 -- 5 - 15 10 - 20
No. 200 0 - 5 2 - 9 2 - 9

2.05 DRAIN ROCK
A. Material requirements:

1. Durability index: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when tested in accordance with California Test 229.

2. Consists of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel; screened or crushed to specified size and gradation; and free from organic matter, lumps or balls of clay, or other deleterious matter.

3. Crush or waste coarse material and waste fine material as required to meet gradation requirements.

4. Conforms to size and grade within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136:

Sieve Size
(Square Openings)
Percent by Weight
Passing Sieve
2 inch 100
1-1/2 inch 95 - 100
3/4 inch 50 - 100
3/8 inch 15 - 55
No. 200 0 - 2

2.06 CLASS 2 PERMEABLE FILL
A. Material requirements:

1. Durability index: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when tested in accordance with California Test 229.

Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork
02050-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02050 (DraftFinal)

2.07 IMPORTED FILL
A. Material requirements: Refer to native soil-select.

1. Free of contaminants: CONTRACTOR shall sample soil for common contaminants derived from petroleum products.

2.08 SAND
A. Clean, coarse, natural sand.

B. Non-plastic when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318.

C. Conforms to size and grade within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136:

Sieve Size
(Square Openings)
Percent by Weight
Passing Sieve
1/2 inch 100
No. 200 0 - 20

2.09 STABILIZATION MATERIAL
A. Durability: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when tested in accordance with California Test 211.

B. Consists of clean, hard, durable particles of crushed rock or gravel; screened or crushed to the specified sizes and gradations; and free of any detrimental quantity of soft, friable, thin, elongated, or laminated pieces, disintegrated material, organic matter, oil, alkali, or other deleterious substance.

C. Shall be free of slaking or decomposition under the action of alternate wetting and drying.

D. The portion of material retained on the 3/8-inch sieve shall contain at least 50 percent of particles having 3 or more fractured faces.

1. Not over 5 percent shall be pieces that show no such faces resulting from crushing. Of that portion which passes the 3/8-inch sieve but is retained on the No. 4 sieve, not more than 10 percent shall be pieces that show no faces resulting from crushing.

E. Conforms to size and grade within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136:

Sieve Size
(Square Openings)
Percent by Weight
Passing Sieve
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90 - 100
Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork
02050-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02050 (DraftFinal) Sieve Size
(Square Openings)
Percent by Weight
Passing Sieve
No. 4 0 - 10
No. 200 0 - 2
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION
Precast Drainage Structures
02084-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02084 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02084

PRECAST DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Onsite utility structures:
a. Precast drainage inlets.
b. Standpipes for irrigation or drainage pipes.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. C361 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low-Head Pressure Pipe.

2. C478 - Standard Specification for Circular Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections.

3. C857 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

4. C858 - Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for precast utility structures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Precast drainage inlets:

1. Construct precast concrete drainage inlets in accordance with the size, shape, form, details, and at locations indicated on the Drawings and specified.

2. Base design and manufacture to A-16 (HS 20-44) loading in accordance with ASTM C857.

3. In accordance with ASTM C858.

4. Construct precast drainage inlets of Class A concrete as specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete to form and dimensions indicated on the Drawings.

B. Appurtenances and details for precast structures:

1. Seal joints with precast concrete joint sealant.

Precast Drainage Structures
02084-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02084 (DraftFinal)

2. Piping penetrations:
a. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) Kor-N-Seal, rubber gasket boots with steel clamps.

3. Piping connections to the precast structures shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Performance requirements:

1. Appurtenances shall be watertight and free from infiltration or exfiltration.

2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Precast drainage inlets:

1. Covers: As indicated on the Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Standpipes for irrigation or drainage pipes:

1. Excavation and backfill: As specified in Section 02318 - Trenching.

B. Precast drainage inlets:

1. Excavation and backfill: As specified in Section 02318 - Trenching.

END OF SECTION
Site Clearing
02200-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02200 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02200

SITE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Clearing, grubbing, and stripping project site.

1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Clearing: Consists of removal of natural obstructions and existing foundations, buildings, fences, lumber, walls, stumps, brush, weeds, rubbish, trees, boulders, utility lines, and any other items which interferes with construction operations or are designated for removal.

B. Grubbing: Consists of the removal and disposal of wood or root matter below the ground surface remaining after clearing and includes stumps, trunks, roots, or root systems greater than 1 inch in diameter or thickness to a depth of 6 inches below the ground surface.

C. Stripping: Includes the removal and disposal of all organic sod, topsoil, grass and grass roots, and other objectionable material remaining after clearing and grubbing from the areas designated to be stripped. The depth of stripping is estimated to be 6 inches, but the required depth of stripping will be determined by the Engineer.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory requirements: Verify and comply with applicable regulations regarding those governing noise, dust, nuisance, drainage and runoff, fire protection, and disposal.

B. Pre-construction conference: Meet with Engineer to discuss order and method of work.

1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Clearing and grubbing: Perform clearing and grubbing in advance of grading operations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
Site Clearing
02200-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02200 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Examine site and verify existing conditions for beginning work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect existing improvements from damage by site preparation work.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Clearing:

1. Clear areas where construction is to be performed and other areas as indicated on the Drawings, or specified in this Section, of fences, lumber, walls, stumps, brush, roots, weeds, trees, shrubs, rubbish, and other objectionable material of any kind which, if left in place, would interfere with proper performance or completion of the work, would impair its subsequent use, or form obstructions.

2. Do not incorporate organic material from clearing and grubbing operations in fills and backfills.

3. Contractor's temporary construction facilities: Fill or remove pits, fill, and other earthwork required for erection of facilities, upon completion of the work, and level to meet existing contours of adjacent ground.

B. Grubbing:

1. From excavated areas: Grub stumps, roots, and other obstructions 3 inches or over in diameter to depth of not less than 18 inches below finish grade.

2. Backfill and compact cavities left below subgrade elevation by removal of stumps or roots to density of adjacent undisturbed soil.

C. Stripping:

1. Remove soil material containing sod, grass, or other vegetation to depth of 6 inches from areas to receive fill or pavement and from area within 5 feet outside foundation walls.

2. Deposit stripped material in accordance with following requirements:
a. At locations acceptable to Engineer and Owner.
b. Use accepted material in top 6 inches of areas to be used for future planting.

3. Replace topsoil where indicated on the Drawings.

D. Material reuse and recycling:

1. 100 percent of trees, stumps, rocks and associated vegetation and soils resulting primarily from land clearing shall be reused or recycled. For a phased project, such material may be stockpiled on site until project completion.

2. Contractor shall provide Engineer with list of local markets and salvage sites for reuse of clearing debris.

END OF SECTION
Dewatering
02240-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02240 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02240

DEWATERING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Installation and maintenance of dewatering systems.

2. Disposal of water entering excavation or other parts of the work.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Dewatering plan:

1. Dewatering design analysis.

2. Required permits.

3. Arrangement, location, and depths of dewatering system components.

4. Type and sizes of filters.

5. Identify proposed alignment, support, and protection for discharge pipe.

Identify location of discharge and provide details for that location. For pipes discharging to manholes, provide details of pipe entry at manhole.

B. Well construction logs. Include:

1. Descriptions of actual materials encountered, categorized in accordance with an accepted standard.

2. Construction details.

3. Well development procedures and results.

4. Deviations from original design.

C. Qualifications:

1. Dewatering contractor.

2. Dewatering design engineer.

3. Testing laboratory.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Dewatering plan and dewatering system analysis:

1. Prepared by a qualified Civil Engineer, licensed in the state where the Project is located.
a. The dewatering design engineer shall have at least 8 years of experience in designing similar systems.

Dewatering
02240-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02240 (DraftFinal) B. Dewatering Contractor shall have at least 8 years of experience in installing similar systems.

C. Testing laboratory shall meet discharge permit testing laboratory qualifications.

D. Regulatory requirements:

1. Obtain required water discharge permits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Design requirements:

1. Keep excavations reasonably free from water. Draw down static groundwater level to minimum of 3 feet below anticipated bottom of excavations before the excavation reaches bottom elevation.

2. Dewatering design analysis. Include the following:
a. Evaluation of anticipated subsurface conditions.
b. Required well spacing.
c. Diameter of wells.
d. Depth to screen, screen height, and mesh size.
e. Backfill and filter pack.
f. Pump size.
g. Drawdown duration.
h. Drawdown and steady state flow rates.
i. Plans for de-silting of groundwater before discharge. j. Anticipated area influenced by dewatering system and potential impacts to adjacent structures, existing and proposed. Mitigation measures needed to prevent any expected settlements. Contingency plan for restoring nearby structures if settlement is observed as result of dewatering operations.
k. Expected settlements.

3. Include water drawdown curves in dewatering calculations.

4. Coordinate dewatering design with excavation and shoring design. Excavation and shoring design shall consider changes in groundwater conditions and associated earth pressures.

5. Do not place concrete or masonry foundations or concrete slabs in water. Do not allow water to rise over these elements until concrete or mortar has set for at least 24 hours.

6. Maintain operation of dewatering system until complete structure -- including walls, slabs, beams, struts, and other structural elements -- has been constructed; concrete has attained its specified compressive strength; and backfill has been completed to finished grade.

7. Provide standby power to ensure continuous dewatering in case of power failure.

B. Dewatering shored excavations:

1. Dewater from within shoring.

2. Use impermeable shoring system to minimize lowering of groundwater outside shoring.

Dewatering
02240-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02240 (DraftFinal)

3. Extend impermeable shoring below bottom of excavation sufficient amount to:
a. Minimize lowering of groundwater outside shoring.
b. Prevent unstable excavation due to piping and heave.

4. To minimize settlement outside shoring due to dewatering, do not lower groundwater outside shoring more than 1 foot. Provide groundwater recharge if required to maintain this groundwater elevation outside of shoring.

5. Provide monitoring wells located outside shoring for monitoring groundwater elevation.

C. Obtain written permission from Engineer before locating wells, well points, or drain lines for dewatering within the limits of a structure’s foundation.

D. Locate dewatering facilities where they will not interfere with utilities and construction work to be performed by others.

E. Discharge:

1. Discharge water to locations as identified by the City of Roseville. Discharge to manholes or storm drain inlets will not be permitted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The responsibility for conducting the dewatering operation in a manner which will protect adjacent structures and facilities rests solely with Contractor.

B. During construction, provide and maintain ample means and devices to promptly remove and properly dispose of water entering excavation or other parts of the work, whether water is surface water or underground water.

C. Keep excavations reasonably free of water.

D. Make provisions to maintain continuous dewatering:

1. Provide standby power to maintain dewatering during power outages and interruptions.

2. Provide 24-hour monitoring by personnel skilled in operation and maintenance of the system, and capable of providing or obtaining work required to maintain system operation.

E. Intercept and divert precipitation and surface water away from excavations. Use dikes, curb walls, ditches, pipes, sumps, or other means acceptable to Engineer.

F. Disposal of water:

1. Dispose of water from the work in suitable manner without damage to adjacent property.

2. Do not drain water into work built or under construction.

Dewatering
02240-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02240 (DraftFinal)

3. Properly dispose of discharge water in accordance with Federal, State, and local requirements and permits and in such manner that it will not be a menace to public health or safety.

4. For discharge of water into holding tanks or infiltration ponds, include a means of overflow protection that is acceptable to Engineer.

G. Wells, well points, and drain lines for dewatering:

1. Provide after receiving Engineer's written acceptance.

2. Fill dewatering wells, pipes, and French drains to be left in place within structure foundation limits with Class “C” concrete as specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete or grout as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. Prior to release of groundwater to its static level: Confirm that:

1. All groundwater pressure relief devices for structure are fully operational.

2. Construction of structure is complete and concrete has reached its specified compressive strength.

3. Backfill of structure is complete.

B. Control release of groundwater to its static level to prevent disturbance of natural foundation soils or compacted backfills and fills and to prevent flotation or movement of structures, pipelines, or other facilities.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Monitoring wells:

1. Record groundwater levels at least once a week. Submit readings to Engineer within 1 week.

END OF SECTION
Excavation Support and Protection
02260-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02260 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02260

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Designing, providing, maintaining, and removing excavation support and protection.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1. Guidelines of Engineering Practice for Braced and Tied-Back Excavations.

B. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. Title 8 - Industrial Relations:
a. Division 1. Department of Industrial Relations.
1) Chapter 4. Division of Industrial Safety.
a) Subchapter 4. Construction Safety Orders.
(1) Article 6. Excavations.

C. Department of the Navy Naval Facilities Engineering Command (NAVFAC):

1. Design Manual 7.2 - Foundations and Earth Structures.

2. Design Manual 7.3 - Soil Dynamics and Special Design Aspects.

D. State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans):

1. Caltrans California Trenching and Shoring Manual.

E. United States Steel Corporation (USS):

1. Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. General engineering design practice: In area of the Project, performed in accordance with recent engineering literature on subject of shoring and stability of excavations.

2. Shoring: A temporary structural system designed to support vertical faces, or nearly vertical faces, of soil or rock for purposes of excavation. Shoring includes cantilevered sheet piling, internally braced sheet piling, slurry walls, soldier piles and lagging, and other similar shoring systems. Sloping of the soil is not shoring.

3. Support levels: Level of tiebacks, wales, rakers, bottom of excavation, and other types of support.

Excavation Support and Protection
02260-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02260 (DraftFinal)

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and calculations:

1. Calculations for different load, support, and other conditions that occur during the sequence of installation of shoring, construction of facilities protected by shoring, and sequence of removal of shoring.

2. Sketches showing the condition at various stages of installation and removal of shoring.

3. Show on plan shoring, structures, pipelines, and other improvements located near shoring.

4. When utilities penetrate shoring, show location of penetrations on elevation of sides of shoring.

5. Show details for ground support and sealing around utility penetrations.

6. Indicate method used for installing driven shoring.

B. Detailed sequence of installation and removal of shoring:

1. Consider effects of ground settlement in sequence of installation and removal of shoring.

C. Provide sketches showing conditions at various stages in sequence of installation and removal of shoring.

D. Furnish Submittals for excavation support and protection as complete package and include items required in this Section:

1. Incomplete Submittals will not be reviewed and will be returned for resubmittal as a complete package.

E. Furnish dewatering Submittals as specified in Section 02240 - Dewatering with Submittals for excavation support and protection.

1.05 SEQUENCING
A. Do not begin construction of any shoring or excavation operations until:

1. Submittals for shoring and dewatering have been accepted.

2. Materials necessary for installation are on site.

B. Furnish Submittals a minimum of 45 days prior to scheduled date to begin excavation work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Where general engineering design practice is specified, provide Drawings and calculations that are performed and signed by civil or structural engineer registered in the state where the Project is located:

1. Clearly disclose assumptions made, criteria followed, and stress values used for materials being used in design calculations.

2. Submit list of references acceptable to the Engineer that substantiate appropriateness of design assumptions, criteria, and stress values.

Excavation Support and Protection
02260-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02260 (DraftFinal) B. Design requirements:

1. General:
a. In accordance with requirements in CCR, Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 4, Article 6 for trench excavations 5 feet or more in depth and for trenches less than 5 feet in depth when there is potential for cave-in. 1) Where such designs vary from excavation support standards set forth in CCR, Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 4, Article 6, submit design calculations pursuant to general engineering design practice. 2) Provide means for safe and stable excavations that are not less effective than required in CCR, Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 4, Article 6.
3) The preceding requirements do not apply to trench excavation support in accordance with standards set forth CCR, Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 4, Article 6.
b. Dewatering:
1) Dewater soil inside shoring as specified in Section 02240 - Dewatering.
2) Do not lower groundwater outside of shoring more than 1 foot. 3) Recharge groundwater outside shoring to limit groundwater draw down outside of shoring to amount specified above.
c. When electing to design with material stresses for temporary construction higher than allowable stresses prescribed in building code as specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements, increase in such stresses shall not exceed 10 percent of value of prescribed stresses.
d. Minimum safety factor used for design shall not be less than 1.5. e. Calculated minimum depth of penetration of shoring below bottom of excavation shall be increased not less than 30 percent if full value of allowable passive pressure is used in design.
f. Maximum height of cantilever shoring above bottom of excavation shall not exceed 15 feet. Use braced shoring when height of shoring above bottom of excavation exceeds 15 feet.
g. Location of point of fixity for shoring shall not be less than half calculated minimum embedment depth below bottom of excavation.
h. Generally acceptable references for design of shoring and excavations are as follows:
1) ASCE Guidelines of Engineering Practice for Braced and Tied-Back Excavations.
2) Caltrans California Trenching and Shoring Manual.
3) NAVFAC Design Manual 7.2.
4) NAVFAC Design Manual 7.3.
5) USS Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual.

2. Set inside face of shoring back from structure not less than greater of following:
a. 5 feet from face of wall.
b. 2 foot-6 inches from edge of foundation.
c. Depth of excavation below bottom of foundation.

C. Performance requirements:

1. General:
a. Support faces of excavations and protect structures and improvements in vicinity of excavations from damage and loss of function due to settlement Excavation Support and Protection
02260-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02260 (DraftFinal) or movement of soils, alterations in ground water level caused by such excavations, and related operations.
b. Specified provisions:
1) Complement, but do not substitute or diminish, obligations of the Contractor for furnishing of safe place of work pursuant to provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and its subsequent amendments and regulations and for protection of work, structures, and other improvements.
2) Represent minimum requirement for:
a) Number and types of means needed to maintain soil stability. b) Strength of such required means.
c) Methods and frequency of maintenance and observation of means used for maintaining soil stability.

2. Provide safe and stable excavations by means of sheeting, shoring, bracing, sloping, and other means and procedures, such as draining and recharging groundwater and routing and disposing of surface runoff, required to maintain stability of soils and rock.

3. Provide support for trench excavations for protection of workers from hazard of caving ground.

4. Provide shoring:
a. Where, as result of excavation work and analysis performed pursuant to general engineering design practice, as defined in this Section:
1) Excavated face or surrounding soil mass may be subject to slides, caving, or other types of failures.
2) Stability and integrity of structures and other improvements may be compromised by settlement or movement of soils, or changes in soil load on structures and other improvements.
b. For trenches 5 feet and deeper.
c. For trenches less than 5 feet in depth, when there is potential for cave-in.

5. For safe and stable excavations, use appropriate design, construction, and maintenance procedures to minimize settlement of supported ground and to prevent damage to structures and other improvements, including:
a. Using stiff shoring systems.
b. Following appropriate construction sequence.
c. Using shoring system that is tight enough to prevent soil loss through the shoring.
d. Using shoring system that extends far enough below bottom of excavation to prevent piping, heave, or flow of soil under shoring. e. Design for safety factor of not less than 1.50.
f. Providing surface runoff routing and discharge away from excavations. g. Where dewatering inside shoring is necessary, recharge groundwater outside shoring as necessary to prevent settlement in area surrounding shored excavation.
h. Where sheet piling is used, use interlocking type sheets:
1) Sheet piles shall be continuous and driven in interlock. 2) If bottom of the excavation is located below the water table, use “ball and socket” or “thumb and finger” type interlock.
i. Not applying shoring loads to existing structures and other improvements.

Excavation Support and Protection
02260-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02260 (DraftFinal) j. Not changing existing soil loading on existing structures and other improvements.
k. Provide welded steel packing between soil retaining members such as sheet piles and wales and similar members when gap exceeds 1/2 inch before wales are loaded.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. Installation of shoring:

1. Install means for providing safe and stable excavations as indicated in Submittals.

B. Removal of shoring:

1. Except for concrete encased soldier piles, slurry walls, and similar shoring systems, remove shoring by completion of the Work.

2. Select shoring system and method of removal, which will minimize soil that sticks to shoring from creating voids and causing settlement.

3. To prevent settlement caused by pulling shoring, fill voids with pressure injected grout:
a. Inject grout starting at bottom of void and progressively fill void to grade. b. Minimize length of shoring removed ahead of grouting operation and limit time void is left ungrouted to prevent void from closing up before being grouted.

4. Pressure preservative treated wood lagging may be left in place if acceptable to the Engineer.

C. Maintenance:

1. Where loss of soil occurs, plug gap in shoring and replace lost soil with fill material acceptable to the Engineer.

2. Where measurements and observations indicate possibility of failure or excessive movement of excavation support, determined in accordance with general engineering design practice, take appropriate action immediately.

END OF SECTION

Subsurface Utility Engineering
02280-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02280 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02280

SUBSURFACE UTILITY ENGINEERING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements for subsurface utility engineering (SUE) as part of the Work for new pipelines.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1. 38-02 Standard Guideline for the Collection and Depiction of Existing and Subsurface Utility Data.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions used in this Section are in accordance with ASCE 38-02.

1.04 REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing utilities indicated on the Drawings are approximate only and are provided based on the best information.

B. Existing utilities are shown for the convenience of Contractor only.

1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to field verify the vertical and horizontal location of all utilities including those not indicated or incorrectly indicated on the Drawings.

C. Contractor is responsible to review all geotechnical reports, record drawings, and Contract Documents.

D. Coordinate with utility locator, such as CALL BEFORE YOU DIG, and other affected entities when they have jurisdiction over the project site.

E. Contractor is responsible for protecting all utilities encountered.

1. Before any excavation, follow requirements of Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.

2. If a conflict exists between what is indicated on the Drawings and what exists in the field, Contractor shall notify Engineer immediately.

F. Where scheduled, provide subsurface utility engineering services by a Civil Engineer registered in California in accordance with ASCE 38-02.

G. Requirements: The SUE shall entail the following at a minimum:

1. Review of existing record drawings.

2. Geophysical methods such as ground-penetrating radar.

3. Soft excavation to locate known utilities along the proposed pipeline alignment.

Subsurface Utility Engineering
02280-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02280 (DraftFinal)

4. Open trench excavation to locate unknown utilities along the proposed pipeline alignment.

5. Utilization of field survey by a Professional Land Survey licensed in for determination of vertical and horizontal locations.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. General: Contractor shall utilize the services of a qualified subconsultant for SUE services with minimum qualifications that include but are not limited to:

1. Minimum of 5 years of SUE experience in California where providing vertical and horizontal locations of utilities in accordance with ASCE 38-02 utility quality level A was required.

2. Completion of 5 SUE projects of equal or greater magnitude within the past 5 years.

1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:

1. Contractor shall submit all SUE information as follows:
a. Plan drawings that clearly illustrate vertical and horizontal location of known and unknown utilities.
1) Horizontal location shall include northing and easting coordinates. b. Identifies size and material and service for known utilities. c. Identify size and material for unknown utilities.

2. Review of shop drawings and calculations by Engineer and Owner are for record only.

3. Drawings shall be performed, stamped, and endorsed by a Civil Engineer registered in California.

4. Field survey information shall be performed, stamped, and endorsed by a Surveyor registered in California.

B. Detailed sequence of SUE:

1. Submit a schedule for all SUE events that shows start, end, and intermediate milestones.

2. Provide sketches showing the conditions at various stages in the sequence of SUE.

C. Submit submittals for stability of excavations as a complete package and include all items required in this Section.

1. Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed and will be returned for resubmittal as a complete package.

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate all Work with restrictions provided in Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.

B. Do not begin Work until submittals have been accepted by Engineer and until equipment and materials necessary for installation are on site.

C. Submit submittals a minimum of 30 days prior to the scheduled date to begin excavation work.

Subsurface Utility Engineering
02280-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02280 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUE SCHEDULE
A. Provide SUE services for the following pipelines and utilities at both the Campus Oaks and Misty Wood Project sites.

Description Reference Drawings
16-inch PW 13&19C02
12 & 18-inch SD
Recycled Water (size unknown)
2-inch PW at meter and valve box
8-inch SS

END OF SECTION

Earthwork
02300-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02300 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02300

EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Loosening, excavating, filling, grading, borrow, hauling, preparing subgrade, compacting in final location, wetting and drying, and operations pertaining to Site grading for buildings, basins, reservoirs, boxes, roads, and other facilities.

2. Backfilling and compacting under and around structures.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3
).

2. D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Backfill adjacent to structure: Backfill within volume bounded by the exterior surfaces of structure, the surface of undisturbed soil in the excavation around structure, and finish grade around structure.

2. Embankments: Dikes, levees, berms, and similar facilities.

3. Excavation: Consists of loosening, removing, loading, transporting, depositing, and compacting in final location, wet and dry materials, necessary to be removed for purposes of construction of structures, ditches, grading, roads, and such other purposes as are indicated on the Drawings.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Copy of Property Owner’s Agreement allowing placement of surplus soil material on their property.

B. Testing lab: Submit the Contractor’s proposed testing laboratory capabilities and equipment.

Earthwork
02300-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02300 (DraftFinal) C. Test reports:

1. Submit certified test reports of tests specified to be performed by the Contractor.

2. Sign and seal test reports by a registered Geotechnical Engineer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Initial compaction demonstration:

1. Adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures: Demonstrate adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding any of following amounts of earthwork quantities:
a. 50 cubic yards of backfill adjacent to structures.
b. 100 cubic yards of embankment work.
c. 100 cubic yards of fill.
d. 50 cubic yards of roadway base material.
e. 100 cubic yards of road fill.

2. Compaction sequence requirements: Until specified degree of compaction on previously specified amounts of earthwork is achieved, do not perform additional earthwork of the same kind.

3. After satisfactory conclusion of initial compaction demonstration and at any time during construction, provide confirmation tests as specified under the Field Quality Control article.

B. Perform Work related to this Section in accordance with the approved Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule earthwork operations to meet requirements specified in this Section for excavation and uses of excavated material.

B. If necessary, stockpile excavated material in order to use it at specified locations.

C. Excavation, backfilling, and filling: Perform excavation, backfilling, and filling during construction in manner and sequence that provides drainage at all times.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Performance requirements:

1. Where mud or other soft or unstable material is encountered, remove such material and refill space with stabilization material. Wrap stabilization material with stabilization fabric.

2. Obtain acceptable import material from other sources if surplus obtained within the Project Site does not conform to specified requirements or are not sufficient in quantity.

3. No extra compensation will be made for hauling of fill materials nor for water required for compaction.

Earthwork
02300-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02300 (DraftFinal)

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Water for compacting: Use water from source acceptable to the Engineer.

B. Soil and rock materials:

1. General:
a. Provide aggregate base course, Class 2 permeable, controlled low-strength material, drain rock, gravel, native soil-select material, sand, and stabilization material where specified or indicated on the Drawings. b. If suitable surplus materials are available, obtain native material and select material from cut sections or excavations or imported materials.

2. Aggregate base course materials: As specified in Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.

3. Class 2 permeable: As specified in Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.

4. Drain rock: As specified in Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.

5. Gravel: As specified in Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.

6. Native soil-select material: As specified in Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.

7. Sand: As specified in Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.

8. Stabilization material: As specified in Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.

C. Controlled low-strength material: As specified in Section 02312 - Controlled Low Strength Materials (CLSM).

D. Geotextile fabrics:

1. Filter: As specified in Section 02620 - Filter Fabric.

2. Stabilization: As specified in Section 02621 - Stabilization Fabric.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions:

1. Character and quantity of material:
a. Verify character and quantity of rock, gravel, sand, silt, water, and other inorganic or organic materials to be encountered in Work to be performed. b. Determine gradation, shrinkage, and swelling of soil, and suitability of material for use intended in Work to be performed.
c. Determine quantity of material, and cost thereof, required for construction of backfills, cuts, embankments, excavations, fills, and roadway fills, whether from on-site excavations or imported materials. Include in cost of Work to be performed.
d. Include wasting of excess material, if required, in the cost of Work to be performed.

Earthwork
02300-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02300 (DraftFinal)

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Backfills:

1. After clearing and excavation are completed, scarify entire areas that underlie backfills or structures to a depth of 6 inches and until surface is free of ruts, hummocks, and other features that would prevent uniform compaction by equipment to be used.

2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified before placing backfill material or concrete.

3. Do not place backfill against walls until:
a. Walls have been cast full height of structure and concrete has reached the specified strength.
b. Connecting slabs and beams have been cast, and concrete has reached the specified strength.

4. Prior to backfilling:
a. Remove forms.
b. Clean trash and debris from the excavation site.

5. After inspection of foundation, walls, and pipes, place backfill symmetrically around structures to prevent eccentric loading of structures.

B. Embankments:

1. After clearing is completed, scarify entire areas that underlie embankments to a depth of 6 inches and until surface is free of ruts, hummocks, and other features that would prevent uniform compaction by equipment to be used.

2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified for embankments before placing of embankment material.

C. Fills:

1. After clearing is completed, scarify entire areas that underlie fill sections or structures to a depth of 10 inches and until surface is free of ruts, hummocks, and other features that would prevent uniform compaction by equipment to be used.

2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified for compacted fills before placing of fill material or concrete.

D. Roadway fills:

1. After clearing is completed, scarify entire areas that underlie roadway fills to a depth of 6 inches and until surface is free of ruts, hummocks, and other features that would prevent uniform compaction by equipment to be used.

2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified for roadway fills before placing of roadway fill material.

E. Sloped surfaces for fill or foundations:

1. Foundations for fill having slopes in excess of 1 vertical to 4 horizontal:
a. Bench or terrace to adequately key existing ground and fill built thereon.

2. Slopes of original hillsides and old fills: Bench minimum of 10 feet horizontally as fill is placed.

Earthwork
02300-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02300 (DraftFinal)

3. Provision of new benches:
a. Start new bench wherever vertical cut of next lower bench intersects existing grade.
b. Recompact material thus cut out along with new embankment material at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General:

1. Dispose of excavated materials that are not required or are unsuitable for fill and backfill in lawful manner.

2. Dispose of surplus material on private property only when written permission agreement is furnished by the owner of the property. Submit copies of such agreements.

3. Rocks, broken concrete, or other solid materials larger than 4 inches in greatest dimension: Remove from the Project Site at no additional cost to the Owner.

4. Stabilization of subgrade: Provide materials used, or perform Work required, to stabilize subgrade so it can withstand loads that may be placed upon it by the Contractor’s equipment.

B. Borrow area: There is no borrow area on the Project Site.

1. Where material is required, import material from source located off Project Site selected by the Contractor and subject to acceptance by the Engineer.

2. There will be no additional cost to the Owner for use of imported material.

C. Compaction:

1. Provide specified compaction for backfills, cuts, embankments, fills, roadway fills, and other earthwork.

2. Perform confirmation tests to verify and confirm that Work has complied, and is complying at all times, with compaction requirements specified in this Section for initial compaction demonstration and field quality control testing.

3. In-place density of compacted backfills, cuts, embankments, fills, and roadway fills determined in accordance with ASTM D6938.

4. Maximum density, laboratory compaction: Soil maximum density and optimum water content when tested in accordance with ASTM D1557.

5. To prevent damage to structures due to backfilling operations, place backfill with equipment that does not exceed AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, H-20 vehicle loading, within a distance from the face of the structure of not less than 1/2 the depth of backfill.
a. Depth of backfill is the distance between the level being compacted and the bottom of the excavation. Outside this distance, heavier compaction equipment may be used.

6. Compact to percentage of maximum density as follows:
a. Backfill adjacent to structures: 90 percent.
b. Backfilling voids: 90 percent.
c. Other areas: 90 percent.
d. Under present and future structures: 95 percent.
e. Under roadways, parking and storage areas, curbs, and sidewalks:
95 percent.
f. Upper 6 inches of cuts: 90 percent.
g. Fills: 90 percent.

Earthwork
02300-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02300 (DraftFinal) D. Dewatering: As specified in Section 02240 - Dewatering.

E. Excavation:

1. Blasting: Not permitted.

2. Excavations for trenching: As specified in Section 02318 - Trenching.

3. Excavations for structures:
a. Provide excavations conforming to the dimensions and elevations indicated on the Drawings for each structure.
b. After clearing is complete, excavate for the structure, down to the elevation indicated on the Drawings. Unless directed by the Engineer, do not carry excavations below elevation indicated on the Drawings. c. Where soil is encountered having unsuitable bearing value, the Engineer may direct in writing that excavation be carried to elevations below those indicated on the Drawings.
d. Where excavations are made below elevations indicated on the Drawings, adjust elevations of excavations in accordance with the following requirements:
1) Under slabs: Restore to proper elevation in accordance with procedure specified for backfill in this Section.
2) Under footings: Restore to the proper elevation using one of the following:
a) Aggregate base course.
b) Controlled low-strength material.
e. Excavation width:
1) Extend excavations at least 2 feet clear from walls and foundations of structures to allow for placing and removal of forms, installation of services, and inspection.
2) Do not undercut slopes.
f. Difficulty of excavation: No extra compensation will be made for removal of rock or any other material due to difficulty of excavation.

4. Excavation of ditches and gutters:
a. Cut ditches and gutters accurately to cross sections and grades indicated on the Drawings.
b. Take care not to excavate ditches and gutters below grades indicated on the Drawings.
c. Backfill excessive ditch and gutter excavations to grade with suitable material acceptable to the Engineer.
d. Do not deposit any material within 3 feet of edge of ditch unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

5. Necessary over excavation:
a. Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond normal lines of excavation in order to remove boulders or other interfering objects, backfill voids remaining after removal as specified in backfilling of voids below, or as acceptable to the Engineer.
b. Backfill voids with material acceptable to the Engineer:
1) With acceptance of the Engineer, backfill with one of the following:
a) Aggregate base course.
b) Controlled low-strength material.

Earthwork
02300-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02300 (DraftFinal) F. Materials for backfills, embankments, fills, and roadway fills:

1. General:
a. Obtain import material from other sources if surplus materials from cuts and excavations obtained from within the Project Site do not conform to specified requirements or are not sufficient in quantity for construction of Project.

2. Backfills:
a. Backfill adjacent to structures, slabs, or walls: Native soil-select material or imported material meeting the requirements of native soil-select unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
b. Backfill material under concrete structures: Aggregate base course material, except in areas where controlled low-strength material or concrete encasement are indicated on the Drawings.
c. Extend backfill in any area under concrete structures from undisturbed soil or rock to the bottom aggregate base course material layer.

3. Embankments:
a. Native material or imported material meeting the requirements of native soil-select unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.

4. Fills:
a. Native soil-select material or imported material meeting the requirements of native soil-select unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
b. Extend fill in any area under concrete structures from undisturbed soil or rock to the bottom aggregate base course material layer.

5. Roadway fills: One of the following, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings:
a. Aggregate base course material.
b. Native soil-select material or imported material meeting the requirements of native soil-select.

G. Placement:

1. General:
a. Lines and grades:
1) Construct backfills, embankments, fills, and road fills, at locations and to lines and grades indicated on the Drawings.
2) Overbuild permanent fill slopes by at least 1 foot and then cut to final grade to provide adequate compaction of the remaining fill.

2. Backfills:
a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction.
b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between optimum moisture content and 2 percent above optimum moisture content before compacting. c. Defective compacted backfills: Remove and recompact.

3. Fills:
a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction.
b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between optimum moisture content and 2 percent above optimum moisture content before compacting. c. Defective compacted fills: Remove and recompact.

Earthwork
02300-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02300 (DraftFinal)

4. Embankments:
a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction.
b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between optimum moisture content and 3 percent above optimum moisture content before compacting. c. Defective compacted embankments: Remove and recompact.

5. Roadway fills:
a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not exceed 8 inches in depth after compaction.
b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between optimum moisture content and 3 percent above optimum moisture content before compacting. c. Defective compacted roadway fills: Remove and recompact.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirmation tests:

1. Contractor’s responsibilities:
a. Adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures:
1) Demonstrate adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures. 2) At each test location include tests for each type or class of backfill from bedding to finish grade.
b. Compaction sequence requirements:
1) Do not perform additional earthwork of the same kind until specified degree of compaction has been demonstrated.
c. Cost of confirmation tests: Paid for by the Contractor. d. Qualifications of the Contractor’s testing laboratory: Acceptable to the Engineer.
e. Copies of confirmation test reports: Submit promptly to the Engineer.

2. Frequency of confirmation testing:
a. Maximum dry density versus moisture:
1) When soil, moisture conditions, or means of compaction change.

Confirmation testing to be required at the Engineer or Owner’s discretion.
b. Cost of confirmation tests:
1) Paid for by the Contractor.
c. Qualifications of the Contractor’s testing laboratory:
1) Perform confirmation testing by soils testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. Copies of confirmation test reports: Submit promptly to the Engineer.

B. Tolerances:

1. Finish grading of backfills, cuts, embankments, fills, and roadway fills:
a. Perform fine grading under concrete structures such that finish surfaces are never above the grade or cross section indicated on the Drawings and are never more than 0.10 feet below.
b. Provide finish surface for areas outside of structures that are within

0.10 feet of grade or cross section indicated on the Drawings.

2. Unlined channels and basins:
a. In both cut and fill, and levee and access road side slopes in cut: Vertical tolerance of none above and 3 inches below grade indicated on the Drawings on bottom and side slopes.

Earthwork
02300-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02300 (DraftFinal) b. On top surface of levee and access road in both cut and fill, and levee and access road side slopes in fill: Vertical tolerance of none below and 3 inches above grade indicated on the Drawings.

3. Areas which are not under structures, concrete, asphalt, roads, pavements, sidewalks, dikes, and similar facilities:
a. Provide finish graded surfaces of either undisturbed soil, or cohesive material not less than 6 inches deep.
b. Intent of proceeding is to avoid sandy or gravelly areas.

4. Finish grading of surfaces:
a. Reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. b. Provide degree of finish that is ordinarily obtainable from blade grader operations, except as otherwise specified.
c. Uniformly grade areas that are not under concrete.
d. Finish ditches and gutters so that they drain readily.

C. Compliance tests:

1. Frequency of testing: Periodic compliance tests will be made by the Engineer to verify that compaction is meeting requirements previously specified.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Finish grades of excavations, backfills, and fills:

1. Repair and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes due to any settlement or erosion that may occur from action of the elements or any other cause prior to final acceptance.

3.06 PROTECTION
A. Finish grades of backfills, cuts, excavations, and fills:

1. Protect newly graded areas from erosion and deterioration by action of the elements.

B. Ditches and gutters:

1. Maintain ditches and gutters free from detrimental quantities of debris that might inhibit drainage until final acceptance.

END OF SECTION

Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)
02312-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02312 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02312

CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Controlled low strength material (CLSM), also known as "flowable fill."

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. 229R - Report on Controlled Low-Strength Materials.

2. 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

2. C94 - Standard Specification for Ready Mix Concrete.

3. C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.

4. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

5. C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

6. C403 - Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance.

7. C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.

8. D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3
(2,700 kN-m/m3)).

9. D4832 - Standard Test Method of Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders.

10. D5971 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Controlled Low Strength Material.

11. D6023 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, Cement Content, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Controlled Low-Strength Material.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit data completely describing materials in the mix and demonstrating compliance with the requirements of this Section.

1. Cement: Mill tests. Indicate alkali content representative of each shipment.

2. Fly ash: Identify source and type of fly ash.

3. Water: Identify source and quality if not from a municipal treatment source.

4. Admixtures: Manufacturer’s product data indicating suitability for use in CLSM mixes and recommended dosage rates.

5. Aggregate:
a. Submit source, type, and sieve analyses.
b. Resubmit at any time there is a significant change in grading of materials.

Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)
02312-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02312 (DraftFinal) B. Mix design:

1. Submit full details, including mix design calculations for mix proposed for use.

2. Trial batch test data:
a. Submit data for each test cylinder.
b. Submit data that identifies mix and slump for each test cylinder.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store or stockpile cement, fly ash, and aggregate in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Store admixtures in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Mixture of portland cement, water, pozzolan, fine aggregate and admixtures, proportioned in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 229 to produce a homogeneous mixture that is flowable, that will readily work into corners and angles; that will not segregate in the plastic state; and that is self-compacting at the time of placement without the use of mechanical vibration.

B. Performance requirements:

1. Air content, total calculated in accordance with ASTM D6023: Not less than

8.0 percent, nor greater than 12.0 percent.

2. Compressive strength, measured in accordance with ASTM D4832 at 28 days:

Not less than 50 pounds per square inch, nor greater than 150 pounds per square inch.

3. Wet density: Not greater than 132 pounds per cubic foot.

4. Slump, measured in accordance with ASTM C143 at the point of placement:

Greater than 9 inches and that allows CLSM to flow freely and to be self-compacting during placement.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Cement:

1. Portland cement in accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or Type II.

2. Having total alkali content not more than 0.60 percent.

B. Fly ash: Class C or Class F fly ash in accordance with ASTM C618.

C. Water:

1. Potable water: Clean and free from oil and deleterious amounts of alkali, acid, organic matter, or other substances.

D. Admixtures: Products of a single manufacturer, specifically manufactured or recommended by that manufacturer for use in CLSM.

1. Air entraining admixture: In accordance with ASTM C260.

Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)
02312-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02312 (DraftFinal) E. Aggregate:

1. Non-expansive, non-reactive, inert natural sand conforming to the following requirements:
a. Not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
b. No plastic fines present.
c. Including pea gravel no larger than 3/8 inch.

2.03 MIXES
A. See System Description for performance requirements of the plastic and hardened mix.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Trial batch:

1. After mix design has been accepted by Engineer, have trial batch of the accepted mix design prepared by testing laboratory acceptable to Engineer.

2. Prepare trial batches using the specific cement, fly ash, admixtures, aggregates, and water proposed for the Work.

3. Prepare trial batch with quantity sufficient to determine slump, workability, and consistency; and to provide test cylinders as indicated in this Section.

B. Trial batch testing:

1. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C143, with the following modifications:
a. Do not rod the concrete material.
b. Place material in slump cone in one semi-continuous filling operation, slightly overfill, tap lightly, strike off, and then measure and record slump.

2. Prepare and test trial batch specimens in accordance with ASTM D4832, with the following modifications:
a. Provide cylindrical test specimens, each 6-inches in diameter by 12-inch high.
b. Provide a minimum of 8 cylinders for testing of each trial batch. c. Fill the molds to overflowing and tap sides lightly to settle the mix. d. Do not rod the mix for consolidation in the cylinder. e. Strike off the excess material.

3. Place test cylinders in a moist curing room. Exercise caution in moving and transporting the cylinders since they are fragile and will withstand only minimal bumping, banging, or jolting without damage.

4. Do not remove the test cylinder from mold until that cylinder is to be capped and tested.
a. Perform the capping carefully to prevent premature fractures. b. Do not perform initial compression test until the cylinders reach a minimum age of 3 days.

5. Provide compressive strength tests:
a. Test 4 test cylinders at 7 days after casting, and another 4 cylinders at 28 days after casting.
b. The compression strength of the 4 test cylinders tested at 28 days shall be equal to or greater than the minimum required compression strength, but shall not exceed maximum compression strength.

Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)
02312-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02312 (DraftFinal) C. If the trial batch tests do not meet the Specifications for strength or density, revise and re-submit the mix design, prepare additional trial batch(es), and complete additional trial batch tests. Repeat until an acceptable trial batch is that conforms to the Specifications is produced.

1. All the trial batches and acceptability of materials shall be paid by the Contractor.

2. After acceptance, do not change the mix design without submitting a new mix design, trail batches, and test information.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Do not place CLSM until preparation and condition of surfaces receiving the fill have been observed and accepted by the Engineer.

B. Remove debris foreign matter, and standing or running water from excavations and areas receiving CLSM before placement.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Pipes and trenches.

1. Install cellular concrete as indicated on the Drawings and specified.

2. Where CLSM is placed around and over pipes, secure pipes in place, or place CLSM in lifts to prevent pipe flotation.

3. Where CLSM is placed in long, open trenches, confine material using bulkheads of sandbags, earth dams, or stiffer concrete at open ends of placement.

B. Soil preparation:

1. Prior to placement of CLSM, prepare underlying soils as follows:
a. Scarify surface to a depth of 8 inches.
b. Adjust moisture content to or slightly above the optimum in accordance with ASTM D1557.
c. Re-compact scarified surface to a minimum of 95 percent relative density in accordance with ASTM D1557.

3.03 MEASURING, BATCHING, MIXING AND TRANSPORTING
A. Measure, batch, mix and transport CLSM in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C94 and this Section.

B. Mix until there is uniform distribution of materials.

C. Discharge mixer completely prior to recharging.

D. After trial batch testing and mix acceptance, maintain slump during construction within plus or minus 1 inch of the design slump.

Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)
02312-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02312 (DraftFinal)

3.04 PLACING
A. Place controlled low strength material by method that preserves the quality of the material in terms of compressive strength and density.

B. Maintain fluid properties of the mix during placement.

1. At point of placement, provide material that flows easily around, beneath, or through walls, pipes, conduits, or other structures.

2. Do not place CLSM that has partially hardened or that has been contaminated by foreign materials.

3. Handle and place CLSM using methods that minimize segregation of the mix.

4. Deposit mix as near its final position as possible to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing.

5. Contain and confine mix while it is fluid. Design containment structures and bracing at walls and forms to withstand lateral pressures of wet mix.

C. Lifts:

1. Limit lift heights of CLSM placed against structures and other facilities that could be damaged due to the pressure from the CLSM, to the lesser of 3 feet or the lift height indicated on the Drawings.

2. Do not place another lift of CLSM until the last lift of CLSM has set and gained sufficient strength to prevent additional lateral load against the forms or structure due to the weight of the next lift of CLSM.

D. Water conditions:

1. Do not place CLSM in standing or flowing water.

2. Do not permit water to flow over the surface of freshly placed or un-hardened CLSM.

3. Do not submerge CLSM in water within 24 hours after placement.

E. Manage CLSM bleed water.

1. Grade top surface of CLSM to drain away from the fill.

2. Provide side containment that permits bleed water to drain to a contained management area away from the fill.

3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Curing:

1. Prior to and during curing, install barriers to prevent equipment or personnel from falling into or becoming entrapped in CLSM.

B. Protect CLSM from:

1. Damage from the elements.

2. Damage of any nature during surrounding construction operations.

3. Freezing: Do not use salt, manure, or other chemicals to provide protection from cold temperatures

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide quality control over the Work of this Section as specified in Section 01450 - Quality Control and as specified in this Section.

Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)
02312-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02312 (DraftFinal) B. General:

1. Engineer inspection and acceptance required prior to placement.

2. Make provisions for and furnish all material for the test specimens, and provide manual assistance to assist the Owner’s Testing Laboratory in preparing said specimens.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide quality control over the work of this Section as specified in Section 01450 - Quality Control.

B. Field inspections:

1. Engineer shall provide on-site inspection for the Work of this Section.

2. Advise Engineer of readiness to proceed at least 24 hours prior to each placement of CLSM.

3. Required inspections:
a. Engineer will observe the prepared areas. Do not place CLSM until Engineer has observed and accepted preparations.

4. Record of inspections.

C. Field sampling and testing:

1. During construction, Contractor shall provide sampling and testing to determine whether the CLSM, as produced and placed, complies with the requirements specified.

2. Sample CLSM for testing in accordance with ASTM D5971.

3. Required tests:
a. Air content: Prepare sample and test in accordance with ASTM D6023. b. Compressive strength: Prepare and test cylinder specimens in accordance with ASTM D4832.
1) Prepare 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high specimens for testing. a) Provide one set of specimens for each 150 cubic yards of CLSM placed, but not less than 1 set for each half day's placement. b) Prepare and test not less than 3 cylinders for each set. c) Place CLSM in the molds in accordance with ASTM D4832. Do not rod or otherwise consolidate the material in the mold. d) In accordance with ASTM D4832 recommendations for
displacing bleed water at the top of the molds and refilling the molds before covering with a lid. Do not use air-tight lids. 2) Place the cylinders in a safe location away from construction activities.
a) Protect cylinders from bumping and impact.
b) Maintain temperature surrounding cylinders between 60 and 80 degrees Fahrenheit until delivery to the laboratory for testing. c) After the first day, surround molds with a high humidity environment by covering with wet burlap, or equivalent highly absorptive material. Maintain saturation of the cover. Do not sprinkle water directly on the cylinders.

Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)
02312-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02312 (DraftFinal) 3) After 4 days, place the cylinders in a protective container for transport to the laboratory for testing.
a) Exercise caution in moving and transporting the cylinders since they are fragile and will withstand only minimal bumping, banging, or jolting without damage.
b) Transport container may be a box with a Styrofoam or similar lining that will limit jarring and bumping of the cylinders. 4) Upon receipt at the testing laboratory, place test cylinders in a moist curing room until dates for testing.
5) Do not remove test cylinders from molds until the day that cylinders is to be capped and tested.
6) Cap and test for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D4832.
a) Do not perform initial compression test until the cylinders reach an age of at least 4 days.
b) Test 1 cylinder at 7 days and 2 at 28 days.
7) Compressive strength of the cylinders tested at 28 days shall be equal to or greater than the minimum required compression strength, but shall not exceed maximum compression strength specified.

3.08 NON-CONFORMING WORK
A. When testing or observation indicates CLSM with properties outside the specified and accepted range, Engineer will issue instructions regarding disposition of nonconforming materials.

B. Engineer may:

1. Reject CLSM represented by those test specimens and require its removal and replacement.

2. Require modification of the mix design to provide CLSM with the properties specified.

C. Make such modifications at no additional expense to the Owner and with no adjustment to the schedule.

END OF SECTION

Trenching
02318-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02318 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02318

TRENCHING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Trench excavation and trench backfill for pipelines, manholes, vaults, and appurtenances.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3
).

2. D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Backfill: Material placed in trench above the pipe embedment zone.

2. Bedding: Material placed under, around, and over pipes or ducts in trenches.

3. Fine grading: Bedding material placed directly below pipes or ducts to provide support at the bottom of the trench and to bring those elements to required grades and elevations.

4. Flexible pipe: Includes steel, ductile iron, thermoplastics such as polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and high-density polyethylene (HDPE), thermosetting plastics such as fiberglass-reinforced polymer (FRP), bar-wrapped concrete cylinder pipe, and corrugated steel pipes.

5. Haunch zone: Material placed below and beside the pipe up to the pipe springline.

6. Lift: A layer of soil or aggregate material, measured before compaction.

7. Maximum density, Field Compaction: Soil density and water content when tested in accordance with ASTM D6938.

8. Maximum density, Laboratory Compaction: Soil maximum density and optimum water content when tested in accordance with ASTM D1557.

9. Pavement section: Includes pavement plus underlying courses such as base course and subgrade.

10. Pipe embedment zone: Includes bedding, fine grading, and haunch zone.

11. Pipe foundation: Material placed at the bottom of trench to provide support.

12. Pipe foundation: Stabilization material placed at the bottom of trench to provide support when the trench bottom is not firm, dry or uniform.

Trenching
02318-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02318 (DraftFinal)

13. Pipe springline: A horizontal reference line located at mid-height, or halfway point, of a circular conduit, pipe, or tunnel. It is the maximum horizontal dimension or diameter of a circular conduit, pipe, or tunnel.

14. Rigid pipe: Includes reinforced non-cylinder concrete, reinforced concrete cylinder, prestressed concrete cylinder, vitrified clay, polymer concrete, cast iron, asbestos cement, and cast-in-place pipes.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. As specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data on soils and aggregates.

1. Material source.

2. Gradation.

3. Test data to demonstrate compliance with requirements as specified in this Section.

C. Samples:

1. Provide 50-pound sample of materials when requested by the Engineer.

D. Confirmation testing:

1. Certification of Contractor’s testing laboratory.

2. Record copy report for tests performed by Contractor’s testing laboratory.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. As specified in Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.

B. Class C concrete: As specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Controlled low-strength material: As specified in Section 02312 - Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Stabilize excavations as specified in Section 02260 - Excavation Support and Protection.

B. Perform subsurface utility engineering (SUE) for utility locating and verification prior to any excavation work and as specified in Section 02280 - Subsurface Utility Engineering.

3.02 DEWATERING
A. As specified in Section 02240 - Dewatering.

Trenching
02318-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02318 (DraftFinal)

3.03 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Excavate bottom of trench to depth indicated on the Drawings.

B. Areas of new fill or embankment:

1. Prior to laying pipes or electrical service, place fill and compact as specified to not less than 2 feet above top of pipe, conduit, or duct bank.

2. Excavate through fill for pipe trench.

C. Trench widths as specified in the following table:

Buried Pipe or Accessory Minimum Trench Width Maximum Trench Width Nominal Pipe Diameter:
4-inch to 24-inch OD + 18 inches OD + 24 inches
Nominal Pipe Diameter:

Greater than 24-inch OD + 24 inches OD + 36 inches
Manholes, vaults, valves, or
other accessories
12 inches between outer
surface and trench side or
shoring
Not applicable
D. Potable water pipe and appurtenances:

1. Lay in trenches separate from those used for sewers and recycled water.

2. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, lay in trenches having cover of not less than 3 feet below surface of ground located at distance of not less than 10 feet clear horizontally from any parallel sewer and 1 foot clear vertically above any parallel sewer.

3.04 TRENCH BACKFILL - GENERAL
A. Trench area terminology and locations as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Place material, except CLSM and concrete, in maximum 6-inch lifts, measured before compaction.

C. Backfilling of manhole excavation: Conform to backfilling requirements for trenches as specified in this Section.

3.05 PIPE FOUNDATION
A. Provide trench bottom with firm, dry, uniform bearing surface at the grade indicated on the Drawings.

B. Excess excavation below elevation indicated on the Drawings will require installation of pipe foundation material to bring the trench bottom back to the elevation indicated on the Drawings at no additional cost to the Owner.

1. Materials and placement:

C. If bottom of trench excavation consists of soil:

1. Scarify bottom of trench to a depth of 6 inches below the grade indicated on the Drawings.

Trenching
02318-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02318 (DraftFinal)

2. Materials and placement:
a. Recompact scarified material to 95 percent of maximum density.

D. If bottom of trench excavation consists of rock or any material that, by reason of its hardness, cannot be excavated to provide uniform bearing surface:

1. Remove such rock or other material to a depth of not less than 4 inches below pipe embedment zone.

2. Materials:
a. CLSM.
b. Class C concrete.

E. If bottom of trench excavation consists of mud or other soft unstable material:

1. Remove such unacceptable material to a depth of not less than 18 inches below pipe embedment zone.

3.06 PIPE EMBEDMENT ZONE
A. Pipe displacement:

1. Take necessary precautions in placement and compaction of bedding material to prevent displacement of piping.

2. In event there is movement or floating of the piping, re-excavate, re-lay, and backfill the pipe.

B. Fine grading:

1. Place 6 inches of approved haunch zone bedding material from the trench bottom to the bottom of the pipe or duct to provide support at the bottom of the trench and to bring those elements to required line and grade.

C. Depressions for joints or couplings:

1. Excavate holes in the fine grading material at the bottom of the trench.

2. Provide holes of sufficient width to provide ample room for grouting, banding, or welding as necessary for making joints and to ensure that pipe rests upon prepared trench bottom and not supported by any portion of the joint.

D. Rigid pipe:

1. Pipe embedment zone: Below pipe springline:
a. Materials and placement:
1) Aggregate base course compacted to 95 percent maximum dry density.

2. Pipe embedment zone: Above pipe springline:
a. Compacted to a depth above pipe: 12-inch minimum.
b. Materials and placement:
1) Aggregate base course compacted to 95 percent maximum dry density.

E. Flexible pipe:

1. Pipe embedment zone:
a. Compacted to a depth above pipe: 12-inch minimum.
b. Materials and placement:
1) Aggregate base course compacted to 95 percent maximum dry density.

Trenching
02318-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02318 (DraftFinal) 2) CLSM. Place gravel bags to support and set pipe to line and grade prior to CLSM placement. Place CLSM in lifts as necessary to prevent floatation.
3) Sand: clean, washed and well-graded (100 percent passing #4 sieve and <10 percent passing 100 sieve).

3.07 BACKFILL
A. Trenches:

1. Materials and placement:
a. Native soil - select compacted to 90 percent maximum dry density. b. Imported fill compacted to 90 percent maximum dry density. c. Aggregate base course compacted to 90 percent maximum dry density. d. CLSM.

B. Trenches in rock:

1. Backfill to top of rock.
a. Materials and placement:
1) CLSM.
2) Class C concrete.

2. Backfill from top of rock to grade, if applicable:
a. Materials and placement:
1) Aggregate base course compacted to 90 percent of maximum density.

C. Trenches below or within 5 feet of the outside perimeter of structures:

1. Backfill to underside of aggregate base course below structure.

2. Materials and placement:
a. Aggregate base course compacted to 95 percent of maximum density. b. CLSM.

D. Trenches in roadways and paved areas:

1. Backfill trench to underside of pavement.

2. Materials and placement:
a. Trench backfill with final 12-inch below road base course compacted to 95 percent of maximum density.
b. Aggregate base course compacted to 95 percent of maximum density. c. CLSM.

E. Trenches in areas outside the improved section of roadways or in open country:

1. Backfill to underside of topsoil layer.

2. Materials and placement:
a. Native soil, native soil - select, imported material, or aggregate base course compacted to 90 percent of maximum density.

Trenching
02318-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02318 (DraftFinal) F. Trenches under existing intersecting pipes, duct banks, or conduits larger than 3 inches in diameter:

1. Backfill from above top of new pipe embedment zone to springline of intersecting pipe or conduit.
a. Extend backfill at least 2 feet on either side of intersecting pipe or conduit to ensure backfill material remains in place while other backfill is being placed.
b. Materials and placement:
1) CLSM, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2. Backfill remainder of trench:
a. Materials and placement:
1) CLSM.
2) Class C concrete.

3.08 EXCESS MATERIAL
A. Remove excess excavated material from the Project site as specified in Section 02300 - Earthwork.

3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide field quality control for the Work as specified in Section 01450 - Quality Control.

B. Confirmation tests: As specified in Section 02300 - Earthwork.

1. Minimum frequency of confirmation testing:
a. At each test location include tests for each type or class of backfill from bedding to finished grade.
b. For trenches: 1 location every 100 linear feet.

C. Compliance tests:

1. Make periodic compliance tests to verify that compaction is meeting requirements as specified in this Section.

2. Perform remedial work if compaction test fails to meet specified requirements using one of the following methods:
a. Remove and replace backfill at the proper density.
b. Other means acceptable to the Engineer.

3. Retesting:
a. Costs of retesting: Contractor is responsible for the costs of retesting required to confirm and verify that remedial work has brought compaction within specified requirements.
b. Contractor’s confirmation tests during performance of remedial work:
1) Performance: Perform tests in manner acceptable to the Engineer. 2) Frequency: Double amount specified for initial confirmation tests.

D. Piping system testing:

1. As specified in Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.

END OF SECTION
Precast Electrical Handholes and Electrical Manholes
02581-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02581 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02581

PRECAST ELECTRICAL HANDHOLES AND ELECTRICAL MANHOLES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Precast Portland cement concrete handholes and accessories.

B. Alternates:

1. Contractor may propose to construct cast-in-place structures in lieu of the precast structures specified.
a. Obtain the Engineer’s acceptance of this alternative before submitting, providing, or installing.
b. Submit full information on design and detailing of proposed alternatives, including design details and drawings of the same types required by this Section for precast structures.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.

C. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.

2. C857 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

3. C858 - Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

4. C891 - Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

5. C1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

6. C1037 - Standard Practice for Inspection of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

D. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

1. Title 29, Chapter XVII, Part 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA).

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

Precast Electrical Handholes and Electrical Manholes
02581-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02581 (DraftFinal) F. National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA).

G. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE):

1. 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity.

H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Handhole: An enclosure for use in underground systems that has been sized and detailed to allow personnel to reach into, but not enter, the enclosure to install, operate, or maintain equipment or wiring or both. (Reference: NEC, Article 100.)
a. As used in this Section, handhole will refer to a precast electrical handhole.

2. Manhole: An enclosure for use in underground systems that has been sized and detailed to allow personnel to enter the enclosure to install, operate, or maintain equipment or wiring or both.
a. As used in this Section, manhole will refer to a precast electrical manhole.

3. Portland cement concrete: A composite material consisting of a Portland cement binder, water, admixtures, and a combination of fine and coarse mineral aggregates.
a. Abbreviated PCC as in PCC HANDHOLE or PCC MANHOLE.

4. Precast concrete: A concrete fabrication designed by a qualified engineer and subsequently fabricated at a qualified fabrication site, which is usually located some distance from the site where the fabrication will be installed.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data: Manufacturer’s catalog data, details, and warranties for the following items.

1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
a. Materials of construction.
b. Joint details and joint-sealing materials.
c. Data for hatches or covers and rings.
d. Preformed channels and accessories for cable racking. e. Drain and sump details, including removable covers.
f. Pulling iron details.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
a. Shop drawings for each structure shall bear the seal and signature of a professional engineer licensed in the state where the structures will be installed.
b. Dimensioned and “to-scale” plans, sections, and details for each structure, including:
1) Layout plan for that structure.

Precast Electrical Handholes and Electrical Manholes
02581-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02581 (DraftFinal) 2) Sizes, locations, and vertical positions of duct bank windows and knockout panels.
3) Locations and details for access openings, pulling irons, embedded cable supports and racks, and sumps.
4) Details of structural reinforcement showing bar size and spacing; true position of reinforcement in structural members with clear concrete cover at both inside and outside faces; location, bar size, and spacing of added reinforcement around openings; and other details relevant to design and fabrication of the structure.
5) Details of joints between adjacent precast sections, including provisions for overlap and for placement of sealants.

D. Design data:

1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
a. Structural calculations:
1) Submit complete structural calculations for each structure. 2) Provide calculations bearing the seal and signature of a professional engineer licensed in the state where the structures will be installed. b. Manufacturer’s statement of materials used for fabrication and construction, in accordance with ASTM C858, for record. Include the following:
1) Concrete mix design: For each concrete mix design to be used for the structures, include data describing:
a) Source and type of cement.
b) Sources, grading, and specific gravities of aggregates. c) Aggregate reactivity data.
d) Concrete mix proportions and design strength.
e) Type, name, and dosage of admixtures included in the concrete mix.
2) Reinforcing steel: Mill certificates.

E. Test reports:

1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
a. Fabricator’s tests for compressive strength of concrete used in structures, made in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C858.

F. Certificates:

1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
a. Manufacturer’s current plant certification under NPCA for the structures to be supplied.
1) Certification shall be current and in-effect at the time structures are manufactured.
b. Manufacturer’s certification that handholes and manholes are in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C858.

G. Manufacturer’s instructions:

1. Instructions for handling and setting structures in place.

2. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
a. Instructions for operation and maintenance of hatches.

Precast Electrical Handholes and Electrical Manholes
02581-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02581 (DraftFinal) H. Manufacturer’s field reports:

1. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
a. Manufacturer’s inspection reports in accordance with ASTM C1037.

I. Closeout documents:

1. Project record documents:
a. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
1) Final, revised plans and details of as-constructed precast handholes and manholes if requested for record by the Engineer.

2. Warranties:
a. Manufacturer’s standard warranty for:
1) Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes and accessories.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Designer:
a. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
1) Professional engineer qualified in the design of concrete structures and holding a current license in the state where the structures will be installed.

2. Manufacturer:
a. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
1) Holding current NPCA plant certification for the products produced. 2) Demonstrating at least 5 years of experience in the design, production, and installation of products of the type required for this Work. 3) Capable of providing structural designs prepared by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the structures will be installed. 4) Providing inspection during fabrication and handling in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C1037.

3. Installer:
a. Capable of providing equipment of adequate capacity and mobility to handle and set units with proper bearing on the subgrade and without damage to the unit.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing, shipping, handling, and unloading:

1. Package and brace structures to avoid damage during shipping and handling.

2. Furnish crane or forklift for unloading and setting of Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes.

B. Acceptance at Site:

1. Structures delivered to the Site with cracks, damage, and damaged or missing accessories shall be removed from the Site and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Storage and protection:

1. Store handholes and manholes and their appurtenances in areas protected from damage due to weather and Site operations.

Precast Electrical Handholes and Electrical Manholes
02581-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02581 (DraftFinal)

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate installation of precast electrical handholes and manholes with duct banks specified in Section 16133 - Duct Banks.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty for precast handhole and manhole structures and accessories.

1.10 SYSTEM START-UP
A. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Design, fabricate, and install precast electrical handholes and precast electrical manholes of the size and type indicated on the Drawings and specified.

1. Construction of cast-in-place concrete electrical structures, including handholes and manholes, are specified in other Sections.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND

MANHOLES
A. General:

1. Provide Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes configured and designed as indicated on the Drawings and specified.

2. In accordance with ASTM C858, unless otherwise noted. a. Concrete: Provide units with minimum specified compressive strength (f’c) of 5000 pounds per square inch and using Type II cement.

B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Jensen Precast.

2. Oldcastle Precast.

C. Components:

1. Floor:
a. Construct floors as a monolith.
b. Where sump or low-point drain is included, slope floor to that point.

2. Roof, walls, and base:
a. Designed and rated to support vehicle and pedestrian loads at the spans indicated.
b. See the “Electrical Handhole and Manhole Schedule” indicated on the Drawings for required load rating by structure location.

Precast Electrical Handholes and Electrical Manholes
02581-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02581 (DraftFinal)

3. Floor access doors:
a. Handholes: Aluminum plate hinged floor access door (hatch) as specified in Section 08320 - Floor Access Doors.
1) Load rating:
a) “Heavy Duty” for covers at locations designated for “Roadway” loads.
b) “Medium Duty” or stronger for covers at locations designated for “Sidewalk” loads.
2) Minimum access door size not less than 36 inches square, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
3) Provide bearing surface with pre-installed continuous elastomeric gasket to minimize water infiltration at lid.
4) Provide skid-resistant lid with cast-in or machined-in grid pattern and the word “ELECTRICAL” in block letters at least 1.5 inches high. b. Manholes: Cast iron frame and cover:
1) Manhole rings and covers: As specified in Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.

D. Accessories:

1. Provide accessories as indicated on the Drawings and specified.

2. Materials at duct bank penetrations:
a. Joint filler as specified in Section 03150 - Concrete Accessories. b. Backer rod and sealant as specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealants.

3. Pulling irons:
a. Provide non-corroding cable pulling irons located for use with each current duct bank location and additional irons for use with duct banks that may be installed through future knockout panels.
b. Pulling irons may not be located on the floor.
c. Where pulling irons are installed on the wall, any pockets surrounding the irons shall have bottom surfaces sloped to drain.
d. Secure pulling eyes to structure reinforcement.

4. Cable racks and racking hardware:
a. Materials: as specified in Section 16070 - Hangers and Supports. b. Embedded slots: Maximum depth of 1.5 inches.

5. Sumps and drains:
a. Fiberglass or HDPE fabrications, including removable lids to prevent tripping hazards.

E. Fabrication:

1. Embeds:
a. Install embedded items with provisions for drainage to remove dripping or standing water, and to minimize corrosion.
1) Pulling irons may not be placed on the floor or in pockets that will collect water.
2) Detail bottom of cable rack channels to provide a downward sloping “sill” at the bottom of each vertical channel, so that the channel slot drains toward the floor.

Precast Electrical Handholes and Electrical Manholes
02581-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02581 (DraftFinal) b. Concrete cover:
1) Provide minimum 0.75-inch clear concrete cover between embeds and surrounding reinforcement.
2) Provide minimum 1.25-inch clear concrete cover between embed and exterior face of wall.

F. Tests and inspections:

1. Test and inspect structures in accordance with ASTM C858 and ASTM C1037.

2.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. General requirements:

1. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical for general requirements for electrical work.

2. Provide structures of the sizes and shapes indicated on the Drawings, with layouts, dimensions, and details as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.

3. In accordance with the requirements of:
a. NEC.
b. Project regulatory requirements as specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.

B. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:

1. Load resistance of boxes and covers.

2. Design requirements: Loads on structures:
a. In accordance with ASTM C857, except as modified in this Section. b. Loads at the ground surface:
1) See the “Electrical Handhole and Manhole Schedule” indicated on the Drawings for minimum surface loading requirements at each structure. Loads are designated as “sidewalk,” or ”roadway”. 2) Vehicle and pedestrian loadings in the following paragraphs need not be additive; however, structures designated for “roadway” loading shall also support “sidewalk” loads.
3) “Sidewalk”: Load from regular pedestrian traffic with considerations for occasional non-deliberate vehicular traffic:
a) Designation “A-0.3” in ASTM C857 Table 1 (300-psf uniform load).
4) ”Roadway”: Load from heavy, frequently repeated vehicle traffic:
a) Designation “A-16” in ASTM C857 Table 1 (AASHTO HS20-44). c. Lateral earth pressure loads:
1) Determine in accordance with the following requirements. Include effects of groundwater and seismic accelerations on lateral earth pressures.
a) Equivalent lateral pressure: 80 pounds per square foot per foot of depth (triangular distribution).
b) Surface surcharge load:
(1) Backfill-induced live load surcharge of 100 pounds per square foot (rectangular distribution).
(2) In accordance with ASTM C857 Vehicle Load Designation “A-16” for “Roadway” or “A-0.3” for “Sidewalk” where such Precast Electrical Handholes and Electrical Manholes
02581-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02581 (DraftFinal) surcharge exceeds backfill loads described in the preceding paragraph.
c) Groundwater effects:
(1) Include effects from groundwater and soils saturated by flooding using design elevations specified in
Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
(2) Use a passive lateral pressure of 300 pounds per cubic foot (pcf), which is determined from the equivalent fluid
pressure.
d) Seismic design:
(1) As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
(2) On opposite sides of the structure that are perpendicular to the direction of acceleration, include equivalent lateral pressure (inverted fluid pressure distribution), beginning with a pressure of 0 at the base of the structure, and
increasing at a rate of 400 pounds per square foot of rise toward the ground surface.
(3) Apply seismic effects as additive force on side where the soil mass is being accelerated toward the structure, and as subtractive force on the opposite side where the soil mass is being accelerated away from the structure.
d. Groundwater and flood loads - buoyancy effects:
1) As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria, for design groundwater and design flood elevations.
2) Buoyancy: For groundwater and flood conditions, provide factor of safety against flotation of at least 1.20.
a) If the weight of soil overlying footing projections on the structure is considered to resist flotation, use a buoyant unit weight of soil equal to not more than 30 pounds per cubic foot.
b) Concrete fill may be provided in the bottom section of precast Portland cement concrete structures to add weight. Submit proposed details.
e. Soil-bearing pressure at base:
1) Maximum 2,500 pounds per square foot total pressure on prepared subgrade soils.
f. Lifting and handling loads:
1) Make provision in the design for the effects of loads or stresses that may be imposed on structures during fabrication, transportation, or erection.
g. Load combinations:
1) Design structures to sustain the specified loads individually or in combination.

3. Design requirements: Structural analysis, design, and detailing:
a. General:
1) Analyze and design structures, including the effects of 2-way action (“plate action”) and of load transfer around current and future openings.
2) Where structures include panels designed for future removal (“knockout panels”), design structures for loads and stresses with any combination of any or all such panels in place or removed.

Precast Electrical Handholes and Electrical Manholes
02581-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02581 (DraftFinal) b. Precast Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
1) Design structures in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 and this Section.
2) Provide reinforcement at areas subject to tensile stress when loaded with the specified loads and combinations thereof.
3) Provide temperature and shrinkage reinforcement to equal or exceed ACI 318 requirements in concrete sections.
4) Provide minimum clear concrete cover over reinforcement at both interior and exterior faces of members in accordance with the following:
a) Handholes: 1.25 inches.
b) Manholes: 2 inches.
5) Reinforcement details:
a) Walls: For structures with wall thickness of 8 inches or less, locate a single mat of reinforcement at the center of the wall. b) Slabs: For structures with slab thickness of 7 inches or less, locate a single mat of reinforcement at the center of the slab. c) Structures with wall or slab thicknesses exceeding these limits shall have a reinforcement at each face of the member.
6) Joints:
a) Provide structures with watertight joints between sections and detailed to minimize water infiltration at duct bank and conduit penetrations.
b) Provide structures with non-skid, shiplap, or tongue and groove joints between sections.

4. Design requirements: Materials:
a. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:
1) In accordance with ASTM C858 except as modified in this Section.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install precast electrical handholes and manholes as indicated on the Drawings and specified.

B. Install additional handholes and manholes required so installation procedures will be in accordance with the cable manufacturer’s pulling tension requirements.

1. Include proposed locations and details of such additional handholes and manholes with the Submittals under this Section.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Design:

1. Prepare detailed and scalable layouts for each manhole structure showing locations of conduit or duct bank penetrations, clearances, locations, and sizes of access openings and major accessories.

Precast Electrical Handholes and Electrical Manholes
02581-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02581 (DraftFinal) B. Protection:

1. Where handhole and manhole structures are installed adjacent to existing site structures or utilities, provide excavation support or other protection as required to maintain those facilities in service and to prevent damage to both existing and new facilities.

C. Site preparation:

1. Excavate and prepare exposed subgrade as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.

2. Install and compact foundation layer as indicated on the Drawings and specified.

3. Level foundation materials so that structures will be set plumb, and duct banks will be at proper grade and alignment.
a. Install with uniform bearing on foundation materials. b. Wedging or blocking of base sections for leveling over the foundation materials will not be permitted.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General:

1. Protect handholes and manholes from displacement, flooding, or flotation.

B. Portland cement concrete handholes and manholes:

1. Install structures in accordance with ASTM C891 and as specified in this Section.
a. In the event of conflicts, the more restrictive provisions shall apply.

2. Clean and prime joints between adjacent precast sections. a. Install sealing compound between sections and provide watertight joints.

3. Set covers and hatches at elevations indicated on the Drawings. a. Securely attach frames to top of precast structures and grade adjustment rings.

4. Penetrations:
a. Holes for duct banks and other penetrations may not be cut into precast handholes and manholes unless they are located at designated locations shown on the Shop Drawings or at knockout panels cast into the structure during manufacturing.
b. Carefully remove concrete from knockout panel areas with saws. 1) Ensure that break-back does not extend beyond the designated limits of the knockout panel.
c. Coat any reinforcement cut or exposed during removal of knockout panel sections with minimum 2 coats of high solids epoxy as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.
1) Apply epoxy coating applied over and at least 1 inch past the perimeter of the reinforcement.

5. Install duct banks and conduit penetrations in accordance with the penetration details indicated on the Drawings.

6. Fill holes that were provided for handling or other temporary purposes with non-shrink cement grout using procedures as specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, unless otherwise detailed by the manufacturer.

7. Backfill handholes and manholes as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in Section 02300 - Earthwork.

Precast Electrical Handholes and Electrical Manholes
02581-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02581 (DraftFinal) C. Site tolerances:

1. Set electrical handholes and manholes plumb and true at locations indicated on the Drawings.

2. Tolerances on placing:
a. Horizontal location: Within 1 inch.
b. Vertical elevation: Within 1/2 inch.
c. Plumb: Within 1/8 inch over 10 feet.

3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION
A. Repair cracks or blemishes in concrete as described in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. After final grading is complete, adjust access covers to grade.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Before installation of cables in any duct banks and handholes or manholes, remove concrete spoil, forms, debris, silt, dust, and other foreign material.

3.07 SCHEDULES
A. See Drawings for the “Electrical Handhole and Manhole Schedule”.

END OF SECTION

Filter Fabric
02620-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02620 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02620

FILTER FABRIC
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Nonwoven filter fabric.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. D4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus.

2. D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity.

3. D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles.

4. D4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles.

5. D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile.

6. D5261 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of Geotextiles.

7. D6241 - Standard Test Method for the Static Puncture Strength of Geotextiles and Geotextile-Related Products Using a 50-mm Probe.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile fabric manufactured from polypropylene fibers.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data.

B. Samples.

C. Quality control submittals:

1. Certificates of Compliance.

2. Manufacturer's Instructions.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and protection:

1. Furnish filter fabric in protective covers capable of protecting the fabric from ultraviolet rays, abrasion, and water.

Filter Fabric
02620-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02620 (DraftFinal)

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Take field measurements to determine the lengths and dimensions of the surfaces to receive the fabric.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Propex, Geotex 401.

2. Ten Cate Geosynthetics, Mirafi 140N.

2.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Physical properties: Meet the following minimum requirements:

Property (1) Test Method Unit Requirements(1)
Minimum Weight ASTM D5261 oz 4.0
Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D4632 lbs 100
Grab Elongation ASTM D4632 % 50
Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D4533 lbs 50
CBR Puncture Resistance ASTM D6241 lbs 300
UV Resistance (strength retained at 500 hrs) ASTM D4355 % 70 Apparent Opening Size (AOS) ASTM D4751 US sieve 70
Permittivity ASTM D4491 sec-1 1.7
Flow Rate ASTM D4491 gpm/ft2 130
(1) Minimum average roll values.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of filter fabric.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface preparation:

1. During grading operations, take care not to disturb the subgrade.

2. This may require use of lightweight dozers for low strength soils such as saturated, cohesionless, or low cohesion soils.

Filter Fabric
02620-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02620 (DraftFinal) B. Prior to placement of fabric: Prepare surface to smooth condition free of debris, depressions, or obstructions that may damage the fabric.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions and as complimented in this Section.

B. Place the filter fabric smoothly without folds or wrinkles.

C. Use special care when placing the filter in contact with the soil so that no void spaces occur between the filter and the prepared surface.

D. Overlap the parallel rolls and ends of rolls a minimum of 24 inches and not less than manufacturer's instructions.

E. Do not drag filter fabric across subgrade.

F. Make overlaps at ends of rolls in the direction of the aggregate placement with the previous roll on top.

G. Use lightweight dozers if necessary. Do not allow equipment directly on filter fabric.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection:

1. Before covering, the condition of the fabric will be observed by the Engineer to determine that no holes or rips exist in the fabric.

2. Repair all holes and rips by placing a new layer of fabric extending beyond the defect in all directions a distance equal to the minimum overlap required for adjacent rolls.

END OF SECTION

Stabilization Fabric
02621-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02621 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02621

STABILIZATION FABRIC
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Woven stabilization fabric used for subgrade enhancement.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. D4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus.

2. D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity.

3. D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles.

4. D4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles.

5. D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile.

6. D6241 - Standard Test Method for the Static Puncture Strength of Geotextiles and Geotextile-Related Products Using a 50-mm Probe.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Stabilization Fabric: Woven geotextile fabric manufactured from polypropylene yarns.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data.

B. Samples.

C. Quality control submittals:

1. Certificates of Compliance.

2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and protection:

1. Furnish stabilization fabric in protective covers capable of protecting the fabric from ultraviolet rays, abrasion, and water.

Stabilization Fabric
02621-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02621 (DraftFinal)

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field measurements:

1. Take field measurements to determine the exact lengths and dimensions of the surfaces to receive the fabric.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Propex, Geotex 200ST.

2. Ten Cate Geosynthetics, Mirafi 500X.

2.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Physical properties: Meet the following minimum requirements:

Property (1) Test Method Unit Requirements(1)
Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D4632 lbs 200
Grab Elongation ASTM D4632 % 15
Trapezoid Tear Strength ASTM D4533 lbs 75
CBR Puncture Resistance ASTM D6241 lbs 700
UV Resistance (strength retained at 500 hrs) ASTM D4355 % 70 Apparent Opening Size (AOS) ASTM D4751 US sieve 40
Permittivity ASTM D4491 sec-1 0.05
Flow Rate ASTM D4491 gpm/ft2 4
(1) Minimum average roll values.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of stabilization fabric.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface preparation: During grading operations, take care not to disturb the subgrade. This may require use of lightweight dozers for low strength soils such as saturated, cohesionless, or low cohesion soils.

B. Prior to placement of fabric: Prepare surface to smooth condition free of debris, depressions, or obstructions that may damage the fabric.

Stabilization Fabric
02621-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02621 (DraftFinal)

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions and as complimented in this Section.

B. Place the stabilization fabric smoothly without folds or wrinkles.

C. Use special care when placing the stabilization fabric in contact with the soil so that no void spaces occur between the stabilization fabric and the prepared surface.

D. Overlap the parallel rolls and ends of rolls a minimum of 24 inches and not less than recommended by manufacturer.

E. Do not drag stabilization fabric across subgrade.

F. Make overlaps at ends of rolls in the direction of the aggregate placement with the previous roll on top.

G. Use lightweight dozers, if necessary. Do not allow equipment directly on stabilization fabric.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Before covering, the condition of the fabric will be observed by the Engineer to determine that no holes or rips exist in the fabric. Repair all holes or rips by placing a new layer of fabric extending beyond the defect in all directions, a distance equal to the minimum overlap required for adjacent rolls.

END OF SECTION

Asphaltic Concrete Paving (CA)
02742A-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02742A (DraftFinal) SECTION 02742A

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING (CA)
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Asphalt pavement on prepared subgrade or aggregate base course to lines, grades, and compacted thickness as indicated on the Drawings.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. T 209 - Standard Method of Test for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Asphalt Mixtures.

B. Caltrans Standard Test Methods:

1. California Test 304 - Preparation of Bituminous Mixtures for Testing.

2. California Test 362 - Determining Asphalt Content in Bituminous Mixtures by Vacuum Extraction.

3. California Test 375 - Determining the In-Place Density and Relative Compaction of AC Pavement.

4. California Test 382 - Determining Asphalt Content in Bituminous Mixtures (Ignition Oven Method).

C. State of California Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, latest edition (Caltrans Standard Specifications):

1. Section 37 - Bituminous Seals.

2. Section 39 - Asphalt Concrete.

3. Section 92 - Asphalt Binders.

4. Section 94 - Asphaltic Emulsions.

5. Section 96 - Geosynthetics.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Job mix formula.

B. Shop Drawings.

C. Product data:

1. Asphalt binder.

2. Asphalt aggregate.

3. Pavement reinforcing fabric.

4. Tack coat application rate calculations.

D. Quality control Submittals:

1. Test results.

Asphaltic Concrete Paving (CA)
02742A-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02742A (DraftFinal)

2. Certificate of Compliance.

3. Certificate of Competence.

E. Equipment list.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Asphalt pavement delivery:

1. Transport the mixture from the mixing plant to the point of use in vehicles having tight bodies previously cleaned of foreign materials.

2. Treat bodies as necessary to prevent material from sticking to the bodies.

3. Cover each load with canvas or other suitable material of sufficient size and thickness to protect the asphalt mixture from the weather.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements:

1. Asphalt concrete:
a. Place asphalt concrete only when surface is dry, and when atmospheric temperature in the shade is 40 degrees Fahrenheit and rising, or above 50 degrees Fahrenheit if falling.
b. Do not place asphalt concrete when weather is foggy or rainy, when base on which material is to be placed is in wet or frozen conditions, or when, in the opinion of the Engineer, weather conditions will prevent proper handling, finishing, or compaction of the mixtures.

2. Prime coat:
a. Do not apply prime coat when atmospheric temperature is below 60 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Apply prime coat only when base course is dry or contains moisture not in excess of that which will permit uniform distribution and desired penetration.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. This Work shall consist of furnishing and mixing aggregate and asphalt binder at a central mixing plant, spreading and compaction of the mixture as specified and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. In general, asphalt concrete and asphalt concrete base shall be in accordance with to Section 39 “Asphalt Concrete,” and applicable referenced sections of the Caltrans Standard Specifications:

1. Where conflicts exist, this Specification shall govern.

Asphaltic Concrete Paving (CA)
02742A-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02742A (DraftFinal)

2.02 ASPHALT PAVEMENT MATERIALS
A. Asphalts:

1. Asphalt binder: Steam-refined paving asphalt, PG 64-10, in accordance with Section 92-1.02B “Performance Grades Asphalt Binders” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

2. Tack coat: Asphaltic emulsion, Grade SSA1, in accordance with Section 94 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

B. Asphalt aggregate:

1. Aggregate shall be in accordance with Section 39-2.02B(4)(b) of the Caltrans Standard Specifications for Type A HMA grading:
a. For pavement placed in multiple lifts:
1) Aggregate for the final lift (surface layer) shall be 1/2-inch maximum, medium.
2) Aggregate for other lifts/layers shall be 3/4-inch maximum, medium. b. For pavements placed in a single lift:
1) Aggregate shall be 1/2-inch maximum, medium.

2. Use of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) in asphalt concrete and asphalt concrete base is prohibited.

C. Asphalt pavement shall be produced in a batch mixing plant, a continuous pugmill mixing plant, or dryer-drum mixing plant:

1. Proportioning shall be in accordance with Section 39-2.01B(8)(a) of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

2. Mixing shall be in accordance with Section 39-2.01B(8)(a) of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

2.03 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
A. As specified in Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.

B. Placed at the following locations:

1. At locations indicated on the Drawings.

2. Asphalt pavement.

C. Compacted thickness shall be as indicated on the Drawings

2.04 EQUIPMENT
A. Spreading and compacting equipment:

1. Spreading equipment shall be in accordance with Section 39-2.01C(2) and applicable referenced sections of the Caltrans Standard Specifications:
a. Only in areas inaccessible to the machine, by approval of the Engineer, will hand spreading be permitted.

2. Compaction equipment shall be in accordance with Section 39-2.01C(2) and applicable referenced sections of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

Asphaltic Concrete Paving (CA)
02742A-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02742A (DraftFinal)

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engineer will perform sampling and tests of materials in accordance with California Test Method Number 304 and California Test Method Number 362 or 382, as applicable. Samples will be taken from materials as delivered to the site.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Verify surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence installation until such conditions have been corrected. Beginning application means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection:

1. Protect concrete pavements and walks, curbs and bases, and other improvements adjacent to the operations with suitable materials.

2. Building and other surfaces shall be covered with paper or other protection, when required.

3. Repair any damage caused by the Contractor’s employees or operations to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Subgrade preparation:

1. Immediately prior to applying tack coat, or immediately prior to placing the asphalt pavement when tack coat is not required, the subgrade to receive asphalt pavement shall be in accordance with the compaction requirement and elevation tolerances specified for the material involved and shall be cleaned to remove any loose or extraneous material.

2. If the asphalt pavement is to be placed on an existing base or pavement that was not constructed as part of the contract, clean the surface by sweeping, flushing, or other means to remove loose particles of paving, dirt, and other extraneous material immediately before applying the tack coat.

3.03 TACK COAT
A. Tack coat:

1. A tack coat of asphaltic emulsion shall be applied to vertical surfaces of existing pavement, curbs, gutters, and construction joints in the surfacing against which additional material is to be placed, or as otherwise specified in this Section.

2. Applied in 1 application at a rate according to Section 39-2.01A(3)(j) and residual rate requirements according to the mix design and application.

Asphaltic Concrete Paving (CA)
02742A-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02742A (DraftFinal)

3.04 ASPHALT PAVEMENT
A. Placing materials in a windrow, then picking it up and placing it in the asphalt paver with loading equipment, will be permitted provided that:

1. Asphalt paver is of such design that the material will fall into a hopper that has a movable bottom conveyor to feed and screed.

2. Loader is constructed and operated so that substantially of the material deposited into windrows is picked up and deposited into the paving machine.

3. Windrow is deposited only so far in advance of the paver to provide for continuous operation of the paver and not so far as to allow the temperature of the asphalt pavement in the windrow to fall below 260 degrees Fahrenheit.

B. Unless lower temperatures are directed by the Engineer, asphalt concrete shall be spread, and the first coverage of initial or breakdown compaction shall be complete before the surface temperature of the mixture drops below 250 degrees Fahrenheit.

1. Breakdown and intermediate compaction shall be completed before the surface temperature drops below 190 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Compaction shall be completed before the surface temperature drops below 150 degrees Fahrenheit.

C. Spread and compacted in the number of layers and of the thicknesses indicated in the following table:

1. Thickness tolerance of within 0.1 inch is allowed for asphalt concrete.

2. Total thickness tolerance of within 0.2 inches is allowed for asphalt concrete base.

Total Thickness
Indicated on
Drawings(1)
Number
of Lifts
Top Layer
Thickness
(inches)
Next Lower Layer
Thickness
(inches)
Other Lower Layer
Thicknesses
(inches)
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
3 inches(2) 2 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/4 1-1/2 ----- -----
3-1/4 to 4-3/4 inches 2 1-3/4 2-1/4 1-3/4 3 ----- ----- Notes:
(1) When pavement-reinforcing fabric is shown to be placed between layers of asphalt pavement, the thickness of asphalt pavement above the pavement-reinforcing fabric shall be considered to be the “Total Thickness Indicated on the Drawings” for the purpose of spreading and compacting the asphalt pavement above the pavement-reinforcing fabric.
(2) If approved by the Engineer, 1 lift of 3 inches may be placed. (3) At least 2 layers shall be placed if the total thickness is less than 5 inches. At least 3 layers shall be placed if the total thickness is more than 5 inches, and less than 10-1/2 inches. At least 4 layers shall be placed if the total thickness is greater than 10-1/2 inches.

D. A layer shall not be placed over another layer which exceeds 3 inches in compacted thickness until the temperature of the layer which exceeds 3 inches in compacted thickness is less than 160 degrees Fahrenheit at mid depth.

E. If the temperature of any layer drops below 140 degrees Fahrenheit, or if directed by the Engineer, apply tack coat before placing next layer.

Asphaltic Concrete Paving (CA)
02742A-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02742A (DraftFinal) F. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, asphalt mixtures shall not be handled, spread, or windrowed in a manner that will stain the finished surface of any pavement or other improvements.

G. Completed mixture shall be deposited on the prepared subgrade at a uniform quantity per linear foot, as necessary to provide the required compacted thickness without resorting to spotting, picking up, or otherwise shifting the mixture.

H. Spreading:

1. All layers of asphalt pavement shall be spread with an asphalt paver and shall be in accordance with Section 39-2.01C and applicable referenced sections of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

2. At locations where the asphalt pavement is to be placed over areas inaccessible to spreading and rolling equipment, layers of asphalt pavement shall be distributed directly out of the back of the dump truck and spread by hand:
a. Asphalt pavement spread by hand shall be compacted thoroughly to the required lines, grades, and cross-sections by means of pneumatic tampers, or by other methods that will produce the same degree of compaction as pneumatic tampers.

I. Compaction:

1. Compaction of asphalt pavement shall be in accordance with Section 39-2.01C, and applicable referenced sections of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

2. Percent of maximum theoretical density for each layer of asphalt pavement shall be 91 to 97 percent. Theoretical maximum density to be determined using AASHTO T 209 and Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 39.

J. Segregation shall be avoided, and the surfacing shall be free of pockets of coarse or fine material. Asphalt pavement containing hardened lumps shall not be used:

1. In areas inaccessible to paving and compacting equipment where spreading is done by hand, minimize the amount of segregation.

K. Location of longitudinal joints in the top layer will be determined by the Engineer and shall not adversely affect the quality of the finished product.

L. At locations, or as directed by the Engineer, the asphalt concrete shall be square and at least 1-inch thick when conforming to existing surfacing. Tapering or feathering is not allowed.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Control the quality of Work and shall provide adequate testing to ensure compliance with these Specifications:

1. Type and size of the samples shall be suitable to determine conformance with stability, density, thickness, and other specified requirements. a. Use an approved power saw or core drill for cutting samples. b. Furnish tools, labor, and materials for cutting samples, testing, and replacing the pavement where samples were removed.

Asphaltic Concrete Paving (CA)
02742A-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02742A (DraftFinal) c. Take a minimum of 1 sample for every 4,000 square feet of asphalt pavement placed.

2. Where open graded friction course is to be placed, core samples shall be taken prior to friction course placement.

B. Asphalt pavement shall match the grades indicated on the Drawings and shall be completely free from unintended hollows and high spots:

1. After completion of paving work, paving shall be flooded with water. a. Any ponding that results in standing water greater than 3/4 inch in depth shall be ringed with chalk.
b. Such hollows shall be corrected by removing and replacing the asphalt concrete.
c. Asphalt concrete patch shall be square and at least 1-inch thick when conforming to existing surfacing.
d. Tapering or feathering is not allowed.

C. Perform in-place density and compaction tests of the completed pavement in accordance with California Test Method Number 375, to determine compliance with the specified requirements. Submit test results to Engineer for approval.

D. Cracks, settling of surface, improper drainage, improper compaction, and sloppy connection to previously laid surfaces will be construed as improper workmanship and will not be accepted.

3.06 MAINTENANCE OF PAVEMENT
A. Upon completion of final rolling, traffic shall not be permitted on the finished pavement for at least 6 hours, or until the asphalt pavement has cooled sufficiently to withstand traffic without being deformed.

3.07 WORKMANSHIP AND WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of not less than 1 year upon completion of Work.

END OF SECTION

Pavement Markings
02762-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02762 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02762

PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Pavement marking requirements for striping, text, and graphics; traffic signs.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data.

B. Manufacturer's instructions.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator qualifications: Minimum 5 years of experience of applying traffic markings with satisfactory performance record.

B. Regulatory requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, including airborne emissions and industrial waste disposal requirements.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply pavement marking paint when:

1. Pavement is clean and thoroughly dry.

2. Ambient temperature is above 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

3. Precipitation is not expected within 12 hours of completion of application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Dunn-Edwards Corp.

2. Glidden Co.

3. Sherwin Williams Co.

B. Materials:

1. Pavement marking paint, latex based: One of the following or equal:
a. Dunn-Edwards: No. W 801, Vin-L-Stripe, epoxy-modified acrylic-latex based paint.
b. Glidden: 63240 Series, UltraHide Latex Traffic Paint. c. Sherwin Williams: Set fast acrylic water borne traffic marking paint.

Pavement Markings
02762-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02762 (DraftFinal)

2. Masonry conditioner: The following or equal:
a. Sherwin Williams: B46WZ1000, Masonry Conditioner.

3. Colors:
a. Text: White.
b. Parking dividers: White.
c. No parking zone markings: Yellow.
d. No parking curb: Red.
e. Handicap zone markings: Blue and white.
1) Blue paint: Match color No. 15090 in Federal Standard 595A as specified in Section 2-1720 of California Administrative Code Title 24 Handicap Regulations.
f. Accessible parking dividers and accessible route: Yellow. g. Directional arrows: White.
h. Driving lane dividers: White.

2.02 TRAFFIC SIGNS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Seton Name Plate Co.

2. Emedco.

B. Material, shapes, and graphics: Post mounted baked enamel on steel sheet, reflectorized to show the same shape and color both day and night, with mounting holes, in accordance with the Uniform Traffic Control Devices manual. Fasten sign to post with stainless steel bolts.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Remove dirt, oil, grease, and other materials which may affect paint adhesion.

B. Apply masonry conditioner on weathered or sandblasted surfaces, brick, or stucco.

3.02 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint at package consistency whenever possible. Thin paint as little as possible.

B. Apply paint with specifically designed and manufactured equipment for pavement marking. Provide:

1. Uniform straight edges without overspray.

2. 4 inch wide lines, unless indicated otherwise.

3. Hatching in handicap parking areas.

C. Provide striping between parking stalls as indicated on the Drawings:

1. Identify parking spaces with text as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Compact spaces: COMPACT.
b. Carpool spaces: CARPOOL.
c. Motorcycle spaces: MOTORCYCLE.

Pavement Markings
02762-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02762 (DraftFinal) d. Visitor spaces: VISITOR.
e. Clean Air Vehicle spaces: CLEAN AIR VEHICLE.
1) Lettering shall be at least 8 inches high.

D. Apply paint to obtain thickness recommended by paint manufacturer.

E. Paint traffic control markings, including striping, directional arrows, cross walks and lettering, and handicap striping and symbols as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with local governing agency's standards. Use stencils for arrows, lettering, and symbols.

F. Apply 700 square inch international handicap symbol on pavement surface where indicated on the Drawings:

1. On asphalt surfaces, paint blue symbol on white square.

2. On concrete surfaces, paint white symbol on blue square.

G. Install traffic signs where indicated on the Drawings. Set post in concrete to depth to resist sign damage from wind speed of 100 miles per hour.

END OF SECTION

Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Sidewalks
02772-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02772 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02772

CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Concrete curbs, gutters, sidewalks, driveways, access ramps, and alley intersections.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit data completely describing products.

B. Samples: Submit samples when requested.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Performance requirements: Construct various types of concrete curb, gutter, sidewalk, driveways and alley intersections to dimensions and details indicated on the Drawings.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Class A, as specified in Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Curb finishing mortar: 1 part Portland cement to 2 parts sand.

C. Form release material: Light oil or other releasing agent of type which does not discolor concrete or interfere with the application of finishing mortar to curb tops and faces.

D. Joint materials:

1. Expansion: As specified in Section 03150 - Concrete Accessories.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions:

1. Verify field conditions, including subgrade condition and interferences, before beginning construction.

Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Sidewalks
02772-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02772 (DraftFinal)

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface preparation:

1. Subgrade:
a. Construct and compact true to grades and lines indicated on the Drawings and requirements as specified Section 02050 - Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork.
b. Remove soft or unsuitable material to depth of not less than 6 inches below subgrade elevation and replace with satisfactory material.

2. Forms and subgrade: Water immediately in advance of placing concrete.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Special techniques:

1. Contractor’s option:
a. Construct concrete curbs and gutters by conventional use of forms, or by means of curb and gutter machine when acceptable to the Engineer. b. When use of machines designed specifically for work of this Section are accepted by the Engineer, results must be equal to or better than those produced by use of forms.
c. Applicable requirements of construction that apply to use of forms also apply to use of machines.
d. Discontinue use of machines when results are not satisfactory to the Engineer.

B. Forms:

1. Carefully set to line and grade and securely stake in position forms conforming to dimensions of items to be constructed.

2. Thoroughly clean prior to each use and coat with form releasing material.

C. Expansion and weakened-plane joints:

1. Expansion joints:
a. Construct vertically, and at right angles to centerline of street and match joints in adjacent pavement or sidewalks.
b. Constructed at radius points, driveways, alley entrances, and at adjoining structures.
c. Fill joints with expansion joint filler material.

2. Weakened-plane joints:
a. Construct as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Match joint locations and details in adjacent curbs, gutters, and sidewalks.

D. Concrete:

1. Placing:
a. Thoroughly spade concrete away from forms so that no rock pockets exist next to forms and so that no coarse aggregate will show when forms are removed.

2. Compacting:
a. Compact by mechanical vibrators accepted by the Engineer. b. Continue tamping or vibrating until mortar flushes to surface and coarse aggregate is below concrete surface.

Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Sidewalks
02772-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02772 (DraftFinal)

3. Form removal:
a. Front form faces: Do not remove before concrete has taken initial set and has sufficient strength to carry its own weight.
b. Gutter and rear forms: Do not remove until concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage to edges. Take special care to prevent damage.

4. Finishing and curing: Comply with requirements as specified in Section 03366 - Concrete Finishes, except as modified here:
a. As soon as curb face forms are stripped, apply finishing mortar to the top and face of curb and trowel to a smooth, even finish. Finish with fine haired broom in direction of work.
b. Where curb is installed without integral gutter, extend finish 2 inches below grade.
c. Edge concrete at expansion joints to 1/4-inch radius. d. Flow lines of gutters shall be troweled smooth 4 inches out from curb face for integral curb and gutter and 4 inches on both sides of flowline for gutters without curbs.
e. Sidewalks and ramps: Broom finish.

E. Backfilling:

1. Unless otherwise specified, backfill behind curbs, gutters, or sidewalks with soil native to area and to lines and grades indicated on the Drawings.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:

1. Curbs and gutters:
a. Test face, top, back, and flow line with 10 foot straightedge or curve template longitudinally along surface.
b. Correct deviations in excess of 1/4 inch.

2. Gutters:
a. Frequency of testing: When required by the Engineer, where gutters have slope of 0.8 foot per 100 feet or less, or where unusual or special conditions cast doubt on capability of gutters to drain.
b. Test method: Establish flow in length of gutter to be tested by supplying water from hydrant, tank truck, or other source.
c. Required results:
1) 1 hour after supply of water is shut off, inspect gutter for evidence of ponding or improper shape.
2) In event water is found ponded in gutter to depth greater than 1/2 inch, or on adjacent asphalt pavement, correct defect or defects in manner acceptable to the Engineer without additional cost to the Contract.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Repair portions of concrete damaged while stripping forms or, when damage is severe, replace such work at no additional cost to the Contract. Evidence of repairs shall not be noticeable in the finished product.

B. Remove and replace sections of work deficient in depth or not conforming to requirements indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications at no Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Sidewalks
02772-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02772 (DraftFinal) additional cost to the Contract. Removal and replacement shall be the complete section between 2 joints.

END OF SECTION
Fences and Gates
02820-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02820 (DraftFinal) SECTION 02820

FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Fence, framework, fabric, and accessories.

2. Excavation for post bases and concrete foundation for posts.

3. Manual gates and related hardware.

4. Gate operators.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. A121 - Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire.

2. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

3. A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

4. A385 - Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip).

5. A392 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric.

6. A702 - Standard Specification for Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot-Wrought.

7. F626 - Standard Specification for Fence Fittings.

8. F668 - Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Other Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric.

9. F1043 - Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework.

10. F1184 - Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates.

11. F2200 - Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction.

B. State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans).

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit data completely describing products.

B. Shop drawings:

1. Remote and automatic gates: Submit drawings showing connection details indicating methods and means of mounting, attaching, and installing fence, operators and locks to gates, including wiring diagrams.

Fences and Gates
02820-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02820 (DraftFinal) C. Quality control submittals:

1. Certificates of compliance: Provide certification that materials conform to referenced specifications.

2. Qualifications: Provide installer's references and list of local references.

3. Manufacturer's instructions: Provide for gate operator equipment.

D. Contract closeout submittals:

1. Operation and maintenance manuals: Provide for electrical and mechanical equipment.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre-installation conference: Participate in conference, if required.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and handling: Unload, store, and protect materials such that they are not damaged.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field measurements:

1. Verify actual field distances so that CMU column and post spacing can be made uniform.

2. Verify and coordinate gate opening and column distances for driveway.

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Fences and gates: May be constructed at any time after earthwork, pipe work, and structures to which fence is related has been completed, but prior to erosion control application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Design requirements:

1. Gates shall be designed and constructed to withstand wind loads per the requirements of Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

B. Performance requirements:

1. Gate operator controls:
a. In addition to standard controls furnished with gate operators, make provisions for and provide terminal connection points for controls indicated on the Drawings and clearly indicated such connection points on operator control terminal board.
b. Operational sequence: Provide sequence as specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies and 17101A - Specific Control Strategies.

Fences and Gates
02820-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02820 (DraftFinal)

2.02 SPECIAL GATES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Ornamental iron rolling gates:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Capitol Steel Products.

2. Material: Black iron, galvanized.

3. Pickets:
a. 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch tubing.
b. Clear space between tubing for gate and section(s) of fence covered when the gate is in the open position shall be no greater than 2-1/4 inches in accordance with UL 325 and ASTM F2200.

4. Rail frames: 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inches tubing.

B. Tracking channel: Provide each channel with stop permanently attached at rear of channel:

1. Roller guide: Steel guide capable of being cast into roadway.

2. Posts for gate and track support: 3 inches by 3 inches tubing.

3. Roller wheels:
a. Front: Minimum wheel diameter 4 inch with maximum 1.5 inch opening between bottom of gate and top of track.
b. Rear: Same as front wheel.

C. Coatings:

1. Galvanized repair paint: 2 component, moisture-cured, zinc-rich urethane primer, minimum solids by volume of 83 percent plus or minus 2 percent. a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Tnemec, 90-97.
2) Devoe: Catha-Coat 313.

2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Rolling gates:

1. Provide controls for each gate motor operator such that operator can be controlled by either of 2 manually operated switches located where indicated on the Drawings:
a. Also provide control for motor operator such that gate can be controlled by either of 2 key-operated switch stations.
b. Provide gooseneck-mounting stands for switch station and key such stations alike.

2. Provide 1 push-button switch station located inside gate.

B. Outside gate operator stands for plant entry gates.

2.04 EQUIPMENT
A. Rolling gates:

1. Gate operator equipment:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) DKS Doorking, Series 9200.
b. Select operator based on final weight of the gate and manufacturer recommendations.

Fences and Gates
02820-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02820 (DraftFinal) c. Provide a minimum factor of safety of 1.5 in sizing gate operator power. d. Entry card reader and keypad station:
1) Provide a single card reader and keypad that is pedestal-mounted by the exterior of the gate according to City standards.
2) Knox model 3502 keyed entry:
a) Include stay-open feature for emergency services.
b) Install on same pedestal as the card reader.
3) Located as indicated on the Drawings.
e. Exit push button:
1) Provide an exit push button mounted on the gate operator equipment.
2) Locate to avoid tampering, as indicated on the Drawings. f. Provide gooseneck-mounting stands for the card reader and keypad station.
g. Provide a sliding type electric operator unit built into a compact enclosure mounted on heavy steel base.
1) Provide weatherproof enclosure.
2) Electric operator and all ancillary equipment (including sensors) must be hardwired. Battery-powered systems are unacceptable. h. Peripheral and accessory equipment:
1) Safety/Exit loops.
2) Safety loops on both exterior and interior of gate.
3) Single safety/exit loop on the interior of the gate. 4) Install according to manufacturer’s recommendations. 5) Install loops prior to paving.
i. Electric operator unit:
1) In accordance with UL 325. At a minimum, provide entrapment protection device type A (inherent entrapment protection system) and B1 (non-contact sensor).
2) Provide unit consisting of right angle gear head instantly reversing motor and magnetic brake, safety disc clutch, chain driven geared type automatic limit switch, magnetic reversing starter with overload protection, open and close adjustable limit switches, and emergency release for operation during power failure.
3) Provide unit that is prewired and ready to be connected to power and control sources.
4) Provide operators capable of operating on nominal 480-volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz power supply. Battery-powered systems are unacceptable. 5) Size motor to be capable of moving the weight of the gate. Provide a minimum factor of safety of 1.5 in sizing operator power. j. Gear head motor:
1) Provide locking mechanical drive disconnect inside facility to allow gate to be manually opened.
2) Provide motor that is built as 1 unit with 1 stage of reduction. 3) Provide reduction stage consisting of carefully machine cut carburized worm and SAE 65 bronze worm gear.
4) Bearings: Provide anti-friction bearings complying with following:
a) On motor shaft: Highest quality ball bearings.
b) On slow speed shafts: Tapered roller bearings.

Fences and Gates
02820-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02820 (DraftFinal) 5) Gears and bearings: Operate in bath of oil:
a) Prevent leakage of oil by providing double type oil seals around motor shaft and countershaft.
b) Provide magnetic drum type brake with its easily adjustable feature built onto jackshaft for positive gate control. k. Automatic limit switch:
1) Provide automatic limit switch designed to stop gates in fully open or closed positions that is precision built gear type driven by chain drive from jackshaft of operator.
2) Provide limit switch chain drive so located that any safety friction disc clutch slippage or manual operation of gate shall not cause mistiming of operator mechanism.
l. Operation:
1) Move gate by use of highest quality roller chain and heavy brackets attached to gates.
2) Provide simple releasing feature that is designed to operate in case of power failure.
3) Provide chain that is driven from dependable safety friction disc clutch on gear head motor's countershaft.
4) Provide safety clutch designed to protect personnel and equipment in case gate comes to contact with obstruction.
5) Operating speed:
a) Provide operators having operating speed of not less than 60 feet per minute nor more than 90 feet per minute.
6) In addition to standard controls furnished with gate operators, make provisions for and provide terminal connection points for controls indicated on the Drawings and clearly indicated such connection points on operator control terminal board.
7) Operational sequence: Provide sequence as specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies and 17101A - Specific Control Strategies.

B. Pedestrian Gate:

1. Magnetic door sensor with a card reader-operated lock, as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Post mounted gate locks: Provide locks that:

1. Are electrically operated, post mounted type, and capable of positively locking gates to latch post.

2. Include manual key lock for disconnect in event of power failure.

3. Are designed to operate on 120 volts alternating current and that are suitable for outdoor use.

4. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
a. Stanley Vemco, Number 420-141 for slide gate.

2.05 FABRICATION
A. Shop finishing:

1. Galvanizing: For items not fabricated of galvanized materials hot-dip galvanize products after fabrication in accordance with following as applicable:
a. ASTM A123.

Fences and Gates
02820-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02820 (DraftFinal) b. ASTM A153.
c. ASTM A385.

2. Mark galvanized products with name of galvanize, applicable ASTM designation, and weight of zinc coating.

3. Galvanize fabricated items complete, or in largest practicable sections.

4. Provide galvanizing at rate of 2.0 ounces per square foot, minimum.

5. Hardware:
a. Padlocks: Cadmium plated.
b. Chain: Galvanized.

B. Finish schedule:

1. Ferrous metal:
a. Typical: Clean, then hot-dip galvanize in accordance with galvanizing standards.

C. Field finish touch-up painting:

1. Galvanized repair paint: Apply paint having minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 to 3.5 mils.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Verify field conditions prior to construction.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface preparation:

1. Before locating fence posts grade ground to permit grade of fence to remain constant over any local elevations or depressions in ground line.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Rolling gates:

1. Provide gates that are motor operated where indicated on the Drawings:
a. Motor operator controls:
1) Install manually operated switches where indicated on the Drawings. 2) Install switch station stands where indicated on the Drawings.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's field service:

1. Manufacturer shall check and test powered gates and accessories before acceptance.

2. Test gate operator through 10 full cycles and adjust operation without binding, scraping, or uneven motion.

3. Test limit switches for proper “at rest” gate position.

Fences and Gates
02820-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/02820 (DraftFinal)

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust gate travel, stops, and operator position to meet field conditions.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean up surplus dirt, concrete, and other waste material and dress grade up upon completion of the work.

3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed gates against damage and, if damaged, repair prior to final acceptance.

END OF SECTION

Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete 03055-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03055 (DraftFinal) SECTION 03055

ADHESIVE-BONDED REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Bonding reinforcing bars and all thread rods in concrete using adhesives.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI).

1. 355.4 - Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete and Commentary.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. Standard B212.15 - Carbide Tipped Masonry Drills and Blanks for Carbide Tipped Masonry Drills.

C. ASTM international (ASTM):

1. C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete.

D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI).

E. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES):

1. AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements.

F. NSF International (NSF):

1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.

G. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

1. SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Evaluation Service Report (ESR): Report prepared by ICC-ES, or other testing agency acceptable to Engineer and to the Building Official, that documents testing and review of a product to confirm that it complies with the requirements of designated ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria, and to document its acceptance for use under the building code specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.

Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete 03055-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03055 (DraftFinal)

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Technical data for adhesives, including:

1. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions (MPII).

2. Independent laboratory test results indicating allowable loads in tension and shear for concrete of the types included in this Work, with load modification factors for temperature, spacing, edge distance, and other installation variables.

3. Handling and storage instructions.

4. Evidence of current listing under NSF-61 for use in contact with potable water.

B. Quality control Submittals:

1. Special inspection: Detailed step-by-step instructions for the special inspection procedures required by the building code specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.

2. For each adhesive to be used, Evaluation Report confirming that the product complies with the requirements of AC308 for both un-cracked and cracked concrete and for use in Seismic Design Categories A through F.

3. Installer qualifications:
a. Submit evidence of successful completion of adhesive manufacturer’s installation training program.
b. Submit evidence of current certification for installation of inclined and overhead anchors under sustained tension loading.

C. Inspection and testing reports:

1. Inspections: Field quality control: Reports of inspections and tests. a. Inspections: Field quality assurance: Reports of special inspections and tests.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Installation requirements:
a. Have available at the site, and install anchors in accordance with, the adhesive manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.

2. Installer qualifications:
a. Demonstrating successful completion of adhesive manufacturer’s on-site training program for installation of adhesive-bonded anchors. b. Holding current certification for installation of adhesive-bonded anchors by a qualified organization acceptable to the Engineer and to the Building Official.
1) Organizations/certification programs deemed to be qualified are:
a) ACI-CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification Program. b) Adhesive anchor manufacturer’s certification program, subject to acceptance by the Engineer and the Building Official.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and protect products as follows, unless more restrictive requirements are recommended by the manufacturer:

1. Store adhesives and adhesive components on pallets or shelving in a covered-storage area protected from weather.

Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete 03055-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03055 (DraftFinal)

2. Control temperature to maintain storage within manufacturer’s recommended temperature range.
a. If products have been stored at temperatures outside manufacturer’s recommended range, test by methods acceptable to the Engineer to confirm acceptability before installing in the Work.

3. Dispose of products that have passed their expiration date.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

B. Seismic Design Category (SDC) for structures: As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Like items of materials: Use end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve structural compatibility and singular responsibility.

B. Adhesives shall have a current Evaluation Report documenting testing and compliance with the requirements of ACI 355.4 and ICC-ES AC308 for use with un-cracked concrete and with cracked concrete in the Seismic Design Category specified.

C. Bond reinforcing bars and all thread rods in concrete using epoxy adhesive unless other adhesives specified are specifically indicated on the Drawings or approved in writing by the Engineer.

D. For locations where adhesive will be in direct contact with potable water in the finished work, provide documentation of testing and listing under NSF-61. Testing shall be by a nationally recognized agency acceptable to the Engineer.

2.02 EPOXY ADHESIVE
A. Materials:

1. Meeting the physical requirements of ASTM C881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class B or C depending on site conditions.

2. 2-component, 100 percent solids, insensitive to moisture.

3. Cure temperature, pot life, and workability: Compatible with intended use and environmental conditions.

B. Packaging:

1. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system furnished in side-by-side cartridges designed to fit into a manually or pneumatically operated caulking Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete 03055-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03055 (DraftFinal) gun, and with resin and hardener components isolated until mixing through manufacturer’s static mixing nozzle.
a. Nozzle designed to dispense components in the proper ratio and to thoroughly blend the components for injection from the nozzle directly into prepared hole.
b. Provide nozzle extensions as required to allow full-depth insertion and filing from the bottom of the hole.

2. Container markings: Include manufacturer’s name, product name, batch number, mix ratio by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions.

C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Hilti, Inc., HIT-RE 500-V3.

2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., SET-XP.

2.03 ACRYLIC AND HYBRID ADHESIVE
A. Materials:

1. 2-component, high-solids, acrylic-based or hybrid acrylic and epoxy-based adhesive.

2. Approved by the manufacturer for installation at substrate temperatures of 0 degrees Fahrenheit and above.

B. Packaging:

1. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system furnished in side-by-side cartridges designed to fit into a manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun, and with resin and hardener components isolated until mixing through manufacturer’s static mixing nozzle. Nozzle designed to dispense components in the proper ratio and to thoroughly blend the components for injection from the nozzle directly into prepared hole.

2. Container markings: Include manufacturer’s name, product name, batch number, mix ratio by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions.

C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Hilti, Inc., HIT-HY-200.

2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., AT-XP.

2.04 ALL THREAD RODS
A. Materials: As specified in Section 05120 - Structural Steel Framing for rods, nuts, and washers.

2.05 REINFORCING BARS
A. As specified in Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcing.

Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete 03055-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03055 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Execution of this work is restricted to installers who have personally completed the adhesive manufacturer’s on-site training for the products to be installed, and who are personally certified through a qualified certification program described under Quality Assurance and accepted by the Engineer and the Building Official.

1. Do not install holes or adhesive until training is complete.

B. Perform work in strict compliance with the accepted MPII and the following instructions. Where the accepted MPII and the instructions conflict, the MPII shall prevail.

C. Install reinforcing bars and all thread rods to embedment depth, and at spacing and locations indicated on the Drawings.

1. If embedment depth is not indicated, contact the Engineer for requirements.

2. Do not install adhesive-bonded all thread rods or reinforcing bars in upwardly inclined or overhead applications unless accepted in advance by the Engineer.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Do not begin installation of adhesive bonded anchors until:

1. Concrete has achieved an age of at least 21 days after placement.

2. On-site training in installation of adhesive bonded anchors by manufacturer’s technical representative is complete. Do not drill holes in concrete or install adhesive and embeds in holes.

B. Review manufacturer’s printed installation instructions (MPII) and “Conditions of Use” stipulated in the Evaluation Report before beginning work.

1. Bring to the attention of the adhesive manufacturer’s technical representative any discrepancies between these documents and resolve before proceeding with installation.

C. Install adhesive bonded anchors in full compliance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions using personnel who have successfully completed manufacturer’s on-site training for products to be used and who hold certifications specified in this Section.

D. Confirm that adhesive and substrate receiving adhesive are within manufacturer’s recommended range for temperature and moisture conditions and will remain so during the curing time for the product.

Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete 03055-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03055 (DraftFinal)

3.03 HOLE SIZING AND INSTALLATION
A. Drilling holes:

1. Determine location of reinforcing bars or other obstructions with a nondestructive indicator device, and mark locations with construction crayon on the surface of the concrete.

2. Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or other items embedded in the existing concrete without prior acceptance by the Engineer.

B. Hole drilling equipment:

1. Electric or pneumatic rotary impact type with medium or light impact. a. Installation of anchors in cored holes is not permitted. b. Set drill to “rotation only” mode, or to “rotation plus hammer” mode in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and the requirements of the Evaluation Report.
c. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches and “rotation plus hammer” mode is permitted, use lighter impact equipment to prevent micro-cracking and concrete spalling during the drilling process.

2. Drill bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15 unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer or required as a “condition of use” in the Evaluation Report.
a. Hollow drill bits with flushing air systems are preferred. Air supplied to hollow drill bits shall be free of oil, water, or other contaminants that will reduce bond.

C. Hole diameter: As recommended in the manufacturer’s installation instructions and the Evaluation Report.

D. Hole depth: As recommended in the manufacturer’s installation instructions to provide minimum effective embedment indicated on the Drawings.

E. Obstructions in drill path:

1. If an existing reinforcing bar or other obstruction is hit while drilling a hole, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, stop drilling. Prepare and fill the hole with dry-pack mortar. Relocate the hole to miss the obstruction and drill another hole to the required depth.
a. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of distance between abandoned and relocated holes before proceeding with the relocation.
b. Allow dry-pack mortar to cure to a strength equal to that of the surrounding concrete before resuming drilling in the area. c. Epoxy grout may be substituted for dry-pack mortar when accepted by the Engineer.

2. Avoid drilling an excessive number of holes in an area of a structural member, which would excessively weaken the member and endanger the stability of the structure.

3. When existing reinforcing steel is encountered during drilling and when specifically accepted by the Engineer, enlarge the hole by 1/8 inch, core Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete 03055-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03055 (DraftFinal) through the existing reinforcing steel at the larger diameter, and resume drilling at original hole diameter using pneumatic rotary impact drill.

4. Bent bar reinforcing bars: Where edge distances are critical and interference with existing reinforcing steel is likely, if acceptable to the Engineer, drill hole at 10-degree (or less) angle from axis of reinforcing bar or all thread rod being installed.

F. Cleaning holes:

1. Insert air nozzle to bottom of hole and blow out loose dust. a. Use compressed air that is free of oil, water, or other contaminants that will reduce bond.
b. Provide minimum air pressure of 90 pounds per square inch for not less than 4 seconds.

2. Using a stiff bristle brush with diameter that provides contact around the full perimeter of the hole, vigorously brush hole to dislodge compacted drilling dust. a. Insert brush to the bottom of the hole and withdraw using a simultaneous twisting motion.
b. Repeat at least 4 times.

3. Repeat the preceding steps as required to remove drilling dust or other material that will reduce bond, and in the number of cycles required by the MPII and the Evaluation Report.

4. Leave prepared holes clean and dry.

5. Protect prepared and cleaned holes from contamination and moisture until adhesive is installed.

6. Re-clean and dry previously prepared holes if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the hole has become contaminated after initial cleaning.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF ADHESIVE AND INSERTS
A. Clean and prepare inserts reinforcing bars and all thread rods:

1. Prepare embedded length of reinforcing bars and all thread rods by cleaning to bare metal. Inserts shall be free of oil, grease, paint, dirt, mill scale, rust, or other coatings that will reduce bond.

2. Solvent clean prepared reinforcing bars and all thread rods over the embedment length in accordance with SSPC SP-1. Provide an oil and grease free surface for bonding of adhesive to steel.

B. Fill holes with adhesive:

1. Starting at the bottom of the hole, fill hole with adhesive inserting the reinforcing bar or all thread rod.

2. Fill hole as nozzle is withdrawn without creating air voids.

3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, fill hole with sufficient adhesive so that excess adhesive is extruded out of the hole when the reinforcing bar or all thread rod is inserted.

4. Where necessary, seal hole at surface of concrete to prevent loss of adhesive during curing.

C. Installing reinforcing bars and all thread rods.

1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install bars and rods perpendicular to the concrete surface.

Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete 03055-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03055 (DraftFinal)

2. Insert reinforcing bars and all thread rods into adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended procedures.

3. Confirm that insert has reached the designated embedment in the concrete, and that adhesive completely surrounds the embedded portion.

4. Securely brace bars and all thread rods in place to prevent displacement while the adhesive cures. Bars and rods displaced during curing will be considered damaged and replacement will be required.

5. Clean excess adhesive from the mouth of the hole.

D. Curing and loading.

1. Provide and maintain curing conditions recommended by the adhesive manufacturer for the period required to fully cure the adhesive at the temperature of the concrete.

2. Do not disturb or load bonded embeds until manufacturer’s recommended cure time, based on temperature of the concrete, has elapsed.

3.05 POST-INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES
A. Do not bend bars or all thread rods after bonding to the concrete, unless accepted in advance by the Engineer.

B. Attachments to all thread rods:

1. After assemblies to be connected are placed, install nuts and washers for threaded rods as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Draw nuts down tight, using practices specified for “snug tight” installation of bolts in steel to steel connections.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide field quality control over the Work of this Section as specified in Section 01450 - Quality Control.

B. Do not allow work described in this Section to be performed by individuals who do not hold the specified certifications and who have not completed the specified job site training.

C. Manufacturer’s services:

1. Before beginning installation, furnish adhesive manufacturer’s technical representative to conduct on-site training in proper storage and handling of adhesive, drilling and cleaning of holes, and preparation and installation of reinforcing bars and all thread rods.
a. Provide notice of scheduled training to the Engineer and to special inspector(s) not less than 10 working days before training occurs.

Engineer and special inspector may attend training sessions.

2. Submit record, signed by the manufacturer’s technical representative, listing Contractor’s personnel who completed the training. Only qualified personnel who have completed manufacturer’s on-site training shall perform installations.

Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete 03055-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03055 (DraftFinal) D. Field inspections and testing:

1. Hole drilling and preparation.

2. Results: Submit records of inspections and testing to the Engineer by electronic copies within 24 hours after completion.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide field quality assurance over the Work of this Section as specified in Section 01450 - Quality Control.

B. Special inspections, special tests, and structural observation:

1. Provide as specified in Section 01455 - Regulatory Quality Assurance.

2. Frequency of inspections:
a. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in this Section, provide periodic special inspection as required by the Evaluation Report for the product installed.
b. Provide continuous inspection for the initial installation of each type and size of adhesive bonded reinforcing bar and all thread rod. Subsequent installations of the same anchor may be installed with periodic inspection as defined in subsequent paragraphs.
c. Provide continuous inspection of drilling, cleaning and bonding activities for bars and rods installed in horizontal and upwardly inclined positions.

3. Preparation:
a. Review Drawings and Specifications for the Work to be observed. b. Review adhesive manufacturer’s MPII and recommended installation procedures.
c. Review Evaluation Report “Conditions of Use” and “Special Inspection” requirements.

4. Inspection: Periodic:
a. Initial inspection. Provide an initial inspection for each combination of concrete and reinforcing bar strength or concrete strength and all thread rod material being installed. During initial inspection, observe the following for compliance with the installation requirements.
1) Concrete: Class (minimum specified compressive strength) and thickness.
2) Environment: Temperature conditions at work area, and moisture conditions of concrete and drilled hole.
3) Holes: Locations, spacing, and edge distances; verification of drill bit compliance with requirements; cleaning equipment and procedures; cleanliness of hole. Before adhesive is placed, confirm that depth and preparation of holes conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the MPII, and the “Conditions of Use” listed in the Evaluation Report.
4) Adhesive: Product manufacturer and name; lot number and expiration date; temperature of product at installation; installation procedure. Note initial set times observed during installation. 5) Reinforcing bars and all thread rods: Material diameter and length; steel grade and/or strength; cleaning and preparation; cleanliness at insertion; minimum effective embedment provided.

Adhesive-Bonded Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods in Concrete 03055-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03055 (DraftFinal) b. Subsequent inspections: Subsequent installations of the same reinforcing bars or all thread rods may be performed without the presence of the special inspector, provided that:
1) There is no change in personnel performing the installation, the general strength and characteristics of the concrete receiving the inserts, or the reinforcing bars and all thread rods being used. 2) For ongoing installations, the special inspector visits the site at least once per day during each day of installation to observe the work for compliance with material requirements and installation procedures.

5. Inspection: Continuous.
a. Make observations as described under “Inspection - Periodic, Initial Inspection” during drilling, cleaning, and bonding activities for all bars and rods installed.

6. Records of inspections:
a. Provide a written record of each inspection using forms acceptable to the Engineer and to the Building Official.
b. Submit electronic copies of inspection reports to the Engineer within 24 hours after completion of inspection.

END OF SECTION
Epoxies
03071-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03071 (DraftFinal) SECTION 03071

EPOXIES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Epoxy.

2. Epoxy gel.

3. Epoxy bonding agent.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Systems for Concrete.

2. C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear.

3. D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.

4. D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.

B. NSF International (NSF):

1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s data completely describing epoxy materials:

1. Submit evidence of conformance to ASTM C881. Include manufacturer’s designations of Type, Grade, Class, and Color.

2. Submit documentation that materials meet or exceed the specified strength and performance characteristics. Indicate test methods and test results.

3. Submit documentation confirming listing under NSF 61.

C. Quality control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Performance requirements:

1. Provide epoxy materials that are new.

2. Store and use products within limitations in accordance with the manufacturer.

3. Perform and conduct Work of this Section in a neat, orderly manner.

Epoxies
03071-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03071 (DraftFinal)

2.02 MATERIALS
A. General:

1. Moisture tolerant, water-insensitive, two-component epoxy resin adhesive material containing 100 percent solids, and meeting or exceeding the performance properties specified when tested in accordance with the standards specified.

2. Listed under NSF 61 for use in direct contact with potable water.

B. Epoxy: Low viscosity product in accordance with ASTM C881; Types I, II, and IV; Grade 1; Class C , except as modified in this Section.

1. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal:
a. Dayton Superior, Unitex Pro-Poxy 100.
b. Master Builders Solutions/Sika, MasterInject 1380.
c. Sika Corporation, Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV.

2. Required properties:

Table 1. Material Properties - Epoxy
Property Test Method Required Results (“neat”)
Tensile Strength (7-day) ASTM D638 7,000 pounds per square inch, minimum.

Compressive Yield Strength
(7-day)
ASTM D695 10,000 pounds per square inch, minimum.

Bond Strength (harded
concrete to harded concrete
after 2-day cure)
ASTM C882 1,000 pounds per square inch, minimum.

Concrete failure before failure of epoxy.

Viscosity (mixed) 250 to 550 centipoise
Notes:
(1) Testing results are for materials installed and cured at a temperature between 72 and 78 degrees Fahrenheit for 7 days, unless otherwise noted.

C. Epoxy gel: Non-sagging product in accordance with ASTM C881, Types I and IV, Grade 3, Class C.

1. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal:
a. Dayton Superior, Sure Anchor J50.
b. Master Builders Solutions/Sika, MasterEmaco ADH 327. c. Sika Corp., Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel.

2. Required properties:

Table 2. Material Properties - Epoxy Gel
Property Test Method Required Results (“neat”)
Tensile Strength (7-day) ASTM D638 2,000 pounds per square inch, minimum.

Compressive Yield Strength
(7-day)
ASTM D695 8,000 pounds per square inch, minimum.

Bond Strength (14-day) ASTM C882 1,500 pounds per square inch, minimum.

Notes:
(1) Testing results are for materials installed and cured at a temperature between 72 and 78 degrees Fahrenheit for 7 days, unless otherwise noted.

Epoxies
03071-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03071 (DraftFinal) D. Epoxy bonding agent: Non-sagging product in accordance with ASTM C881, Type II, Grade 2, Class C.

1. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal:
a. Dayton Superior, Sure Bond J58.
b. Master Builders Solutions/Sika, MasterEmaco ADH 326. c. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL.

2. Required properties:

Table 3. Material Properties - Epoxy Bonding Agent
Property Test Method Required Results
Tensile Strength (7-day) ASTM D638 3,300 pounds per square inch, minimum.

Compressive Yield Strength
(7-day)
ASTM D695 8,300 pounds per square inch, minimum.

Bond Strength (14-days) ASTM C882 1,800 pounds per square inch, minimum. Concrete failure before failure of epoxy bonding agent.

Pot Life - Minimum 90 minutes at 73 degrees Fahrenheit.

Notes:
(1) Testing results are for materials installed and cured at a temperature between 72 and 78 degrees Fahrenheit for 7 days, unless otherwise noted.

3. If increased contact time is required for concrete placement, epoxy resin/Portland cement bonding agent, as specified in Section 03072 - Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Bonding Agent, may be used instead of epoxy bonding agent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install and cure epoxy materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Epoxy:

1. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Epoxy gel:

1. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2. Use for vertical or overhead work, or where high viscosity epoxy is required.

3. Epoxy gel used for vertical or overhead work may be used for horizontal work.

D. Epoxy bonding agent:

1. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2. Will not be required for filling form tie holes or for normal finishing and patching of similar sized small defects.

END OF SECTION

Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Bonding Agent
03072-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03072 (DraftFinal) SECTION 03072

EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. C109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. Cube Specimens).

2. C348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars.

3. C496 - Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

4. C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used With Concrete By Slant Shear.

B. Federal Highway Administration (FHWA):

1. FHWA-RD-86-193 - Highway Concrete Pavement Technology Development and Testing Volume V: Field Evaluation of SHRP C9206 Test Sites (Bridge Deck Overlays).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Sika Corp., Sika Armatec 110.

B. Substitutions: The use of other than the specified product will be considered, providing the Contractor requests its use in writing to the Engineer. This request shall be accompanied by:

1. A certificate of compliance from an approved independent testing laboratory that the proposed substitute product meets or exceeds specified performance criteria, tested in accordance with the specified test standards.

2. Documented proof that the proposed substitute product has a 1-year proven record of performance of bonding portland cement mortar/concrete to hardened portland cement mortar/concrete, confirmed by actual field tests and 5 successful installations that the Engineer can investigate.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive:

1. Component "A" shall be an epoxy resin/water emulsion containing suitable viscosity control agents. It shall not contain butyl glycidyl ether.

Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Bonding Agent
03072-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03072 (DraftFinal)

2. Component "B" shall be primarily a water solution of a polyamine.

3. Component "C" shall be a blend of selected portland cements and sands.

4. The material shall not contain asbestos.

2.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Properties of the mixed epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive:

1. Pot life: 75 to 105 minutes.

2. Contact time: 24 hours.

3. Color: Dark gray.

B. Properties of the cured epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive:

1. Compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C109:
a. 3 day: 4,500 pounds per square-inch minimum.
b. 7 days: 6,500 pounds per square-inch minimum.
c. 28 days: 8,500 pounds per square-inch minimum.

2. Splitting tensile strength in accordance with ASTM C496:
a. 28 days: 600 pounds per square-inch minimum.

3. Flexural strength:
a. 1,100 pounds per square-inch minimum in accordance with ASTM C348.

4. Bond strength in accordance with ASTM C882 modified at 14 days:
a. 0 hours open time: 2,800 pounds per square-inch minimum. b. 24 hours open time: 2,600 pounds per square-inch minimum.

5. The epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive shall not produce a vapor barrier.

6. Material must be proven to prevent corrosion of reinforcing steel when tested under the procedures as set forth by the FHWA Program Report Number FHWA-RD-86-193. Proof shall be in the form of an independent testing laboratory corrosion report showing prevention of corrosion of the reinforcing steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mixing the epoxy resin: Shake contents of Component "A" and Component "B." Empty all of both components into a clean, dry mixing pail. Mix thoroughly for 30 seconds with a jiffy paddle on a low-speed with 400 to 600 revolutions per minute drill. Slowly add the entire contents of Component "C" while continuing to mix for a minimum of 3 minutes and until uniform with no lumps. Mix only the quantity that can be applied within its pot life.

B. Placement procedure:

1. Apply to prepared surface with stiff-bristle brush, broom, or "hopper-type" spray equipment:
a. For hand applications: Place fresh plastic concrete/mortar while the bonding bridge adhesive is wet or dry, up to 24 hours.
b. For machine applications: Allow the bonding bridge adhesive to dry for 12 hours minimum.

Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Bonding Agent
03072-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03072 (DraftFinal) C. Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive in the manufacturer's current printed literature.

3.02 CLEANING
A. Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of spillovers onto adjacent areas.

END OF SECTION

Concrete Formwork
03102-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03102 (DraftFinal) SECTION 03102

CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Concrete formwork.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. 117 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary.

B. NSF International (NSF):

1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Information on proposed forming system:

1. Submit in such detail as the Engineer may require to assure themselves that intent of the Specifications can be complied with by use of proposed system.

2. Alternate combinations of plywood thickness and stud spacing may be submitted.

B. Form release agent: NSF 61 certification prepared by NSF, Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other similar nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of formwork manufacturers: Use only forming systems by manufacturers having a minimum of 5 years of experience, except as otherwise specified, or accepted in writing by the Engineer.

B. Regulatory requirements: Install Work of this Section in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations.

Concrete Formwork
03102-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03102 (DraftFinal) PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Design requirements:

1. Concrete forms, falsework, and shoring in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations.

2. Forms and ties to withstand concrete pressures without bulging, spreading, or lifting of forms.

B. Performance requirements:

1. Construct forms so that finished concrete conforms to shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on the Drawings.

2. It is intended that surface of concrete after stripping presents smooth, hard, and dense finish that requires minimum amount of finishing.

3. Provide sufficient number of forms so that the Work may be performed rapidly and present uniform appearance in form patterns and finish.

4. Use forms that are clean and free from dirt, concrete, and other debris. a. Coat with form release agent if required, prior to use or reuse.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Forms: Built-up plywood:

1. May be substituted for prefabricated forming system subject to following minimum requirements:
a. Size and material:
1) Use full size 4-foot by 8-foot plywood sheets, except where smaller pieces are able to cover entire area.
2) Sheet construction: 5-ply plywood sheets, 3/4-inch nominal, made with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surface that is coated or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement.
b. Wales: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch lumber.
c. Studding and wales: Contain no loose knots and be free of warps, cups, and bows.

B. Forms: Steel or steel-framed:

1. Steel forms:
a. Rigidly constructed and capable of being braced for minimum deflection of finish surface.
b. Capable of providing finish surfaces that are flat without bows, cups, or dents.

2. Steel-framed plywood forms:
a. Provide forms that are rigidly constructed and capable of being braced. b. Plywood paneling: 5-ply, 5/8-inch nominal or 3/4-inch nominal, made with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surface that is coated or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement.

Concrete Formwork
03102-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03102 (DraftFinal) C. Form release agent.

1. Effective, non-staining, bond-breaking coating compatible with form surfaces and concrete mixes used.

2. Certified for conformance to NSF 61 and leaving no taste or odor on the concrete surface.

D. Form ties:

1. General:
a. Provide form ties for forming system selected that are manufactured by a recognized manufacturer of concrete forming equipment.
b. Do not use wire ties or wood spreaders of any form.
c. Provide ties of type that accurately tie, lock, and spread forms. d. Provide form ties of such design that when forms are removed, they locate no metal or other material within 1-1/2 inches of the surface of the concrete.
e. Do not allow holes in forms for ties to allow leakage during placement of concrete.

2. Cone-snap ties:
a. Shall form a cone shaped depression in the concrete with minimum diameter of 1 inch at the surface of the concrete and minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches.
b. Provide neoprene waterseal washer that is located near the center of the concrete.

3. Taper ties:
a. Neoprene plugs for taper tie holes: Size so that after they are driven, plugs are located in center third of wall thickness.

E. Incidentals:

1. External angles:
a. Where not otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide with 3/4-inch bevel, formed by utilizing true dimensioned wood or solid plastic chamfer strip on walkways, slabs, walls, beams, columns, and openings. b. Provide 1/4-inch bevel formed by utilizing true dimensioned wood or solid plastic chamfer strip on walkways, walls, and slabs at expansion, and construction joints.

2. Keyways: Steel, plastic, or lumber treated with form release agent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Site verification of conditions:

1. Do not place concrete until forms have been checked for alignment, level, and strength, and mechanical and electrical inserts or other embedded items for correct location.

Concrete Formwork
03102-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03102 (DraftFinal)

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Forms: Built-up plywood:

1. Studding:
a. Spaced at 16 inches or 24 inches on center.
b. Closer spacing may be required depending upon strength requirements of the forms, in order to prevent any bulging surfaces on faces of finished concrete work.
c. Install studs perpendicular to grain of exterior plys of plywood sheets.

2. Wales: Double lumber material with minimum size as specified in this Section.

3. Number of form reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating or overlay used, and ability to maintain forms in condition such that they are capable of producing flat, smooth, hard, dense finish on concrete when stripped.

B. Forms: Steel or steel-framed:

1. Steel forms:
a. Adequately brace forms for minimum deflection of finish surface.

2. Steel-framed plywood forms:
a. Rigidly construct and brace with joints fitting closely and smoothly. b. Number of form reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating or overlay used.

3. Built-up plywood forms: As specified in this Section, may be used in conjunction with steel forms or steel-framed plywood forms for special forming conditions such as corbels and forming around items which will project through forms.

C. Form bracing and alignment:

1. Line and grade: Limit deviations to tolerances which will permit proper installation of structural embedded items or mechanical and electrical equipment and piping.

2. Formwork:
a. Securely brace, support, tie down, or otherwise hold in place to prevent movement.
b. Make adequate provisions for uplift pressure, lateral pressure on forms, and deflection of forms.

3. When second lift is placed on hardened concrete: Take special precautions in formwork at top of old lift and bottom of new lift to prevent:
a. Spreading and vertical or horizontal displacement of forms. b. Grout “bleeding” on finish concrete surfaces.

4. Pipe stubs, anchor bolts, and other embedded items: Set in forms where required.

5. Cracks, openings, or offsets at joints in formwork: Close those that are 1/16 inch or larger by tightening forms or by filling with acceptable crack filler.

D. Forms: Incidentals:

1. Keyways: Construct as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Reentrant angles: May be left square.

3. Level strips: Install at top of wall concrete placements to maintain true line at horizontal construction joints.

4. Inserts:
a. Encase pipes, anchor bolts, steps, reglets, castings, and other inserts, as indicated on the Drawings or as required, in concrete.

Concrete Formwork
03102-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03102 (DraftFinal)

5. Pipe and conduit penetrations:
a. Install pipe and conduit in structures as indicated on the Drawings and seal with materials as specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealants.

E. Form release agent:

1. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Form ties:

1. Cone-snap ties: Tie forms together at not more than 2-foot centers vertically and horizontally.

3.03 FORM REMOVAL
A. General:

1. Keep forms in place, as specified in the following paragraphs, to provide curing and to protect concrete surfaces and edges from damage.

2. Immediately after forms are removed, carefully examine concrete surfaces, and repair any irregularities in surfaces and finishes as specified.

B. Form removal:

1. Do not remove forms from concrete which has been placed when outside ambient air temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit until the following conditions are satisfied:
a. Concrete has sufficient strength to allow form removal without damage to surfaces.
b. At least 48 hours have elapsed since the end of concrete placement. c. Provisions are in place to maintain moisture for curing concrete, and temperature at or above the required minimum curing temperature specified.

2. Vertical forms:
a. Retain in place for a minimum of 24 hours after concrete is placed. b. If concrete has sufficient strength and hardness to resist surface or other damage after 24 hours, forms may be removed.

3. Other forms supporting concrete, and shoring: Retain in place as follows:
a. Formed sides of footings: 24 hours minimum.
b. Formed vertical sides of beams, girders, and similar members: 48 hours minimum.
c. Forms below slabs, beams, and girders: Until concrete strength reaches specified strength f’c or until shoring is installed.
1) Shoring for slabs, beams, and girders: Shore until concrete strength reaches minimum specified 28-day compressive strength.

3.04 SURFACE REPAIRS AND FINISHING
A. Immediately after forms are removed, carefully examine concrete surfaces, and repair any irregularities in surfaces and finishes as specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Form ties: Fill tie holes as follows:

1. Remove form ties from surfaces.

2. Roughen cone shaped tie holes by heavy sandblasting before repair.

Concrete Formwork
03102-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03102 (DraftFinal)

3. Dry pack cone shaped tie holes with dry-pack mortar as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting.

4. Taper ties:
a. After forms and taper ties are removed from wall, plug tie holes with neoprene plug as follows:
1) Heavy sandblast and then clean tie holes.
2) After cleaning, drive neoprene plug into each of taper tie holes with steel rod. Final location of neoprene plug shall be in center third of wall thickness. Bond neoprene plug to concrete with epoxy. 3) Locate steel rod in cylindrical recess and against middle of plug during driving.
a) At no time are plugs to be driven on flat area outside cylindrical recess.
b. Dry-pack of taper tie holes:
1) After installing plugs in tie holes, coat tie hole surface with epoxy bonding agent and fill with dry-pack mortar as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting.
a) Place dry-pack mortar in holes in layers with thickness not exceeding tie hole diameter and heavily compact each layer. b) Dry-pack the outside of the hole no sooner than 7 days after the inside of the hole has been dry packed.
c) Wall surfaces in area of dry-packed tie holes: On the water side of water containing structures and the outside of below grade walls:
(1) Cover with minimum of 10 mils of epoxy gel.
(2) Provide epoxy gel coating on wall surfaces that extend minimum of 2 inches past dry-pack mortar filled tie holes. (3) Provide finish surfaces that are free from sand streaks or other voids.

3.05 TOLERANCES:

A. Finished concrete shall conform to shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on the Drawings.

B. Construct Work within the tolerances in accordance with ACI 117, except as modified in the following paragraphs or as indicated on the Drawings.

1. General:
a. At certain locations in the Work, tolerances required for equipment placement and operation may be more restrictive than the general tolerance requirements of this Section.
b. Confirm equipment manufacturers’ required tolerances for location and operation of equipment that will be installed, and construct concrete to satisfy those requirements.

2. Slabs:
a. Slope: Uniformly sloped to drain when slope is indicated on the Drawings. b. Slabs indicated to be level: Have maximum vertical deviation of 1/8 inch in 10-foot horizontal length without any apparent changes in grade.

3. Circular tank walls:
a. Contractor may deviate from finish line indicated on the Drawings by use of forms with chord lengths not to exceed 2 feet.

Concrete Formwork
03102-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03102 (DraftFinal)

4. Inserts and embedments:
a. Set to tolerances required for proper installation and operation of equipment or systems to which insert pertains.
b. Maximum tolerances: As follows:

Item Tolerance
Sleeves and inserts Plus 1/8 inch; minus 1/8 inch.

Anchor bolts:

Projected ends Plus 1/4 inch; minus 0.0 inch.

Axial alignment Not more than 2 degrees off the axis indicated on the Drawings.

Setting location Plus 1/16 inch; minus 1/16 inch.

All embedments Minimum 1 inch clearance from reinforcing steel. c. Securing embedded items in formwork by wiring or welding to reinforcement is not permitted.

C. Remove and replace Work that does not conform to required tolerances. Procedures and products employed in and resulting from such re-work shall be acceptable to the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

Concrete Accessories
03150-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/03150 (DraftFinal) SECTION 03150

CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL

Roseville City CouncilApril 16, 2025

Roseville City Council
April 16, 2025